JP7294931B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

As a game machine, there is a game machine capable of executing a suggestive performance suggesting control to be in an advantageous state and a preparatory performance for notifying that the suggestive performance will be executed before the suggestive performance is executed. For example, Patent Literature 1 describes an effect of stocking (displaying) arrows that change the pending display around the pending display.

JP 2017-131277 A

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, there is a risk that the interest may rather decrease due to the execution of another effect during the execution of the effect that raises the degree of expectation.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine that can maintain interest.

(A) To achieve the above objectives,
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
setting means capable of setting a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player;
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting control to the advantageous state;
a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparation effect for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed;
and a production determination means capable of deciding whether or not to execute the production ,
The suggestive effect comprises a first suggestive effect, a second suggestive effect different from the first suggestive effect, and the first suggestive effect different from the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect when executed. and a third suggestive effect in which the rate of control to the advantageous state is lower than that of the second suggestive effect,
The preparation effect includes a first preparation effect for notifying that the first suggestive effect will be executed, and a second preparation effect for notifying that the second suggestive effect will be executed,
The effect determining means executes respective effects of the first suggesting effect, the second suggesting effect, the third suggesting effect, the first preparation effect, and the second preparation effect. It is possible to individually decide whether or not
Based on the determination of the effect determining means, the suggestive effect executing means and the preparation effect executing means can execute the third suggestive effect, the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect in parallel during the same period. and
The third suggestion is higher when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is executed than when either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is executed. The production is easy to execute,
The preparation effect execution means is capable of executing the first preparation effect by a first pattern and a second pattern having a lower rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first pattern when executed,
The first preparation effect and the third suggestive effect of the first pattern can be executed in parallel during the same period, while the first preparation effect and the third suggestive effect of the second pattern can be executed in parallel during the same period. and do not run
The first preparation effect and the second preparation effect differ in the length of the period during which they are executed,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the second suggestive effect corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means.
It is characterized by
Further, (1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a plurality of types of machines with different degrees of advantage to the player are available. A game machine that can be set to any of set values (for example, a pachinko game machine 1 or the like that can be set to any of a plurality of types of set values with different winning probabilities of big wins), controls the progress of the game, and controls the game. A game control means for transmitting commands according to the progress of the game (for example, the CPU 103 of the main board 11 for controlling the progress of the game and transmitting the effect control command according to the progress of the game), and the game control means Effect control means for controlling the execution of the effect based on the command received (for example, the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 for controlling the execution of the effect based on the effect control command transmitted from the CPU 103, etc.) The game control means controls the progress of the game based on continuous values corresponding to multiple types of setting values (for example, the CPU 103 controls multiple types of selectable setting values corresponding to continuous values). a first command capable of specifying the number of types of setting values, a second command capable of specifying values corresponding to the set setting values; (For example, the CPU 103 transmits a selectable setting command capable of specifying the number of types of selectable setting values and a setting command capable of specifying a value corresponding to the set setting value. etc.), the production control means specifies the setting value that is set based on the first command and the second command (for example, the production control CPU 120 determines the selectable setting command and the setting command Based on, such as specifying the set value that has been set), it is possible to control the execution of the production based on values that correspond to a plurality of types of setting values and are discontinuous (for example, the production control CPU 120 can control a plurality of It is possible to control the execution of effects based on discontinuous values that correspond to the set value of the type, etc.), and a suggestive effect that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a pending display notice effect, a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a timer effect, a chance-threat-notice effect, etc.); and a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a timer preparation effect, etc.), and the suggesting effect includes a first suggesting effect (for example, a pending display notice effect) and a second suggesting effect different from the first suggesting effect (for example, , timer effect), and a third suggesting effect (for example, a chance-first-notice effect) different from the first suggesting effect and the second suggesting effect, and the preparatory effect is executed by executing the first suggesting effect. and a second preparation effect (for example, a timer preparation effect) for notifying that the second suggestion effect will be executed. 3 suggestion effect, the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect can be executed in parallel during the same period (see FIGS. 17-11 (A1) and (A2)), and the first preparation effect and the second The third suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is being executed than when one of the two preparation effects is being executed (for example, 17-10).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the effect control means recognize the current set value regardless of the type of selectable set value without pressurizing the capacity of the game control means. Moreover, a suitable value can be reflected in the effect as a set value. In addition, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, display means provided on the same substrate as the game control means (for example, display monitor 21TM029 provided on the same main substrate 11 as the CPU 103, etc.), The means can display a value corresponding to the plurality of types of setting values and different from the continuous values on the display means (the CPU 103 can display a value corresponding to the plurality of types of setting values and different from the continuous values). A value that can be easily recognized by the store clerk may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a suitable value as a set value on the display means provided on the same board as the game control means.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above, the game control means transmits the first command together with a power-on command when power supply to the game machine is started or restarted (for example, The CPU 103 may transmit the selectable setting command together with the initialization command when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started or restarted.

According to such a configuration, the present setting value can be recognized by the effect control means without using the power-on command.

(4) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above, if the effect control means cannot specify the set value, the set value is set to the advantage of the player. (For example, if the effect control CPU 120 cannot identify the set value that has been set, the set value that has been set is the set value that has the lowest winning probability of the jackpot. 1”, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent processing from being performed assuming that a set value with a higher degree of advantage than the set value is set.

(5) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above, the effect control means can execute a suggestive effect that suggests a set value (for example, the effect control CPU 120 When the number of selectable setting values is small, the setting value is higher than when the number of selectable setting values is large. (For example, when the number of selectable setting values is small, the effect control CPU 120 may It may be made difficult to identify which setting value is set by lowering the execution ratio of the advance notice effect of the special mode than when there are many .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a suitable suggestion effect according to the number of selectable setting values.

(6) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above, the effect control means can back up information on set values (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can generate a selectable setting command and setting commands, and storing the information of the received effect control command in the received command log area, and storing the information of the current setting value recognized as the set value in the setting value log area, etc.), use (For example, the effect control CPU 120 treats the information stored in the received command log area as a backup target for some uses, and the set value log area for other uses. may be treated as a backup target, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably utilize the information regarding the set value according to the application.

In addition, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions relating to gaming machines of the following (7) to (11). Conventionally, in a game machine, as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-131277, a suggestive effect suggesting that control is performed in an advantageous state, and a suggestive effect is executed before the suggestive effect is executed. There was one that was configured to be executable with a preparatory performance that foretells that. However, in such a gaming machine, there is a risk that the interest may be reduced by executing another effect during the execution of the effect that raises the expectation. There is a demand for the provision of a gaming machine that can maintain the

The gaming machine of (7) is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a suggestive effect (for example, a pending display notice) that suggests that it will be controlled to an advantageous state production, timer production, chance first notice production, etc.); and a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a timer preparation effect, etc.), and the suggesting effect includes a first suggesting effect (for example, a pending display notice effect) and a second suggesting effect different from the first suggesting effect (for example, a timer effect) and a third suggestive effect (for example, a chance forewarning effect) different from the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect, and the preparatory effect foretells that the first suggestive effect will be executed. and a second preparation effect (for example, a timer preparation effect) for notifying that the second suggestion effect will be executed, a third suggestion effect, a second The first preparation effect and the second preparation effect can be executed in parallel during the same period (see FIGS. 17-11 (A1) and (A2)), and either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is executed. It is characterized in that the third suggestive effect is more likely to be executed when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is being executed than when the second preparation effect is being executed (for example, see FIGS. 17-10).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

(8) In the gaming machine of (7) above, the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect are executed in different periods (for example, after the execution of the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) is completed) , a timer preparation effect is executed (see FIG. 17-7(D)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

(9) In the gaming machine of (7) or (8) above, the first suggestive effect includes a plurality of types of effect modes (e.g., first effect mode (blue), second effect mode (green), third effect mode). (red), etc. See FIG. 17-3 (A)), and the first preparation effect includes a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, first effect mode (small effect), second effect mode (Large effect), etc. See FIG. 17-3 (B)), and depending on which production mode the first preparation production is executed, the executable first suggestion production Effect mode is different (for example, when the pending display notice preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed, the pending display notice effect is executed by one of the first to third effect modes, and the second effect mode When the pending display advance notice preparation effect is executed, the pending display advance notice effect is executed in one of the second to third effect modes.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (7) to (9) above, the suggestive effect can be executed without executing the corresponding preparation effect (for example, if the pending display notice effect or timer effect is executed, When it is determined, it may be determined that the pending display advance notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect are not executed.See Fig. 17-3 (B), Fig. 17-4 (B)), whether an uncorresponding preparation effect has been executed Depending on whether or not, the ease of execution differs (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-3, when the result of determination at the time of winning is a big hit, it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect. Also, as shown in Figure 17-4, it is easy to determine if the timer effect is also executed.However, it may be determined that the timer preparation effect is not executed.Then, the pending display notice preparation effect that does not correspond to the timer effect is executed, the timer effect is more likely to be executed than when the pending display advance notice preparation effect is not executed).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

(11) In any one of the gaming machines from (7) to (10) above, depending on whether or not the preparatory effect is executed, the ratio of which suggestive effect of the effect mode is executed differs (for example, When the performance mode of the pending display advance notice effect and the timer preparation effect is determined to be the second effect mode, the ratio of deciding to execute the suspension display advance notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect compared to the case of determining the first effect mode. is high (see FIGS. 17-3(B) and 17-4(B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the first special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the character object control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a payout control board. It is a rear view showing a pachinko game machine. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; (1) to (3) are explanatory diagrams showing the effect modes of the setting suggesting effect, and (4) is an explanatory view showing a table for determining the effect mode of the setting suggesting effect. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing; 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing; 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing; FIG. 4 is a timing chart showing an output period of a security signal; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of notification when a setting changing flag is set when power is turned on; 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing; (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control in the case where power is interrupted before setting values are determined, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing control in the case where power is interrupted after setting values are determined. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the special variable winning ball apparatus in the characteristic part 052IW. FIG. 11 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like in the characterizing portion 052IW; It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the big-hit probability and small-hit probability for every setting value. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the big-hit probability and small-hit probability for every setting value. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits. It is an explanatory view for explaining the release pattern of the special variable winning ball device. It is an explanatory view for explaining the release pattern of the variable winning ball device and the special variable winning ball device in the KT state. It is an explanatory view for explaining the release pattern of the variable winning ball device and the special variable winning ball device in the KT state. It is an explanatory view for explaining the release pattern of the variable winning ball device and the special variable winning ball device in the KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st fluctuation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special design variation process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special design normal process. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special design stop process. It is a flow chart which shows the role product control normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a gate passage waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during big-hit opening. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows small hit end processing. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to transition the game state. It is a flow chart which shows an example of design process processing normally. It is a flowchart which shows normal design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal design stop processing. It is a flow chart showing normal electric accessary product opening pre-processing. 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; It is a flowchart which shows a suggestion production|presentation process at the time of over winning a prize. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining an over-winning suggestive effect; It is a flow chart which shows suggestion production processing at the time of small hit winning a prize. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a suggestion production|presentation determination table at the time of small-hit winning a prize. It is a flow chart which shows number-of-balls display suggestion production processing. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a number-of-balls display suggestion effect determination table; It is a flow chart which shows prize ball number emphasizing effect processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the number of prize balls emphasis effect determination table. 10 is a flowchart showing variable display start waiting processing. 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a setting value suggestion effect determination table; It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows per special figure waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows per special figure waiting processing. It is a flow chart which shows ending production processing. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of a setting value suggestion effect; It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect of small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production|presentation. It is an explanatory view for explaining a display mode of hitting to the right information. It is an explanatory view for explaining the effect modes of the over winning suggesting effect, the small win suggesting effect, and the number of prize balls display suggesting effect. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effect modes of the over winning suggesting effect, the small win suggesting effect, and the number of prize balls display suggesting effect. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit is achieved in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation process in the first modification. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation process in the first modification. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit is achieved in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol in Modification 1. FIG. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation process in the second modification. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation process in the second modification. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit is achieved in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol in Modification 2. FIG. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation process in the third modification. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit is achieved in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol in Modification 3. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation process in the fourth modification. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation process in the fourth modification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of suggestion production|presentation processing at the time of waiting for gate passage. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a gate-passing-waiting suggestion effect determination table; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a gate-passing-waiting suggestion effect determination table; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of the suggestion production|presentation at the time of waiting for gate passage. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of various suggestive effect determination tables; 8 is a flowchart showing an example of setting value display processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a setting value determination table for display; 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting value update processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of setting command transmission processing; It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a setting value information storage area; It is a figure which shows an example of an advance notice mode determination table and a special mode pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a display screen during maintenance mode; It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win A), (B) is an explanatory view showing a big win variation pattern determination table (for big win B and big win C), and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation pattern determination table; (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of display contents. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning. It is a flow chart which shows start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart showing a winning random number value determination process. It is a flow chart which shows a part of production|presentation control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading notice setting processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination ratio of a display pattern of a pre-reading advance notice effect; 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing suggestive effect determination processing during rear variable display; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a determination ratio of effects to be executed as suggestive effects during rear variable display, and (B) is a diagram showing production patterns of big hit suggestive effects and set suggestive effects to be executed as suggestive effects during rear variable display. be. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation pattern of a big hit suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation pattern of setting suggestion production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing suggestive effect determination processing during front variable display; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the performance to be executed as the front variable display suggesting performance when execution of the big hit suggesting performance is determined, and (B) is a diagram showing the execution of the set suggesting performance is determined. (C) is a diagram showing the effect pattern of the character effect and the timer effect executed as the suggestive effect during the variable front display, (D) is a diagram showing the degree of expectation for a big hit of the character effect and the timer effect and the degree of execution expectation of the setting suggestion effect. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the character effect, (B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the timer effect, and (C) shows the content of each effect pattern of the timer effect. It is a diagram. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution period in variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing execution determination ratios and execution expectations of setting suggestion effects as suggestive effects during front variable display of character effects and timer effects in a modification; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of a pending memory display and effect images in a modified example; It is a figure which shows the execution period of the setting suggestion production|presentation by the variable display of normal reach in a modification, non-shortening non-reach, and shortening non-reach. It is a flow chart which shows a part of production|presentation control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pending display advance notice effect determination table and a pending display advance notice preparation effect determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a timer effect determination table and a timer advance notice preparation effect determination table; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a chance eye announcement effect determination table; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice execution processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of execution timings of a pending display notice effect (preparation effect) and a timer effect (preparation effect); FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect modes of the pending display advance notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect; It is a flow chart which shows an example of a chance notice setting process. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a chance prediction execution propriety determination table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect modes of the pending display advance notice preparation effect and the chance eye advance notice effect;

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

In addition, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, there is provided a right-handed display 26 for prompting a right-handed operation in which a shooting operation is performed aiming at the right side of the game area. there is The right-handed indicator 26 is composed of, for example, an LED, and lighting is controlled by a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, a CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area is provided for displaying pending display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is being suspended. In this example, the first reserved display area 5A for displaying the reserved display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure, and the second reserved display for displaying the reserved indication corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure A region 5B is provided. A display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 . Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handed informing LED 37 for prompting a right-handed operation is provided. Note that the LED 37 for hitting to the right is controlled to light up by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning hole is provided. A game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening is guided to the back surface of the game board 2 and detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. When game balls are detected by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

In addition, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first start winning opening so that game balls flowing down from the right side of the game area do not enter the area where the first starting winning opening is provided. It is In this way, by providing the nail row 19 that prevents the entry of the game ball that has flowed down from the right side of the game area, the game ball can be shot toward the left side of the game area (so-called left-handed hitting). operation), the game ball can win in the first start winning hole.

In addition, in this example, only when left-handed operation is performed due to the provision of the row 19 of nails, the game ball is configured to be able to win in the first start winning hole, but such a mode is shown. not limited to For example, the game ball may be configured to be able to win the first start winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed by providing the first starting winning opening on the left side of the game area, or the first starting winning opening A hole may be provided on the left side of the game area and a line of nails 19 may be provided so that the game ball can enter the first starting prize hole only when left-handed operation is performed.

A passage gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . A game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 .

Below the passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 forming a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and is formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game balls flow down. A large winning opening positioned below the member is changed into an open state (also called an open state) in which a game ball can win a prize and a closed state (also called a closed state) in which a game ball cannot win a prize. The special variable winning ball device 7 moves the bottom member forward in a jackpot game state that occurs when a specific display result (jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which it is forwardly moved toward, and the opening control is executed to open the big winning opening serving as the winning area.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, there are provided a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning hole for a small hit, and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning hole. 2, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged so as to be adjacent to it on the right side. These special variable winning ball device 17 and variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which game balls flow down is extended in the front-rear direction. By moving back and forth, the special winning port located below the bottom member and the second start winning port can be opened (also called an open state) in which game balls can win and a closed state (also called closed state) in which game balls cannot win. change to The special variable winning ball device 17 is a bottom member in a small winning game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small winning symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which it is forwardly moved, and the opening control is executed to open the special prize winning opening serving as the prize winning area. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is forwardly moved when the symbol is drawn out and displayed by hitting the normal symbol display device 20, The opening control is executed to open the second start winning opening which is the winning area.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed to have the same structure. Also, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed in such a manner that the bottom member is slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right. If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in a closed state, the ball moves from the upper left to the lower right on the special variable winning ball device 7 and falls onto the variable winning ball device 6B therebelow.

Also, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left. If the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is closed, the game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B. go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning opening is in an open state, the game ball falling into the second starting winning opening enters the special variable winning opening. The game ball does not flow toward the device 17 . On the other hand, if the second starting winning hole is not in an open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. - 特許庁At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward to open the special winning hole, the game ball enters the special winning hole. Furthermore, if the special winning opening is not in an open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and falls toward the out opening as it is.

Also, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of regulation pieces for reducing the flow speed of the game balls flowing down on the bottom member. there is In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with regulation pieces, so that the game flows from the upper left to the lower right direction or from the upper right to the lower left direction. The flowing direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the motion of the forward/backward direction component, and the time required for the flowing down is delayed as compared with the case without the control piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the special variable prize ball device 6B is operated from the variable prize ball device 6B. In this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. It can be said that

A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening is provided in the big winning opening. When game balls are detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, when the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to open and the big winning opening is opened, the state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be closed and the big winning hole is closed, the game ball cannot pass through (enter) the big winning hole to get a prize ball. be at a disadvantage.

A switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening is provided in the special winning opening. When game balls are detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game balls pass through (enter) the special winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of winning balls is smaller than when the game balls enter the big winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when game balls pass (enter) other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening 1 and the second starting winning opening. Therefore, when the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to open and the special winning opening is opened, the state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to be closed and the special winning hole is closed, the game ball cannot pass through (enter) the special winning hole to obtain a prize ball. be at a disadvantage.

In addition, in the second starting winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting a game ball that has won in the second starting winning opening is provided. When game balls are detected by the second starting port switch 22B, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first start prize-winning opening and the second start prize-winning opening may be collectively referred to as the start prize-winning opening or the start opening.

In addition, in this pachinko game machine 1, the passage gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning hole), the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole), and the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, so when the player is in a big win game or in a KT state (so-called small win time), the player aims at the right side of the game area and performs a shooting operation (so-called right hitting operation). )I do.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

In this pachinko game machine 1, since the variable display of the normal symbols is executed based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41, the passage gate 41 plays a role of a normal starting area. However, even when a big win pattern is derived and displayed, the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and the state shifts to a big win game state, so the passage gate 41 also plays a role as an operation area. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that serves both the normal starting region and the operating region.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a frame LED 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. .

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
In this pachinko game machine 1, when the game state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to aim at the left side of the game area and perform a shooting operation (so-called left-handed operation). When a game ball enters a first starting winning hole formed in a winning ball device 6A by a player's turning operation of a hitting ball operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 to perform a left-handed operation, a first special symbol is displayed. A first special game is started by the device 4A.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", actual symbol differs depending on the type of big hit described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, the result is a "big hit". . Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing". It should be noted that even in the first special game, the small winning symbols may be stop-displayed at an extremely low rate, and may be a "small winning".

After the display result in the first special game becomes ``big win'', on condition that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, we have prepared multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning mouth, and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, probability variable state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) , The jackpot type is set according to these. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot game state is finished, the game may be controlled to a variable probability state, a KT state, or a high base state depending on the jackpot type.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

In the KT state, KT control is executed in which small wins are more likely to occur than in the normal state. In this pachinko game machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small win game state, the number of prize balls obtained is smaller than in the big win game state, but the state is advantageous for the player.

In the high-base state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special figure fluctuation time (period of fluctuating special figures) than in the normal state (time saving state). Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed by improving the probability of becoming more than the normal state. The high base state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

The variable probability state, the KT state, and the high base state continue until one of the end conditions, such as execution of the special game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state, is met first. do. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as the number of times cut (number of times cut probability variation etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a probability variable state, a KT state, a high base state, etc., and the display result in the special game is "big hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability of becoming, is controlled in the same manner as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, when the predetermined return processing is not executed after the power is turned on) It is in a state where

When the jackpot game ends and the game state is controlled to the variable probability state, KT state, or high base state, it is advantageous for the player to aim at the right side of the game area and perform a shooting operation (right hitting operation). A right-handed operation is performed by a player's rotation operation on a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, and when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal pattern display device 20 starts a normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", actual symbol varies depending on the type of big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit", If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the big winning symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the second special game becomes ``big hit'', on condition that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the second special game becomes "small hit", the game is controlled to the small win game state.

In the small winning game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed).

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the lighting of the frame LED 9 Etc./turning off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like may be performed.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is a "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. In addition, even during the small winning game state, the effect during the small winning to report the small winning game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some of the big-hit types (in the big-hit type of the big-hit game state in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switches (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100 . The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 receives a solenoid drive signal (eg, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81, the solenoid 82, and the solenoid 83) from the game control microcomputer 100. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special prize winning opening.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further controls a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on/off the frame LED 9 and the right-hand hitting notification LED 37. It supplies it to the substrate 13 and supplies an LED signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the LED) to the LED control substrate 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handed informing LED 37, and drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handed informing LED 37 based on the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right-handed informing LED 37 are turned on/off. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and lighting/extinguishing of the LED.

It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 executes sound output, LED lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and LED signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the LED control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register setting, and setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed-up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that designates the game state before the power cut that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that designates the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process (step S25A). By the CPU 103 executing the first special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution of the first special symbol game, management of suspension, etc. are realized (details will be described later). Moreover, CPU103 performs a 2nd special design process process (step S25B). By the CPU 103 executing the second special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the second special symbol game are realized. In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol at the same time.

Following the first special symbol process and the second special symbol process, the CPU 103 executes the role product control process (step S25C). The CPU 103 executes the accessory control process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing control of the big hit game state, the small hit game state, the control of the game state, and the like (details will be described later).

Following the role product control process, normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set the effect control command to be transmitted in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal which is a process for outputting a test signal for checking the control state of the game machine outside the game machine processing is also performed. In the test terminal process, the CPU 103 also performs control to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can specify that it is a period in which a right-handed operation is performed. Specifically, in the test terminal process, the CPU 103 performs control to output a right-handed test signal during the big win game, during the small win game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and during the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal process, the CPU 103 does not perform control to output the right-handed test signal during the small winning game based on the variable display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In this first special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a first start winning determination process (step S101A).

In the first start prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the start prize to the first start prize winning port, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a start winning to the first start winning opening occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as the hold information in the first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. be done. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the first pending memory number, transmission for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the first pending memory number, the look-ahead determination etc. to the effect control board 12 Settings are made. The effect control command at the time of starting winning set to be transmitted in this way is effect control from the main board 11 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. It is transmitted to the substrate 12 .

After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110A to S113A according to the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In each process (steps S110A to S113A) of the first special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The first special symbol normal process of step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this first special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the first special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or a "small hit" based on the random number value for determining the display result is determined. The jackpot type in the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the first special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. . After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal process ends.

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The first variation pattern setting process of step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "1". In this first variation pattern setting process, a plurality of types of variation patterns are set using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". It includes processing for determining either one. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern), the form of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative pattern It designates the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The first special symbol variation process of step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "2". This first special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, and measuring the elapsed time after the first special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the first special symbol variation process is completed. do.

In this example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. During the variable display of the special symbols, there is a case where the variable display of the second special symbols results in a small hit and the game is controlled to a small winning game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is before the small hit is opened. Processing to determine whether or not the value corresponds to the small winning end processing), and if the small winning game is in progress, the value of the first special symbol process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the first special symbol variation processing. Thus, if it is not during the small winning game, the value of the first special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop processing. By performing such control, the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small winning game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and the variable display of the first special symbol is resumed after the small winning game is finished. controlled to do so. In addition to such control, for example, during a small winning game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the first special symbol starts to change is interrupted (timer It may be configured to interrupt the update).

Further, for example, the small winning ending period as the small winning ending processing period may be configured to vary depending on the game state. For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted in the normal state, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes longer, and the period of execution of the variable display of the first special symbol and the suspension period become longer. If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period by stopping the shaking of the decoration pattern, etc., resulting in an effect that gives the player a sense of incompatibility. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable to make the small winning ending period shorter than the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, while the small winning ending period is 0.5 seconds in the normal state, the small winning ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

In addition, in the case of the above configuration, for example, in the first KT state, it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize substantially in the small winning control, and no particular performance is performed, so the small winning ending period is shortened compared to the second KT state. It may be configured to On the other hand, in the second KT state, since the game ball is easy to win in the small winning control and an effect emphasizing the small winning control is executed, the small winning ending period may be lengthened compared to the first KT state. . In this case, for example, while the small winning ending period is 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, the small winning ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Further, the length of the small winning fanfare period as the small winning opening preprocessing period may be changed according to the game state, similarly to the small winning ending period.

The first special symbol stop processing of step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "3". In this first special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A stops the variation of the first special symbol, and stops and displays (derives) the confirmed special symbol which is the display result of the first special symbol. It includes the process of setting. Then, when the display result is "big win", setting processing for starting the big win game is performed. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", processing for starting the small win game is performed. And the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is ``small hit'' or ``losing'', when it is controlled to the variable probability state, the KT state, or the high base state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. . When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop processing ends.

In addition, the process executed in the second special symbol process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process described in FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process will be described. Also, each random number value extracted in the first starting winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in a second pending storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as pending information.

In this example, since the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the second special symbol variation process is performed and the second special symbol is varied. During the display, there is a case where a small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol and the game is controlled to a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the first special figure process flag is before the small hit is opened. Processing-Determine whether or not the value corresponds to the small winning end processing), and if the small winning game is in progress, do not change the value of the second special symbol process flag from the value corresponding to the second special symbol variation processing. Thus, if it is not during the small winning game, the value of the second special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop processing. By performing such control, the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted during the small winning game based on the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variable display of the second special symbol is resumed after the small winning game is finished. controlled to do so. In addition to such control, for example, during a small hit game based on the variable display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the second special symbol starts to change is interrupted (timer It may be configured to interrupt the update).

Incidentally, regarding the small winning control based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the length of the small winning fanfare period and the small winning ending period may be varied depending on the game state.

FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S25C shown in FIG. 4 as the accessory control process. In this role product control process processing, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S120 to S128 according to the value of the role product control process flag provided in the RAM 102 . In addition, in each process (steps S120 to S128) of the role product control process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The role product control normal process of step S120 is executed when the value of the role product control process flag is "0". In this accessory control normal process, it is monitored whether or not the setting for starting the big win game is performed, and if the setting for starting the big win game is performed, the process for starting the big win game is performed. , the value of the role product control process flag is updated to "1".

The gate passage waiting process of step S121 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "1". In this gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the passage gate 41 . When the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41 is detected, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "2".

The jackpot opening pre-processing of step S122 is executed when the role product control process flag is "2". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the role product control process flag is updated to "3", and the big hit opening pre-processing is completed.

The process during jackpot opening in step S123 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "3". In this jackpot opening processing, a processing for measuring the elapsed time from opening the jackpot, and based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, etc. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the big winning gate to the closed state, the process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is executed, and then the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "4". , ends the process during jackpot opening.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S124 is executed when the value of the role product control process flag is "4". This jackpot opening post-processing includes a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of a round in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the number of executions reaches the upper limit execution number. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . When the number of execution times of the round has not reached the upper limit number of execution times, the value of the role control process flag is updated to "3", while when the number of execution times of the round reaches the upper limit number of execution times, the character control process The flag value is updated to "5". When the value of the role product control process flag is updated, the jackpot opening post-processing ends.

The jackpot ending process of step S125 is executed when the value of the role product control process flag is "5". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control, KT control, and high-base control. When such setting is performed, the value of the role product control process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S126 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "6". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a setting process for opening the special winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the role product control process flag is updated to "7", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S127 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "7". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the special winning opening, and the timing of returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the special winning port is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "8", and the small winning open processing is ended.

The small hit end process of step S128 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "8". This small-hit end processing includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the effect operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 7 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, a CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED, and the driving of the movable body 32. Control for operating various production devices such as actions is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and issuing a command (illumination signal) to the LED control board 14. Various effect control during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on/off/blinking the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED by the output, is executed. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. In addition, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is finished.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but instead, the game media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

[Description of Characteristic Portion 21TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 21TM will be described. Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 are mounted on the pachinko game machine 1 as shown in FIG. 9-1, for example. The pachinko game machine 1 also includes a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 . In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko game machine 1 .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes a first starting switch 22A and a second starting switch 22B, and a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Various parts are connected, and the effect control board 12 is connected to various effect devices such as the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame LED 9, but these are omitted in FIG. 9-1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and as shown in FIG. Various circuits for control are installed. The main board 11 mainly has a function of setting random numbers used in the special game, a function of inputting signals from switches etc. arranged at predetermined positions, and a control board on the sub side consisting of the effect control board 12 etc. , a function of outputting and transmitting a control command, which is an example of instruction information, as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to the management computer of the hall. In addition, the main board 11 performs lighting/extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, thereby performing the first special symbol and the second special symbol. and control the variable display of the predetermined display pattern, such as controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring control of the normal design display device 20 to control the variable display of the normal design by the normal design display device 20 It also has control functions.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the display monitor 21TM029 displays various types of prize winning information. It also has a display function. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be changed by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

In the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100 and detection signals from various switches for game ball detection, as well as various signals such as a power off signal, a clear signal, a reset signal, etc. 100, and an information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal from the terminal board 21TM016.

9-1, the main board 11 shown in FIG. 9-1 is enclosed in a board case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and a display monitor 21TM029 is provided in the center of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. (for example, 7 segments) are arranged, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when visually recognizing it. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 9-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided at the lower central portion of the back surface of the main board 11. FIG. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 3 is not opened, the front when the main board 11 is visually recognized means the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 3 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

In addition, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings, hereinafter referred to as "entering area" The number of game balls entered into the game ball is counted, and various types of winning information such as consecutive ratios and role ratios are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and these winning information is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to check various types of winning information such as consecutive ratios and role ratios after installation in the game arcade. In other words, on the side of the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is normal to design the game board so that the game balls enter the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (to pass the test). Also, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game balls enter the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the pachinko game machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment has been made and whether the game balls enter the general prize winning opening at the frequency as designed as a result of the adjustment. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made in the pachinko game machine 1 after installation.

In addition, the power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and on the lower right side of the back of the power supply board, setting values such as the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate), which will be described later, can be changed. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and a power switch 21TM055 functioning as setting switches for this purpose are provided. When the power switch 21TM055 is operated by a store clerk or the like at the pachinko game machine 1 in a state where the power supply voltage is not supplied, predetermined of operating voltage is supplied. Furthermore, at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and an initialization process (RAM clear) to be described later is performed. executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, the power-on operation and the initialization operation can be easily performed.

The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the game machine frame 3, which can be opened by operating a predetermined key, is opened. It is possible to operate only a store clerk who possesses a predetermined key. In addition, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires a key operation, it can be operated only by a store clerk who has a key for operating the lock switch 21TM051. In addition, the lock switch 21TM051 is a switch that can be switched ON and OFF by a predetermined key. It may be a possible switch.

Note that the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain an ON state or an OFF state. In other words, the lock switch 21TM051 can be maintained in the ON state or the OFF state even if force is not applied by the staff of the game arcade or the like. The lock switch 21TM051 is configured so that the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the game arcade clerk or the like must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key. You can prevent it from being lost.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-3, at the lower part of the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there is a mechanism for discharging the game balls that have entered the respective winning openings and the game balls that have entered the out openings to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (ejection port) is provided, and an ejection port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball ejected from the pachinko game machine 1 (detecting a fired game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110 .

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, an audio control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, frame LEDs 9 and decorations. It contains LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the LED for use.

FIG. 9-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout such as payout control board 21TM037 and ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21TM037 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer containing at least a RAM. A payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a RAM (not shown), a ROM (not shown) storing a payout control program, and an I/O port constitute a payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is implemented by a payout control CPU 21TM371, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a RAM and a ROM, and an I/O port. Also, the I/O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Detection signals from the ball-out switch 21TM187, the full-tank switch 21TM048 and the payout count switch 21TM301 are input to the I/O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main substrate 11 via the I/O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21TM037 includes a game machine frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the game machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2, and a game machine frame opening sensor that can open and close the front surface of the game board 2. A game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 including a door frame open sensor that detects the opening of the glass door frame 3a that covers the door frame 3a is connected. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the game machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, whereby the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can distinguish between the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

Further, the detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I/O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor composed of a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect jamming of game balls, that is, so-called ball bite. . The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 indicates that the detection signal from the ball burnout switch 21TM187 indicates that the ball is out, and the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates that the tank is full. , the ball delivery process is stopped.

Furthermore, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sends a low level signal to the ball launching board 21TM090 to stop the ball launching from the ball launching device. Output a full tank signal. A firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 output by the AND circuit 21TM091 of the firing board 21TM090 is transmitted from the firing board 21TM090 to the firing motor 21TM094. A full tank signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the ejection board 21TM090, and a drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the ejection motor 21TM094 A signal serving to supply power from the power supply board) is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting the full tank signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 incorporates a serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting/outputting (transmitting/receiving) signals with the game control microcomputer 100 through serial communication. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are connected via the serial communication circuits 21TM505 and 21TM380 between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. For confirmation, signals (prize request signal, reception ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted and received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal (prizing ball request signal in this embodiment) for confirming the connection at regular intervals through the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and payout control microcomputer 21TM370. , when receiving a prize ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100, transmits a signal (receiving ACK signal) to that effect to the game control microcomputer 100. FIG. In this embodiment, by placing specific data on the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal, at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 It is configured to exchange specific data between For example, when a prize is won, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by changing the predetermined bits of the prize ball request signal, A ball request signal is sent to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes the prize ball payout operation, it sets the data indicating the end of the prize ball by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the received ACK signal with this setting is played. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100 . In addition, when a predetermined error (such as a ball rental, full tank, or ball out error) occurs, the data indicating the content of the error is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is The received ACK signal thus made is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 .

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out and a lent ball number signal indicating the number of lent balls to the terminal boards (frame external terminal board and board external terminal board) via the output port 21TM372b. and) output to 21TM160. A driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, but is omitted in FIG. 9B.

Also, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 of the 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Furthermore, a signal for instructing to turn on/off is output to the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the out-of-ball LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. The input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 receives a detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

Further, a drive signal to the payout motor 21TM289 from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, but is omitted in FIG. 9-3.

A card unit control microcomputer is installed in the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a ready-to-use display lamp, a connecting stand direction display, a card insertion display lamp, and a card insertion slot. The interface board (relay board) 21TM066 is connected with a frequency display LED 21TM060, a ball rental LED 21TM061, a ball rental switch 21TM062, and a return switch 21TM063.

A ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are given from the interface board 21TM066 to the card unit 21TM050 according to the operation of the player. . Further, a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lendable display signal are supplied from the card unit 21TM050 to the interface board 21TM066. A connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal) and a pachinko machine operation signal ( PRDY signal) is sent and received via input port 21TM372f and output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, signals such as connection signals (VL signals) are transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066, as shown in FIG. 9-2.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. Also, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connected state/unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 according to the input state of the VL signal. When a card is received in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit control microcomputer outputs the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this time point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050, and upon detecting the trailing edge of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to deliver a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. Pay out. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 lowers the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. After that, on the condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not on, when a payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, prize ball payout control is executed.

The power supply voltage AC 24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the power supply from the power board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in the AC 24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. is prevented.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6. 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is in stages.

FIGS. 9-4A to 9-4F are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which hit determination values to be compared with MR1 are set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and when the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second) That is, for each case where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, a determination value for a big hit is set.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is subject to variable display , the probability of winning the jackpot is lower (1/300) than when the set values are "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". ing. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1" It is designed to win the jackpot with a higher probability (1/280) than in some cases. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in the case of "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (D), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than in the case of "2" and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than in the case of "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/235) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. If it matches with the hit determination value, it is decided to make a big win (big win A to big win F) with respect to the special symbol. That is, the winning of the jackpot is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. "Probability" shown in FIGS. 9-4(A) to (F) indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern.

In addition, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit using the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F). Provided separately, the determination of the big hit is performed using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol, regardless of the variable special symbol designating buffer. good too.

In this embodiment, a total of six set values 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine 1 can be set to 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Setting suggestion production)
The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing the effect corresponding to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by changing the aspect of the ending effect executed when the big win game state ends according to the designated set value. FIGS. 9-5 (1), (2), and (3) show examples of setting suggestion effects. Fig. 9-5 (1) is an example in which a "sunny" mode ending image is selected in the jackpot end screen, and Fig. 9-5 (2) is an example in which a "cloudy" mode ending screen is selected in the jackpot end screen. For example, FIG. 9-5(3) shows an example in which an ending image of "rain" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. FIG. 9-5(4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the setting values specified by the setting command.

CPU103 has transmitted the setting command which designates the setting value to CPU120 for production control. Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing an ending effect in the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120 when the jackpot game state is finished. The effect control CPU 120 can determine the mode of the ending effect based on the stored setting values by storing the setting values specified by the received setting commands in the RAM 102 . For example, based on the effect control command transmitted when the jackpot game state is over, the image display device 5 is stored together with characters (“BONUS end” characters) for notifying that the jackpot game state is over. It is possible to display the ending image in the mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rainy mode) determined based on the set value.

The table shown in FIG. 9-5(4) shows the cases where the setting values specified by the setting command are "1, 2", "3, 4", and "5, 6". , respectively, when determining the mode of setting suggestion effect to be the "sunny" mode shown in FIG. 9-5 (1), when determining to be the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. 5 (3) is assigned a determination value for determining the "rain" mode.

When the setting value specified by the received setting command is "1" or "2", the effect control CPU 120 suggests setting of the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is decided to execute the production (ending production), and at a medium rate (for example, 40%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion production (ending production) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2), and the medium (for example, 40%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestive effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3). In addition, the effect control CPU120, when the setting value specified by the received setting command is "3" or "4", at a low rate (for example, 20%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1) Determined to execute setting suggestive effect (ending effect), decided to execute setting suggestive effect (ending effect) of “cloudy” mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%), moderate (for example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggesting effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3). In addition, when the setting value specified by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the effect control CPU 120 has a high percentage (for example, 50%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1). Decided to execute setting suggestive effect (ending effect), determined to execute setting suggestive effect (ending effect) of “cloudy” mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%), moderate (for example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggesting effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3).

In this way, by making the determination ratio of each aspect of the setting suggestion effect different according to the setting value, the player becomes interested in the aspect in which the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the setting suggestion effect is generated. It is possible to improve the interest of the production. In this example, the player is interested in how the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the "sunny" mode. will expect to be

(Processing at power-on)
Next, the power-on processing will be described.
9-6 to 9-8 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed by the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 9-6, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM4010). This process performs a parity check as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 determines whether the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value, for example, any one of 0 to 5. is confirmed (step S21TM4020). In this example, six numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are normal values as the set values stored in the set value storage area, and six stages of set values with different jackpot probabilities are provided. ing. The set value 0 in this example corresponds to the set value 1 shown in FIG. 9-4 etc. described above, the set value 1 in this example corresponds to the set value 2 shown in FIG. The value 2 corresponds to the setting value 3 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, the setting value 3 in this example corresponds to the setting value 4 shown in FIG. The set value 5 in this example corresponds to the set value 6 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like.

Here, in this example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is shipped from the game machine maker (before it is installed in the game hall), a value with the lowest jackpot probability among the regular values is stored in the set value storage area. (0 in this example) is stored. If the data in the setting value storage area is broken, the value may not be normal. If the setting value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), it is checked whether or not the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting changing flag is set when shifting to the setting change mode described later (step S21TM4580), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (step S21TM4720).

If the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not it has been decided that the RAM clear (initialization of the game state) is to be executed. If the value is 1, it is decided that the RAM clear is to be executed. This indicates that the In this example, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the RAM is not actually cleared. When the setting change mode is set, the RAM is cleared after the processing related to the setting change mode is completed. will be

The area in which the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when power is cut off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not retained, and the value of the RAM clear flag when the power is restored is 0 (initial value is non-set state). Note that the notification that the game state is initialized may be performed before the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and as described later, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. You can let it happen.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4060.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300. The sensor 21TM300 outputs to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 a detection signal indicating that the game machine frame 3 has been detected to be open, and a detection signal that indicates that the glass door frame 3a has been detected to be open. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the game controlling microcomputer 100 that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, When recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, the game control microcomputer 100 is notified that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, so that the game control microcomputer 100 side , the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

The game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 sends a detection signal indicating that the game machine frame 3 has been opened to the game control microcomputer 100, and the glass door frame 3a has been detected. When the configuration is such that a detection signal indicating that the By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). . If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the process proceeds to steps S21TM4510 and subsequent steps related to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 9-7. When shifting to the setting change mode, it becomes possible to confirm and change the setting value, and when shifting to the setting confirmation mode, it becomes possible to confirm the setting value.

That is, if the data check result in the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), and there is no power interruption during the setting change ( NO at step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES at step S21TM4060), and the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES at step S21TM4070). Or confirmation becomes possible. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is closed (NO at step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF (NO at step S21TM4070), either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is selected. Without being controlled by the mode, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command), which will be described later.

In this embodiment, in order to enter a state (setting confirmation mode) in which changing of the setting value is not permitted but the setting value can be confirmed, (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, (2) ) Two conditions are required that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. When the CPU 103 confirms that the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied by the determination processing in steps S21TM4060 and S21TM4070, the CPU 103 enters a state in which the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation). mode). In addition to these conditions (1) and (2), the RAM clear flag is set based on the fact that (3) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES). On the condition that the setting value is changed, as will be described later, it is possible to shift to a state (setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed.

As described above, the lock switch 21TM051, which must be operated to confirm or change the setting value, is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and must be operated unless the game machine frame 3 is opened. can't If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the game machine frame 3 is not in the open state, it means that there is an abnormality in the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 or that there is some kind of illegality. There is a possibility that confirmation or change of setting value is going to be performed by means. In such a state, it is inappropriate to allow confirmation or change of the setting value. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is placed in the setting confirmation mode. and setting change mode.

In this embodiment, as the condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Control is possible, but not limited to such a form, even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode may be controlled by none of the above.

On the other hand, if the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4060 (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are If it is in the closed state, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command), which will be described later, without being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, when it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), control is not performed in either of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and step S21TM4760, which will be described later, is performed. (Transmission of setting command).

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4120. Further, in checking the value stored in the setting value storage area (step S21TM4020), if the normal value (0 to 5) is not stored in the setting value storage area (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 , the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. Further, in checking the setting changing flag (step S21TM4030), if it is confirmed that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4120.

Here, even if normal values (0 to 5) are stored in the setting value storage area, if part of the backup RAM area is broken, the determination in step S21TM4010 is NO. Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. That is, if there is a possibility that the value stored in the setting value storage area is inappropriate, the setting change is performed based on the satisfaction of the setting change mode transition conditions (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later). will be controlled by mode. In addition, even if the check result is normal in the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010) (YES in step S21TM4010), if the set value storage area does not store the normal value (0 to 5) (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the setting change mode transition conditions (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later) being satisfied. In addition, if the setting change mode has been controlled at the time of the previous power failure, the setting change mode is controlled on the basis that the setting change mode transition conditions (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 to be described later) are established. It will be.

At step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM4120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4120), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130). .

If the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON (step S21TM4140).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processes after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-7 are executed.

On the other hand, in step S21TM4120, if the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are If it is in the closed state, if the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON at step S21TM4130 (NO at step S21TM4130), or if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not ON at step S21TM4140 If (NO in step S21TM4140), CPU 103 detects that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal without executing the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode. The setting value abnormality error command shown is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value abnormality error command, the image display device 5 notifies that the setting value may be abnormal. For example, it displays a message saying "the set value may be abnormal". Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to temporarily turn off the power (turn the power switch 21TM055 OFF), and then shift to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned ON). to perform an operation to change the set value (determine the set value). For example, it displays a message "After turning off the power, turn on the power again to shift to the setting change mode." It should be noted that the same notification may be made by voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined loop process (repeating steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) until the power is turned off.

In this loop processing, after the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4200), the character "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to indicate that the set value is not a normal value (0 to 5). Even though there is a possibility, the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode (the determination of YES in all steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140) is not satisfied and the setting change mode is not entered." Notify (step S21TM4210). Then, the security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21TM4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information on a plurality of game machines, a card unit or a call lamp device provided corresponding to the game machine, etc.). be done.

During the period of the loop processing, the character "E" is displayed every 4 ms on the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029. By providing a 4 ms wait, it is possible to prevent excessive heat from accumulating in the 7-segment display and causing damage to the display. Also, the security signal is continuously output during the period of the loop processing. By outputting the security signal to the outside, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a regular value (0 to 5 ), it is possible to identify the possibility that the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied and the setting change mode is not entered).

The loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 continues until the power supply stops (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

That is, if the data check result in the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), if the setting value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), or if power failure occurs during setting change ( That is, when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and YES is determined in step S21TM4030), the game should not be played in this state. Before proceeding to normal game processing (for example, game control timer interrupt processing including prize ball processing, special symbol processing, etc.), it is necessary to fix the set value in the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to shift to the setting change mode.

In this embodiment, in order to change the setting value (setting change mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, (3) Three conditions are required that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied by the determination processing in steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140, the CPU 103 enters a state in which the setting value can be changed ( setting change mode).

If any one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the setting value in the setting value storage area cannot be fixed to the normal value because the change of the setting value is not permitted. Therefore, it is not possible to shift to normal game processing. Therefore, if NO is determined in any one of the determination processes of steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140, the above-described loop process (steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) is performed.

If the loop processing (steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) is performed, the normal game processing cannot be performed. not. In this manner, if the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not established, the power is once turned off, and the conditions (1) to (3) are all established when the power is turned on next time. Then, the setting change mode is entered, and the set value in the set value storage area is fixed to the regular value.

It should be noted that the CPU103, if any of the conditions of (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, the predetermined It is also possible to prompt the user to turn off the power by emitting light in the power-off instruction mode.

In this embodiment, if the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the setting value is not permitted to be changed, but the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode). , (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES at step S21TM4060), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES at step S21TM4070).

However, if the setting change flag is set (YES at step S21TM4030), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES at step S21TM4120), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON. (YES in step S21TM4130), the control to the setting confirmation mode is not performed even if the two conditions are satisfied. Even if the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, (3) if it is determined in step S21TM4140 that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO), It is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) without being controlled in either setting change mode or setting confirmation mode.

Next, processing related to the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-7 and 9-8. In the process of FIG. 9-7, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 matches the regular value (one of 0 to 5 in this example) ( step S21TM4510). If a normal value (0 to 5) is stored in the setting value storage area (YES in step S21TM4510), the process proceeds to step S21TM4530. If the set value storage area does not store the normal value (0 to 5) (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 stores "0", which has the lowest jackpot probability, in the set value storage area as the normal value. is stored (step S21TM4520). Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4530.

Next, the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4530), and then executes power-off processing (step S21TM4540). In the power-off process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a power-off signal based on a power-off including an unexpected power failure has been input. Immediately before the device becomes inoperable due to the stoppage, the power supply stoppage processing is executed. In the power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. That is, in the power-off process, check data is stored in a predetermined backup area.

As a result, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled (repeated processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620 or repetitive processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and S21TM4650), the power supply If a disconnection occurs, the data check will be properly executed in step S21TM4010 after the power is restored.

Next, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display values corresponding to the set values (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4550). Here, the values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 are the values (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the values (0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area. Since the game hall clerk normally recognizes that the range of the setting value is 1 to 6, if the value stored in the setting value storage area is displayed as it is on the display monitor 21TM029, the game hall clerk may actually setting value may be mistakenly recognized. Therefore, in this example, [the value stored in the setting value storage area+1] is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as the setting value. Next, CPU 103 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

Next, CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is not executed after the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode) ends, the CPU 103 designates that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled. A setting confirmation mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4650), and the process proceeds to step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, it is possible to inform that the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is executed after the mode (here, the setting change mode) ends, the CPU 103 determines that the setting value has been changed. A setting changing flag indicating that there is a possibility that the setting is being changed is set (step S21TM4580). Since the area in which the value of the setting change flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting change flag is retained even if the power is turned off. Therefore, if the power is turned off while being controlled in the setting change mode, the value of the setting changing flag is set to 1 (set state) when the power is turned on next time.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command designating that the setting change mode is set (step S21TM4590). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, it is possible to inform that the game machine is being controlled in the setting change mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the CPU 103 inputs setting changeover switch information indicating whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and confirms whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has not been operated (NO in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4680. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and proceeds to step S21TM4680. Transition. The updated setting values are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

Every time the store clerk operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the normal set value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the set value stored in the set value storage area when the setting change mode is set (when the power is turned on or when the power was cut off last time) is 3. If so, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area are updated in the order of 3→4→5→0→1→2→3 for each setting change operation, and accordingly, the display monitor 21TM029 The displayed information is updated in the order of 4→5→6→1→2→3→4.

Here, it is possible to display the current setting value (step S21TM4550), output the security signal (step S21TM4560), and transmit the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650). ) and updating of the setting value (step S21TM4620) corresponds to the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed or the setting value cannot be changed. During the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and S21TM4650 are repeatedly executed.

In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (determination of YES in step S21TM4070) and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF (determination of NO in step S21TM4040 indicates that the RAM clear flag is set). remains 0).

In addition, it is possible to display the current setting value (step S21TM4550) and output a security signal (step S21TM4560), and to transmit a setting change mode command (step S21TM4590) and update the setting value (step S21TM4620). This state corresponds to a setting change mode in which setting values can be checked and changed.

In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4070 or S21TM4130) and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4040 or S21TM4140). is determined and the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150).

Note that the setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when the setting confirmation mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 sets a setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that can identify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720). Then, the setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during setting change mode control. Therefore, when the setting change mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 sets a setting change mode command transmission flag that can identify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. Alternatively, the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720). Then, the setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

In step S21TM4680, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), a wait of 4 ms is performed again (step S21TM4530), and then the processing from step S21TM4540 is repeated. That is, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, control in the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, control in the setting change mode is continued.

At step S21TM4680, if the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF (YES at step S21TM4680), the CPU 103 terminates the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, and sets the value of the security signal timer to 1000 ms (step S21TM4710). By setting the predetermined time as the value of the security signal timer, the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from the predetermined time in the information output process when the normal game process is started. will be For example, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and when it reaches 0 ms, the output of the security signal is stopped. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended.

That is, as shown in FIG. 9-9(1), the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode are started. The value of the security signal timer is set so that the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in response to the end of control in any of the modes. set (step S21TM4710).

Here, the processing for starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 is performed regardless of whether control is performed in the setting change mode or in the setting confirmation mode (it is determined which mode is controlled). ) is executed as a common process. Also, in the process of setting the remaining output period of the security signal in step S21TM4710, regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set (determining which mode the control is performed is performed). ) is executed as a common process. In this way, the security signal output start control and output end control are made common between when the setting change mode is controlled and when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, thereby simplifying the output control of the security signal. , the control burden can be reduced.

In addition, the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is output in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. , it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Here, in step S21TM4710 immediately after the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, a common value (1000 ms) is set as a security signal for both the setting change mode control and the setting confirmation mode control. It's set on a timer. However, if the output start control and the output end control of the security signal are made common between the setting change mode control and the setting change mode control, which mode the external device should select. It becomes difficult to grasp whether it is controlled.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-9(2), when the setting change mode is controlled, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, once the security signal is cleared in step S21TM4710. After setting the timer value to 1000 ms, based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770 described later, the security signal timer value is reset (overwritten) to 30000 ms in step S21TM1465 after the RAM is cleared. there is That is, after the remaining output period of the security signal is once set to 1 sec, the remaining output period of the security signal is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

When the signal output control described above is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is, as shown in FIG. 1 second has elapsed since the setting change mode was set, and 30 seconds have passed since the setting change mode was terminated.

Specifically, if it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode (RAM is not cleared and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interrupt after interrupt permission In processing (for example, information output processing), if the output of the security signal is continued until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from 1000 ms, and the setting change mode is controlled (the RAM is cleared, When the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1 second to 30 seconds), the value of the security signal timer is changed from 30000 ms to 0 ms in the game control timer interrupt process (for example, information output process) after the interrupt is permitted. The output of the security signal is continued until the In addition, when it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode, when it is controlled in the setting change mode, the value of the security signal timer is set for a predetermined time (1000 ms or 30000 ms ) to 0 ms, the output of the security signal may be continued, and after the output of the security signal is completed, the game control timer interrupt process may be performed.

In this manner, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 sec when the control in the setting confirmation mode and the control in the setting change mode are finished, and the control is performed in the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have elapsed since the control in the setting change mode was completed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the output period of the security signal different between when the setting confirmation mode is controlled and when the setting change mode is controlled, while the output control of the security signal is made common.

As a result, in the external device, it becomes possible to grasp whether the setting confirmation mode was controlled without executing the initialization process, or whether the initialization process was executed and the setting change mode was controlled. . For example, if the security signal output period is less than 30 seconds, it can be specified that the setting confirmation mode is controlled without executing the initialization process. It is possible to estimate that there is a possibility that the change processing was executed and the setting change mode was set.

Note that the security signal is also output when a game stop target error such as a magnetic anomaly is detected by the anomaly detection sensor. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until the gaming machine is powered off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in a backup area (an area cleared by initialization processing) of the RAM 102 based on the detection of an abnormality by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, it is assumed that the security signal is output for 4 minutes based on the fact that the abnormality detection flag is set when the power is restored.

Here, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled at the time of power restoration, since RAM clear is not executed, the value of the abnormality detection flag remains set without being initialized in the signal output processing. It is possible to output the security signal continuously for four minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible not to limit the output period of the security signal to the period until one second elapses after the end of the control in the setting confirmation mode. On the other hand, when the setting change mode is controlled at the time of power recovery, the RAM is cleared, so the abnormality detection flag is cleared in the subsequent signal output processing (power failure occurs At times, it is unknown whether or not an abnormality has been detected), and as a result, the security signal is output for a period of 30 seconds from the end of the setting change mode (depending on the execution of RAM clearing). period).

In the example shown in step S21TM4710 of FIG. 9-7, the value of the security signal timer is set to 1 second. The value of the security signal timer to be set may be at least a period in which the external device can recognize that the security signal has been output, for example, 50 ms or longer. That is, a common security signal timer value of 50 ms may be set for both when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

After the process of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag (step S21TM4720). Here, since the setting changing flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) when the power is restored when the power is subsequently turned off. Become.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the set values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the setting value (any of 0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area is set in the setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM4760). Note that even if neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is set when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 is executed and the setting command is transmitted.

Here, the player usually recognizes that the range of the setting value is 1 to 6, and the value specified by the setting command (the value stored in the setting value storage area) is displayed as it is on the side of the effect control CPU 120. If they are displayed on the display device 5, the player may misunderstand the set values. Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the effect control CPU 120 side, the value specified by the setting command (0 to 5) plus 1 is recognized as the setting value (1 to 6), and the setting value 1 to 6 Within the range, a production that suggests the set value is executed.

In addition, not limited to such a form, CPU103 is set to the setting command the value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area, effect control It may be transmitted to the CPU 120 for use. As a result, the range of setting values specified by the setting command is 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. On the side of the effect control CPU 120, the setting values (1 to 6) specified by the setting command are displayed as they are on the image display device 5, or an effect suggesting the setting values (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is executed. By doing so, the set value can be appropriately notified or suggested. In addition, it becomes unnecessary to perform addition processing on the setting value specified by the received setting command on the effect control CPU 120 side, and the control load on the effect control CPU 120 side can be reduced.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Also, it is possible to suggest a setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by changing the aspect of the ending effect executed when the big win game state ends according to the designated set value.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

Here, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770) means that the data check result in the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010) and the set value is a normal value (step S21TM4010). YES at S21TM4020), and no power interruption occurred during the setting change (NO at step S21TM4030), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF (NO at step S21TM4040). ), it is sufficient to execute the power-off recovery process without clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes the processing when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal when the power is turned on, and the game control timer interrupt processing (special (including pattern process processing, etc.). That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the control of the setting confirmation mode is completed, the CPU 103 clears the RAM based on the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 0. Without executing the clear, a backup command is transmitted as a command at the time of power failure recovery, and the normal game processing is started.

In the effect control CPU 120, based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), based on the data at the time of power supply stop, the restoration from the power interruption was performed (RAM clear is not performed ). When the performance control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, in the performance devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9, restoration from the power interruption has been performed based on the data at the time of power supply stop. It is possible to notify that (the RAM is not cleared).

On the other hand, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770), it means that RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150 and it is decided to execute RAM clear. Therefore, it is sufficient to execute power-on processing that accompanies RAM clearing.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes processing for setting the value of the security signal timer to 30 seconds, and processing for when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal when the power is turned on. , It is sufficient to shift to the game control timer interrupt processing (including special symbol process processing, etc.) after the interrupt permission.

As shown in FIG. 9-8, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear process, the data indicating the game state before the power supply stop stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 (special symbol process flag, probability variable flag, time saving flag, reserved storage, etc.) is cleared, and the initial value is set, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed from before the RAM clear processing. In addition, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as consecutive ratio, role ratio, and base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated value for each set value is not cleared. The value is unchanged from before the RAM clear process. Then, by displaying the letter "C" on the display monitor 21TM029, etc., it is notified that the game state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). By the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for determining per normal symbol) is initialized to 0, but any value or predetermined value may be initialized to In addition, without initializing the entire area of the RAM 102, predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for normal symbol per determination) may be left as it is.

The reason why the set values stored in the set value storage area are not cleared in this RAM clearing process is that (a) if control is not performed in the setting change mode, the set value storage area does not contain the normal values when the power is turned on; (YES in step S21TM4020), and (b) if the setting change mode is set, the value in the setting value storage area is set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or if the value in the setting change mode is This is because the normal value is stored by the operation (step S21TM4610 and step S21TM4620). Furthermore, after the RAM clearing process, it is not possible to control to the setting change mode, and there is no opportunity to change the values stored in the setting value storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the pointer to the top address of the table set at initialization stored in the ROM 101 (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the table set at initialization in the work area (step S21TM1440). By the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random number counter for judging a normal symbol, a special symbol buffer, a buffer for storing the total number of winning balls, a special symbol process flag, etc. An initial value is set.

After executing steps S21TM1430 and S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the later-described game control timer interrupt processing, big hit determination in the special symbol process processing is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization process has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode ends) (step S21TM1460). In the effect control CPU 120, based on the reception of this initialization command, the initialization process is performed (RAM clearing is performed without restoring from power interruption based on the data at the time of power supply stop). recognized). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9, initialization of the game state etc. (data at the time of power supply stop) It is possible to notify that the RAM has been cleared without recovering from the power failure based on the above.

Next, CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, the security signal timer value (1 second) set in step S21TM4710 after the end of the setting change mode is changed (overwritten) to a value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear. become. If the RAM is cleared without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, step S21TM4710 is not executed (the value of the security signal timer is set to 1 second). ), the value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the RAM clear being performed. On the other hand, if the RAM clear is not executed (including the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled), the process of step S21TM1465 is not executed, so the value of the security signal timer is set to 1 second set in step S21TM4710. remain.

At this step S21TM1465 or the above-described step S21TM4710, the value of the security signal timer is set, so that the security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (information output process), After that, every time the timer interrupt process for game control is executed by interrupt permission, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped at the timing when the value of the security signal timer becomes 0. will be

Then, the CPU 103 executes setting processing for the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037. Further, the communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to be executable.

Next, the CPU 103 executes random number circuit setting processing for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). CPU103, for example, by executing the processing according to the random number circuit setting program, performs the setting for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). For example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt occurs periodically every 2 ms.

Next, CPU 103 repeatedly executes display random number update processing (step S21TM1520) and initial value random number update processing (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S21TM1510). set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the game control timer interrupt process can be executed, and the process shifts to the normal game process. In the present embodiment, the random number for display is a random number for determining the stop pattern of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, and a random number for determining whether or not it is a ready-to-win when it is not a big hit. Random number update processing is processing for updating the count value of a counter for generating display random numbers. The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the random number for the initial value determines the initial value of the count value of the counter (random number generation counter for normal symbol hit determination) for generating random numbers for determining whether or not the normal symbol is a hit. It is a random number for A game control process for controlling the progress of a game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls game devices such as a performance display device, a variable winning ball device, and a ball payout device provided in the game machine by itself). processing, or processing to transmit a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, also referred to as gaming device control processing), the count value of the random number for normal per symbol determination is one cycle (the random number for normal per symbol determination is After stepping by the number of numerical values between the minimum and maximum possible values, an initial value is set in the counter.

In this example, when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES) in step S21TM4770, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process is shifted to the process at the time of power failure recovery. If it is determined to be 0 (YES), on the condition that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in a closed state (depending on the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a ), the process may be shifted to the process at the time of power failure recovery.

Further, in this example, when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO) in step S21TM4770, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process at power-on (processing after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)) is shifted to, but in such a form However, if it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed (gaming machine frame 3 or depending on the state of the glass door frame 3a), the process at power-on (the process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)) may be performed.

As described above, when the power is turned on, the game hall clerk or the like turns on the lock switch 21TM051 and turns on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 to switch the pachinko game machine 1 to the setting change mode. In addition to being able to control, it is possible to initialize the game state etc. (execute RAM clearing). In addition, by turning ON the lock switch 21TM051 and turning OFF the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, it is possible to control the pachinko game machine 1 to the setting confirmation mode, and the game state, etc. is not initialized (NO is determined in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 and the RAM clear flag is not set to 1). In this manner, the game hall clerk can select whether to control the pachinko game machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the game state and the like. there is

As described above, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting change mode was set when the power was turned off, so the setting value is in an unstable state. There is a possibility that the setting value to be confirmed by the game arcade is not stored in the setting value storage area. In the example shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 does not shift to the normal game process based on the fact that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), and the game stop state (step loop processing of S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), and a security signal is output in response to the control to the game stop state (step S21TM4220).

With such a configuration, the game is started in an unstable state (game control timer interrupt processing is executed), and when the power is turned on, the power It is possible to notify the external device that it was controlled to the setting change mode when the interruption occurred.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 determines the condition for shifting to the setting change mode ( Steps S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 are all YES) is not established, the set value abnormality error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190), and the display monitor in the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) 21TM029 displays an error by displaying the letter "E" (step S21TM4210).

In the example shown in FIGS. 9-10, by displaying the letter "E" on each of the 7-segment displays 21TM029A to 21TM029D constituting the display monitor 21TM029, an abnormality occurs to the game parlor clerk (in the setting change mode). (the possibility that a power outage may have occurred in a controlled state) is clearly notified. In addition, the effect control CPU 120, which has received the set value abnormality error command, displays a message on the image display device 5, "Please turn on the power again after turning off the power and shift to the setting change mode." After turning off the power once (turning off the power switch 21TM055), when the power is turned on again (when turning on the power switch 21TM055), the store clerk or the like is instructed to shift to the setting change mode and change the setting value. (fix the set value).

In this example, (a) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on and the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES at step S21TM4130); and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (step S21TM4140). YES), it is controlled to the setting change mode. As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is not executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("Turn on the power again after turning off the power. Please let me shift to the setting change mode.") will not be performed either.

Here, in the effect control CPU 120 that received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the fact that the image display device 5 was controlled to the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052) ), it is possible to notify that the set value can be changed. For example, it is possible to cause the image display device 5 to display a message "Setting change mode is in progress" or a message "Please perform setting change operation to change the setting value". As a result, a game arcade clerk or the like can understand that the control is in the setting change mode, and by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area can be changed. is changed to the set value as planned, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, so that the set value can be fixed and the pachinko game machine 1 can be shifted to normal game processing.

On the other hand, (b) when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on and the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, one of the above (i) to (iii) If any of the conditions are not met, without being controlled to the setting change mode, it is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) after sending the set value abnormality error command (step S21TM4190) . As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("Turn on the power again after turning off the power. to switch to the setting change mode.") will also be performed.

In this way, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("Turn on the power again after turning off the power to switch to the setting change mode." It is reported that the state is not established. In this case, the store clerk or the like at the game parlor understands that the setting change mode is not controlled and the game is in the stopped state (the power must be turned on again to control the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after the power is once turned off, the power is turned on again after operating so that all the conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. In the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to the planned setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF. By switching to the state, it is possible to fix the set value and shift the pachinko game machine 1 to the normal game processing.

In this way, when the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

Here, in the case of (a) that the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied when the power is restored, an error is displayed on the main substrate 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029). The mode is automatically shifted to the setting change mode without being interrupted, so that unnecessary error display can be avoided and the setting value can be properly changed.

On the other hand, in the case of (b) where the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is restored, it is not possible to shift to the setting change mode when the power is restored even though the power is interrupted during the setting change mode. Therefore, the game is forcibly stopped (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220), and the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is stopped. will be done. As a result, it is possible to restrict the progress of the game in an unstable state in which the set value is not fixed, and to realize appropriate game control.

Note that if the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are all satisfied, and the transition condition (i ) to (iii) are not established, a different command may be transmitted as a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal.

For example, when the transition condition is satisfied, the command indicates that the setting value may be abnormal and the transition to the setting change mode has been performed (or the transition condition has been satisfied). , and the effect control CPU 120 that receives this command displays an image of the message "There is a possibility that the setting value is abnormal" and the message "It will be automatically controlled to the setting change mode". It is preferable to display it on the device 5 . On the other hand, if the transition condition is not satisfied, it is preferable to transmit the set value abnormality error command in step S21TM4190 as described above.

After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game process is started, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated when both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. In response to that (turned from OFF state to ON state), a lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120, (2) setting changeover switch (clear switch ) 21 TM052 is operated (turned from OFF state to ON state), a setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120 .

Then, the production control board 12 (production control CPU 120) is controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and/or the setting changeover switch operation command. It is possible to specify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed even though there is no such operation, and notify that effect. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes the abnormal operation warning notification by displaying the characters "The operation of the lock switch has been detected." Also, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification is executed by displaying the characters "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." As a result, the store clerk or the like at the amusement arcade clearly grasps that the operation for changing the setting value has been performed even though neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, It is possible to check whether the

It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a form, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated and the normal game processing is started, whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated, and The lock switch operation command and setting changeover switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. In this way, during the period when the normal game process (timer interrupt process for game control) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the setting value and the operation for confirming the setting value is not confirmed. This makes it possible to reduce the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 .

(Modified example of power-on processing)
In the example shown in FIG. 9-6, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM4120). ), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4140). Only when it was confirmed that the RAM clear flag was set to 1 (step S21TM4150), and the setting change mode was entered (NO in step S21TM4570).

As shown in FIG. 9-11, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), three conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied. It is also possible to set the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150) and shift to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570) without confirming whether or not it is established.

In the processing shown in FIG. 9-11, if the result of the data check in the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010) or if the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting changing flag is set. (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without judging whether or not the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied, and the setting is changed. 9-6 differs from the process shown in FIG. 9-6 in that it is controlled to the mode (NO in step S21TM4570) and not controlled to the game stop state (process corresponding to the loop process of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220). Other parts are the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8.

Even in such a configuration, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 based on the fact that the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and the setting change mode is entered. It is possible to appropriately determine the state of the game machine when power is cut off during the change.

In the example shown in FIGS. 9-11, if the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is open, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON. and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. and the setting value in the setting value storage area can be changed), if the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii) Regardless of whether or not the three conditions are satisfied, the setting change mode is forcibly controlled.

In this way, if a power failure occurs while being controlled in the setting change mode, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are set based on the fact that the setting change flag is set when the power is restored. By automatically controlling the mode to the setting change mode irrespective of whether or not is established, it is possible to improve the workability for fixing the set value.

Here, if the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), even if the condition (ii) that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130) is not satisfied, the setting It will be controlled in change mode. As a result, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the OFF state, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed. (Steps S21TM4610 to S21TM4620 in FIG. 9-7).

As described above, the condition for ending the setting change mode is to switch the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state (determining YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state, the game arcade clerk who has changed the setting value must once turn the lock switch 21TM051 from the OFF state in order to finalize the setting value and end the setting change mode. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (YES is determined in step S21TM4680).

In this way, the condition for starting the setting change mode control is determined whether the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) or the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). are made different, while the conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode (the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) are made common to clarify the conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode. Appropriately shifting to normal game processing is made.

Here, when the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), it is possible to issue a notification prompting the user to turn on the lock switch 21TM051. good. For example, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and transmits a setting value abnormality error command (in step S21TM4190 described above). Execute corresponding processing), and the effect control CPU 120 that has received the set value abnormality error command (step S21TM4110) says, ``Turn ON the lock switch once, and switch it to OFF after changing the set value.'' A message may be displayed on the image display device 5 .

In the processing shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8 and 9-11, it is not possible to shift to the normal game processing while the setting changing flag is set. Therefore, when the game machine maker ships the pachinko game machine 1 (before it is installed in the game hall), the setting change flag is set in advance, so that the game machine can change the settings in the setting change mode. Unless the setting value is changed and the setting change mode is terminated, the pachinko game machine 1 cannot be played. As a result, when the pachinko game machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, it is possible to reliably control the setting change mode, perform the setting change operation, and take measures to determine the set value.

(Set value storage control when power is cut off while changing set values)
Next, setting value storage control in the case of power failure during setting value change will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-12. In the example shown in FIG. 9-7, when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is changed.

First, FIG. 9 shows the control in the case where the setting value is changed during the setting change mode and the power is turned off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the setting change mode ends). -12(1).

As shown in order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (and the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode. In this example, "0" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on. Next, as shown in order 2, when the setting change mode is started, the setting value "0" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read setting value is set to "1". is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in order 3, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to "0" based on the first operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. is changed to "1", and "2" obtained by adding 1 to the set value after change is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON. Further, as shown in order 4, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is "1" based on the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. is changed to "2", and "3" obtained by adding 1 to the set value after change is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in sequence 5, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state, that is, before the operation for ending the setting change mode is performed, power failure occurs. At this time, the setting value storage area stores the setting value "2" after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. In the power-off state, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is retained as it is.

Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned ON (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned ON) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, "2" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. FIG. This set value "2" is the value that was stored in the set value storage area when the power was cut off during the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 7, when the setting change mode is started, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read setting value is set to 1. is added to display "3" on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

When the power is turned on in turn 6, the setting changing flag is set. Therefore, when applying the control shown in FIGS. Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), it is automatically controlled to the setting change mode. Therefore, the state of the lock switch 21TM051 in the 6th and 7th turns may be the OFF state.

In this way, if the setting value is changed in the setting change mode and the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off (without the setting change mode being terminated), the power supply is interrupted. , the setting value after change in the previous setting change mode is held in the setting value storage area. Therefore, when the power supply is restored, the set values may have already been set. In this case, the game arcade clerk terminates the setting change mode without changing the set values. Since it is sufficient to shift the game machine to the normal game process by pressing the button, workability can be improved.

Next, regarding the control in the case where a power failure occurs after the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode ends) by changing the setting value during the setting change mode, Description will be made with reference to FIG. 9-12 (2).

The order 1 to order 4 are the same as the example shown in FIG. Next, as shown in sequence 5, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, thereby ending the setting change mode. As a result, the set value "2" after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is determined as the final set value. At this time, "2" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area, and "3" obtained by adding 1 to the fixed set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

After that, as shown in order 6, it is assumed that the power supply switch 21TM055 is turned off and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is retained as it is.

Next, as shown in order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (and the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, "2" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. FIG. This set value "2" is the value that was finally stored in the set value storage area when the previous setting change mode ended.

Next, as shown in sequence 8, when the setting change mode is started, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read setting value is set to 1. is added to display "3" on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

As shown in Figures 9-12 (1) and (2), when the power supply is interrupted while being controlled in the setting change mode, and when the power supply is stopped after the control in the setting change mode is completed. In either case, when the power is restored, the set values changed according to the previous setting change operation in the setting change mode, i.e., the set values stored in the set value storage area immediately before the power was turned off, are restored. , are valid setting values (setting values stored in the setting storage area at the time of power restoration).

Note that the storage control of the set values shown in FIGS. 9 to 12 is not limited. That is, when the setting change mode is controlled, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area are copied to the setting information temporary storage area, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the setting changeover switch (clear switch) is operated. 21TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area, and the setting change mode is terminated (turning on the lock switch 21TM051). state to the OFF state) is performed, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored (overwritten) in the setting value storage area to determine the setting value. can be In this case, the setting values to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 are the values (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting values (0 to 5) stored in the setting information temporary storage area. The setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is also changed according to the change of the setting value stored in the .

With such a configuration, even when the setting change mode is controlled when the power is turned on and the setting change operation is performed (when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed), the setting change mode is changed. If the power is cut off without completing the operation for terminating the change mode (without the lock switch 21TM051 being switched to the OFF state), the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 will be It means that it has not been changed from the time of input (before the setting change operation is performed in the setting change mode). In other words, in the power supply stop state, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area at the time of the previous power-on are continuously held. Therefore, the setting values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set after the power is restored are stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power was turned on last time. It will be the value according to the set value that was set.

In this way, it is possible to appropriately determine the set value when power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode. In addition, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode has not ended, it is possible to restrict the change of the setting value.

The control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiment is provided with a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5), and for gaming machines with different jackpot probabilities according to the setting values Although it is applicable, but not limited to this, although a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is common regardless of the setting value (for example, for all setting values 0 to 5 It can also be applied to a game machine in which the jackpot probability is 1/300.

In addition, the following inventions are disclosed in this characterizing portion 21TM.

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting changing means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine is proposed in which a "jackpot signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding the gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when it is necessary to grasp the control state related to the setting on the external device side when changing the setting value etc. However, even if the conventional game machine signal output technology described in JP-A-2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp this. be. The invention relating to means O1 to means O4 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and is to provide a game machine capable of appropriately notifying the outside of the game machine of the control state related to the setting.

The game machine of means O1 is a game machine (pachinko A gaming machine 1) comprising a setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing setting values, and capable of confirming setting values. setting confirmation mode control means (steps S21TM4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 can be executed game control microcomputer 100) and the control of any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode A specific signal output means (game control microcomputer 100 that outputs a security signal in step S21TM4560) that outputs a specific signal (security signal) corresponding to the start, and a value related to the period during which the specific signal is output (security signal timer value) (game control microcomputer 100 for setting the value of the security signal timer), and the setting means is controlled in the setting change mode and in the setting confirmation mode. (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710), and the specific signal output means selects either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. In response to the end of control, a specific signal is output until at least a period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses. and outputting the security signal continuously until 30 seconds have passed since the end of the setting change mode with the end of the setting change mode). According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the setting can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The gaming machine of the means O2 is the gaming machine of the means O1, and is an initialization means for initializing the gaming state (step S21TM4050, RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the RAM clear flag being set in step S21TM4150). The initialization means initializes the game state according to the control of the setting change mode (when controlled to the setting change mode, the setting change mode is controlled After setting the predetermined value (after setting the value of the security signal timer to 1 second in step S21TM4710), the setting means sets a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. A specific value corresponding to a long period can be set (30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465 when RAM clear is executed), and the specific signal output means changes the setting. In response to the end of mode control, a specific signal is output until a period corresponding to the specific value has passed (when the setting change mode ends, the security signal is continued until 30 seconds have passed since the setting change mode ended). and output). According to this, the specific signal is output for at least a period corresponding to the predetermined value in both cases when the control in the setting change mode and the control in the setting confirmation mode are finished, and the setting change is performed. When the mode is controlled, the specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. Therefore, the output is different between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode while the setting processing by the setting means is made common. It is possible to set the period.

The gaming machine of the means O3 is the gaming machine of the means O1 or O2, wherein in the setting change mode, a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680) is performed. Detection) is not performed and the power supply to the game machine is stopped, the specific information storage means (in the backup area of the RAM 102, the setting change mode is detected) for storing the specific information (setting change flag). A game control microcomputer 100) that sets a setting changing flag in step S21TM4580 based on the setting change mode and clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 based on the end of the setting change mode, and supplies power to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration), the game stop state and outputs a specific signal (repeatedly executes the processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 until the power is turned off based on the fact that the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied). and According to this, when the power supply is stopped during control of the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the external device when the power supply is restarted.

The gaming machine of the means O4 is one of the gaming machines selected from the means O1 to O3, and includes game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer for executing game control timer interrupt processing). 100), and a production control means (production control CPU 120) that controls the execution of production, and the game control means includes display means (display monitor 21TM029) and the setting change mode control means (step S21TM4530 to step The game control microcomputer 100 executing the processing of S21TM4620), and in the setting change mode, without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (operation to turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in step S21TM4680) specific information storage means (in the backup area of RAM 102, set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode A game control microcomputer 100) that sets a changing flag and clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 based on the end of the setting change mode, and the power supply to the gaming machine is started. When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration), the display means notifies an error. is executed and an error command is transmitted to the effect control means (the set value abnormality error command is transmitted in step S21TM4190, and the character "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the error display of step S21TM4210. In response to receiving the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 of prompting an operation to change the setting value ("Restart power after power off"). Please turn on the power and shift to the setting change mode."). According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the store clerk of the gaming arcade, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine such as that described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value. The inventions relating to the means P1 to P4 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and provide a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the status of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value. to provide.

The game machine of means P1 is a game machine (pachinko A gaming machine 1) comprising: setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing setting values; Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can identify that it has been controlled (the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the step A game control microcomputer 100 that clears the setting change flag in S21TM4720), and the specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped ( The value of the setting change flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102), and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the power supply is restored). (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at time), error notification means capable of executing error notification (when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied, an error It is characterized by further comprising a game control microcomputer 100) that performs display. According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode.

The game machine of the means P2 is the game machine of the means P1, and the setting change mode control means determines that the setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, the game machine frame 3 is in an open state). , the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state). When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration), the setting change condition is established. Based on that, it is possible to control the setting change mode without executing the error notification (when the power is turned on, based on the determination of YES in all steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140, It is characterized by shifting to the setting change mode without shifting to the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220. According to this, when the condition for controlling to the setting change mode is satisfied, the control is performed to the setting change mode without executing the error notification. Can encourage change.

The game machine of means P3 is the game machine of means P1 or P2, and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started (power supply When it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of recovery), it is possible to execute the error notification and put the game in a stopped state (when the power is turned on, the setting change mode If the transition condition is not met (if NO is determined in any of steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140), the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 is performed without transitioning to the setting change mode). It is characterized by According to this, it is possible to restrict the progress of the game in a state where the set value is unstable, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

The gaming machine of the means P4 is one of the gaming machines selected from the means P1 to P3, and includes game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer for executing game control timer interrupt processing). 100), and an effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the effect, and the game control means includes display means (display monitor 21TM029),
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) and the specific information storage means, and when the power supply to the game machine is started When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (when it is determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration), the error notification is executed by the display means. At the same time, it is possible to transmit an error command to the effect control means (a set value abnormality error command can be transmitted in step S21TM4190, and the character "E" can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the error display of step S21TM4210. is possible), and the effect control means, in response to receiving the error command, notifies the image display device 5 of prompting an operation for changing the set value ("Turn on the power again after turning off the power. to shift to the setting change mode."). According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the store clerk of the gaming arcade, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine such as that described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value. The inventions relating to means Q1 to Q5 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and provide a gaming machine that appropriately determines the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value. to do.

The game machine of means Q1 is a game machine (pachinko A gaming machine 1) comprising: setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing setting values; Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can identify that it has been controlled (the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the step A game control microcomputer 100 that clears the setting change flag in S21TM4720), and the specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped ( The value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102), and the setting change mode control means stores the specific information in the specific information storage means when power supply to the game machine is started. (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration), control is performed to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state Regardless of whether or not the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode, that is, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state are satisfied. , automatically control to the setting change mode). According to this, it is possible to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode involving the initialization of the game state. The gaming machine of means Q1 initializes the game state corresponding to the control of the setting change mode (for example, RAM clear flag is set in steps S21TM4050 and S21TM4150). A game control microcomputer 100 that executes clearing (step S21TM1410) may be further provided.

The game machine of means Q2 is the game machine of means Q1, and the setting change mode control means stores the specific information in the specific information storage means when power supply to the game machine is started. If not, it controls to the setting change mode based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied (if the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (because the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 was in the ON state, the RAM Clearing is executed), the setting change mode is entered based on the fact that the condition for entering the setting change mode is satisfied), and when the specified information is stored in the specified information storage means controls to the setting change mode irrespective of whether the setting change condition is satisfied (when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting change mode is entered. automatically control to the setting change mode irrespective of whether the conditions for shifting are satisfied or not). According to this, when a power failure occurs during setting change mode control, the setting change mode is entered even when the setting change condition is not satisfied based on the fact that the specific information is stored when the power is restored. Since it is controlled, workability can be improved.

The game machine of the means Q3 is the game machine of the means Q1 or Q2, and the setting change mode control means performs a transition operation when the power supply to the game machine is started (when the power is turned on, the setting is being changed). When the flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (clear switch (set The setting change mode is established based on the condition that the changeover switch 21TM052 is in the ON state and the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends). The setting change mode is terminated based on a specific operation (confirming that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off in step S21TM4680) while being controlled in the setting change mode. The specific information storage means stores the specific information when the setting change mode is controlled (the setting change flag is set at the timing of step S21TM4580 when the setting change mode control is started). ), and when the setting change mode ends based on the specific operation, the specific information is erased (the setting changing flag is cleared at the timing of step S21TM4720 when the control of the setting change mode is finished), and the setting change is performed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the mode control means controls the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the transition operation is performed when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means. (when the power is turned on, if the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied, automatically control to the setting change mode), and terminate the setting change mode based on the specific operation (end the setting change mode based on confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off in step S21TM4680). characterized by According to this, it is possible to appropriately determine the conditions for ending the control in the setting change mode.

The gaming machine of the means Q4 is one of the gaming machines selected from the means Q1 to Q3, and stores a set value (six levels of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for judging a big hit). Storage means (setting value storage area of RAM 102 where setting values are stored) is provided, and control according to the setting values stored in the setting value storage means (jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) can be executed. Yes, the set value stored in the set value storage means is changed based on the change operation when being controlled in the setting change mode (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610 changes the setting value stored in the setting value storage area), and the setting change mode control means terminates the setting change mode based on a specific operation while being controlled in the setting change mode ( The setting change mode is terminated when it is confirmed in step S21TM4680 that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned OFF. When the power supply to the game machine is stopped without being performed, the setting value after being changed by the changing operation in the setting change mode is continuously stored (the setting value storage area is the backup area of the RAM 102). , and if the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is changed. The setting value after being changed by the changing operation is retained even when the power is cut off. According to this, when the power supply is restarted, the setting value after being changed by the changing operation in the setting change mode before the power failure occurs is stored in the setting value storage means, and the setting value corresponding to the setting value is stored. Since control is executed, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means Q5 is one of the gaming machines selected from the means Q1 to Q3, and stores a set value (six levels of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for judging a big hit). Storage means (setting value storage area of RAM 102 where setting values are stored) is provided, and control according to the setting values stored in the setting value storage means (jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) can be executed. The setting change mode control means stores the setting value in the setting value storage area when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode and when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode. only the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed instead of the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area), and the setting value stored in the setting value storage means is changed based on a specific operation after the change operation At the same time, the setting change mode is terminated (when it is confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is transferred to the setting value storage area. , the set value storage means stores the value in the game machine without performing the specific operation when the setting change mode is controlled and the setting change mode is terminated. is stopped, the set value before the change operation is performed in the setting change mode is stored (even if the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is not switched to OFF, the set values stored in the set value storage area are not changed. retained). According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode has not ended, it is possible to restrict the change of the setting value.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 052IW)
Next, the characteristic portion 052IW will be described. First, the game state in this characterizing portion 052IW will be described. First, the game state in the characterizing portion 052IW includes a normal state (low probability/non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small win time) in which small wins are more likely to occur than in the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. The case of being controlled, the case of being controlled to a low probability and the first KT state (low probability/first KT state), and the case of being controlled to a high probability and the first KT state (high probability/first KT state). , is controlled to a high probability and second KT state (high probability/second KT state).

In the first KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, although a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in an open state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long, resulting in a small hit. Even if is generated, there are very few cases where the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about 1 ball per 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, the control is performed so that small hits are likely to occur and the high base state is controlled so that the open time of the variable winning ball device 6B is lengthened. In addition, in the second KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is delivered to the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Easy to win. Specifically, in the second KT state, the control is performed so that small hits are likely to occur and the base state is controlled so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened.

Also, the KT state is a game state in which a small win is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state). Specifically, in this characteristic portion 052IW, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state due to a normal game hit is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. And, while the ratio of determining a small hit is low when the first special symbol fluctuates, the ratio of determining a small hit when the second special pattern fluctuates is high (however, it will be described later). Therefore, the KT state is a game state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated mainly by causing variations in the second special symbols, and the game state is advantageous to the player.

In addition, the configuration for making the KT state into a game state in which a small win is more likely to occur than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state as a normal hit is the same as in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes By configuring the variation time of the selected variation pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of times of variation in the KT state to a certain period of time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state, and the KT state is changed to the normal state. It may be a game state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

Further, this characteristic portion 052IW is configured so that the required time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 to when it reaches the variable winning ball device 6B is 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, the installation positions of the passage gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the nail group forming the flow-down path of the game ball are adjusted. Although details will be described later, this characteristic portion 052IW is configured such that the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to be in an open state based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41, and in the first KT state described later, the game ball passes. The time from passing through the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passage gate 41. Since it is shorter than 0.6 seconds which is the required time until the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the first KT state, if the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state, the one game ball passes through the passage gate 41. The game ball can win a prize in the variable winning ball device 6B as it is.

(Special Variable Winning Ball Device)
FIG. 10-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the special variable winning ball device 7 in the characteristic portion 052IW. As shown in FIG. 10-1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom member 052IW108 formed as a bottom surface of a flow path through which game balls flow down. By moving the bottom member 052IW108 backward from the closed state in which it is forwardly moved, the large winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. A game ball that has entered the big winning hole is detected by the first count switch 23 .

In this characteristic portion 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-1, the game ball that has entered the big winning hole is further guided to the guide path 052IW100 provided on the right side of the special variable winning ball device 7. FIG. The guiding path 052IW100 is further branched into two paths 052IW102, 103, and the game ball guided to the guiding path 052IW100 is guided to the left path 052IW102 or the right path 052IW103. When guided to the left path 052IW102, the game ball enters the V-area 052IW104 and is detected by the V-area switch 052IW106. When guided to the right path 052IW103, the game ball enters the discharge area 052IW105 and is detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, a V-region opening/closing plate 052IW101 is provided near the entrance of the left path 052IW102. A ball enters left path 052IW 102 and can enter V-region 052IW 104 . Also, when the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is in the closed state, the game ball guided to the guide path 052IW100 enters the right path 052IW103 and is discharged from the discharge area 052IW105 to the back side of the game area.

In addition, the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 052IW109 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103).

In addition, in this characteristic portion 052IW, when the jackpot game is controlled, the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, and on the condition that it is detected by the V area switch 052IW106, after the jackpot game ends It is controlled to a variable state.

The total number of game balls detected by the V area switch 052IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the ejection area switch 052IW107 during one round matches the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. It should be. Therefore, the sum of the number of game balls detected by the V area switch 052IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107 during one round does not match the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. In this case, it may be determined that there is a discrepancy error between entry and exit into the big winning slot, and an error notification may be made. In this case, it takes a certain amount of time for the winning game ball to reach the V area 052IW104 or the discharge area 052IW105 just before the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed. If the number of game balls does not match before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after becoming, it may be determined as a big winning entrance entry/ejection mismatch error.

(Configuration of control board)
FIG. 10-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like in this characteristic portion 052IW. In this characteristic portion 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-2, the switch circuit 110 includes the gate switch 21, the starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), the count switch (first count switch In addition to detection signals from 23 and second count switch 24)), detection signals from V area switch 052IW106 and discharge area switch 052IW107 are captured and transmitted to game control microcomputer 100.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-2, the solenoid circuit 111 receives the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 for the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and for the big winning entrance door. In addition to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening, it is transmitted to the solenoid 052IW109 for the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101.

(big hit probability, small hit probability)
FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the big-hit probability and the small-hit probability for each set value. Among them, FIG. 10-3 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Also, FIG. 10-4 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, this example shows a case where the setting can be changed in six stages from setting values "1" to "6". It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the case where the setting can be changed in 6 steps, but may be configured so that the setting can be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or in 7 or more steps.

First, with reference to FIG. 10-3, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), in the non-variable state (low probability state), the set value "1" is the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5" increase in order, and the set value "6" has the highest hit probability "247/65536". It is high and is the most advantageous setting for the player. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), in the variable probability state (high probability state), the winning probability of the overall jackpot is 10 times as compared to the non-variable state (low probability state). The value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "2050/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5" increase in order, and the set value "6" has the highest hit probability "2470/65536". It is high and is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, with respect to small hits, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 (A) and (B), regardless of the set value "1" to "6" state) and probability variable state (high probability state), the small hit probability is constant at "6298/65536". That is, in this example, the determination value for small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common in the non-variable probability state and the variable probability state. In this way, even if the big hit probability is changed according to the set value, the small hit probability is constant, as shown in FIGS. are set to different values from "1" to "6" so that the number of determination values for each set value is matched.

Next, with reference to FIG. 10-4, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), in the non-variable state (low probability state), the set value "1" is the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5" increase in order, and the set value "6" has the highest hit probability "247/65536". It is high and is the most advantageous setting for the player. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), in the variable probability state (high probability state), the overall winning probability of the big hit is 10 times as compared to the non-variable state (low probability state). The value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "2050/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5" increase in order, and the set value "6" has the highest hit probability "2470/65536". It is high and is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, with respect to small hits, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 (A) and (B), regardless of the set value "1" to "6" state) and probability variable state (high probability state), the small hit probability is constant at "62986/65536". That is, in this example, the determination value for small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common in the non-variable probability state and the variable probability state. However, in this example, in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 10-4), compared with the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 10-3), the small hit is higher. The winning probability is about 10 times (that is, the number of judgment values for small hit determination when performing the variable display of the second special symbol is the small hit when performing the variable display of the first special symbol greater than the number of decision values for the decision). In this way, even if the big hit probability is changed according to the set value, the small hit probability is constant, as shown in FIGS. are set to different values from "1" to "6" so that the number of determination values for each set value is matched.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, the determination values corresponding to deviation are included in the determination values corresponding to all set values "1" to "6" (FIG. 10-4). -3 and as shown in FIG. 10-4, there is no set value for which the probability of deviation is 0). The determination value corresponding to the deviation differs depending on the setting value (as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, depending on which setting value is "1" to "6" , with different outlier probabilities).

It should be noted that it is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and may be configured such that, for example, there is a case where the probability of deviation is 0 (that is, a set value that does not include a determination value corresponding to deviation). For example, at the set value "6", which has the highest degree of advantage (highest jackpot probability), the probability of losing is 0, and the judgment value corresponding to the losing may not be included.

In addition, not limited to the aspect shown in this example, for example, it may be configured so that there is a case where the small hit probability is 0 (that is, the judgment value does not include the judgment value corresponding to the small hit). For example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol (FIG. 10-3), the small hit probability may be uniformly set to 0, and the judgment value for the small hit may not be included. good.

In addition, in FIGS. 10-3 (A), (B) and FIGS. 10-4 (A), (B), the small hit probability is the same between the probability variation state (high probability state) and the non-probability variation state (low probability state) The odds of losing are different, but in the probability state (high probability state), the probability of hitting the jackpot has increased for the non-probability state (low probability state), so the probability of a small hit is higher than the non-probability state (low probability state). It may be lowered to match the out-of-probability. Furthermore, even if the set values are different values such as "1" and "2", the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched. As a result, in a gaming machine with less than six stages that can be set substantially or a gaming machine with no difference in the degree of advantage due to the setting change function, a game machine of a type having a setting change function of six stages and a hardware/software configuration can be shared, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Jackpot type determination table)
10-5 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result should be a jackpot pattern, the types of jackpots are determined as "2R normal jackpot", "2R probability variable jackpot", and " This is a table referred to for determining any one of the 6R normal jackpot, the 6R probability variable jackpot, and the 10R probability variable jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 10-5(A), in this characteristic portion 052IW, regardless of whether the setting value is "1" to "6", when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, A "10R variable probability big hit" is determined with a probability of 9%, a "6R variable probability big hit" is determined with a probability of 56%, and a "6R normal jackpot" is determined with a probability of 35%. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-5(B), in this characteristic portion 052IW, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", when executing the variable display of the second special symbol is determined as "10R variable jackpot" with a probability of 10%, "6R variable jackpot" with a probability of 50%, "2R variable jackpot" with a probability of 5%, and with a probability of 35% " 2R normal jackpot".

"10R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that controls to a jackpot game state of 10 rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot game state ends. In addition, "6R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot game state of 6 rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot game state ends. In addition, "2R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to the jackpot game state of two rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot game state is completed.

"6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that controls to a jackpot game state of 6 rounds and shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot game state ends. A "2R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a two-round jackpot game state and controlled to a low-probability state after the jackpot game state ends.

In this characteristic part 052IW, in the case of "10R probability variable jackpot", "6R probability variable jackpot" and "6R normal jackpot", a predetermined period (30 seconds in this example) elapses in each round of the jackpot game. Until a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls wins, the big winning holes are controlled to be open, and up to 10 big winning holes can be won in each round. On the other hand, in the case of the "2R probability variable jackpot" and the "2R normal jackpot", the big prize opening is controlled to be open for only a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the jackpot game. The number of prizes that can be won in each round is about 2 to 3.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 052IW, when the big win game is finished, it is controlled to the first KT state, the second KT state or the non-KT state according to the game state before the big win game and the kind of the big win. How the game state transitions after the jackpot game will be described later (see FIG. 10-29).

(Small hit type determination table)
10-6 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In the small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a small win pattern, the types of the small wins are set to "small hit A" and "small hit B" based on the random numbers for the hit type determination. ” or “small win C”.

As shown in FIG. 10-6(A), in this characteristic portion 052IW, regardless of whether the setting value is "1" to "6", when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, It is determined as "small hit A" with a probability of 100%. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-6(B), in this characteristic portion 052IW, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", when executing the variable display of the second special symbol is determined as a "small win B" with a probability of 70%, and is determined as a "small win C" with a probability of 30%.

In this example, as will be described later, in the case of "small hit A", the special winning opening is opened only for a very short 0.2 seconds during the small win game (see FIGS. 10-12), and the small win game is played. You can hardly expect the game ball to enter the special winning hole inside. In addition, in the case of "small win B", the special winning hole is opened for 0.8 seconds during the small winning game (see FIGS. 10-13), and the game ball enters the special winning hole during the small winning game. can be expected to some extent. In addition, in the case of "small win C", the special winning opening is opened for 1.8 seconds during the small winning game (see Fig. 10-14), and the game ball enters the special winning opening during the small winning game. can be most expected.

(Variation pattern table)
FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9 are explanatory diagrams showing variation patterns (variation times) of special symbols and decorative symbols used in this characterizing portion 052IW. EXT shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9, nine types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 09 for the first special design and decorative design, and the second variation pattern for the second special design and decorative design 34 types #01 to #34 are used. Hereinafter, for example, fluctuation pattern #n (n=01 to 09 or 01 to 34) means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When executing the variable display of the first special symbol, if it is in the non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the first special symbol variation pattern for non-KT time shown in FIG. 10-7 (A) A table is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-7(A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, one of the first variation patterns #01 to #06 is determined.

When executing the variable display of the first special symbol, if it is in the KT state (low probability / 1st KT state, high probability / 1st KT state, high probability / 2nd KT state), see FIG. 10-7 (B) The first special symbol variation pattern table for KT shown is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-7(B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, one of the first variation patterns #07 to #09 is determined.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, if it is in the non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern for non-KT time shown in FIG. 10-8 (C) A table is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-8(C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, one of the second variation patterns #01 to #03 is determined. Specifically, when it is determined that it is lost, the second variation pattern #01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when determining a small hit, the second variation pattern #02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when determining a big hit, the second variation pattern #03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a relatively long period of 5 minutes.

In this characteristic portion 052IW, even in the non-KT state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is achieved, a certain amount of prize balls can be expected by winning the game balls into the special winning opening. end up Therefore, in this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8(C), even if the second special symbol is displayed in a non-KT state, the fluctuation time is extremely lengthened and the execution frequency of the fluctuation display is increased. By lowering , the frequency of occurrence of small hits is rather reduced, thereby preventing a situation in which an attempt is made to acquire prize balls by small hits even in the non-KT state. In addition, in this characteristic portion 052IW, the "occurrence frequency of small hits" is, for example, the rate of occurrence of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, is higher than normal.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8(C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is is comparatively long as 5 minutes, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming at a prize ball by winning a prize in the special prize winning opening unfairly during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big win, it is not necessary to digest the first reserved memory longer than in the case of a small win, so the variation time is set to be shorter than in the case of a small win. there is

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the case of the low probability/first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability/first KT state is ended. A variation pattern table is selected according to the number of variations since. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is to be executed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability/first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. 10-8 (D) is selected and varied. A pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability/first KT state, any of the second variation patterns #04 to #06 is determined by

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (D), when it is determined that the first variation in the low probability / 1st KT state is lost, the variation time is 5 seconds. It is determined. Also, when determining a small hit as the first variation in the low probability / 1st KT state, the second variation pattern # 05 (second start winning opening open Preparatory fluctuation pattern). In this characteristic part 052IW, as already explained, when it is controlled to the first KT state, although the frequency of small hits increases, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is lengthened. A special winning hole in the ball device 17 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after shifting to the low probability/first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom surface member of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediate. If the device 17 is controlled to be open, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will enter the special prize winning opening. Therefore, in this characteristic portion 052IW, in the first variation of the 1KT state, by ensuring a variation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 are activated before the transition to the 1KT state. By controlling the special variable prize winning ball device 17 to be in an open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom surface member fall down to enable prize winning to the special prize winning port, This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which more prize balls than expected are obtained in the 1KT state. Also, when it is determined that the first variation in the low probability/first KT state is a big hit, the second variation pattern #06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 minutes.

In addition, if the 2nd to 49th variation display is to be performed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability/1st KT state is completed, then the variation display of the 2nd to 49th variation is executed as shown in FIG. 10-8 ( The second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability/first KT shown in E) and for the 2nd to 49th variation is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (E), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability / 1st KT state, the second variation pattern # 07 to # 13 Either is decided. Also, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (E), when it is determined that the 2nd to 49th fluctuations of the low probability / 1st KT state are missed, the fluctuation time is 5 seconds and the shortened fluctuation second fluctuation pattern # 07, or the second variation pattern #08, which is a shortened variation with a shorter variation time of 1 second. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 2nd to 49th variations of the low probability/first KT state are missed, the second variation pattern #09 with reach may be determined. In addition, when determining a small hit as the 2nd to 49th variations of the low probability/1st KT state, the second variation pattern #10 with a shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds, or a shorter variation time of 1 second. There is a case where the second variation pattern #11 of shortening variation is determined. On the other hand, when determining a small hit as the 2nd to 49th variations in the low probability/1st KT state, the second variation pattern #12 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns #07 and #10 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second reserved memory is not stored, and the second variation patterns #08 and #11 are those in which one or more second reserved memories are stored. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when As a result, the storage of the reserved memory is expedited and the operating rate is increased. Also, when determining a big hit as the 2nd to 49th variations in the low probability/1st KT state, the second variation pattern #13 with reach is determined.

In addition, after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability/1KT state, the 50th change display (that is, the final change in the low probability/1KT state) is executed. If so, the second special symbol variation pattern table for low probability/first KT and 50th variation shown in FIG. 10-8(F) is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 50th variation of the low probability / 1st KT state, any of the second variation patterns #14 to #16 is determined by

In the characteristic portion 052IW, when the low probability/first KT state is controlled, for example, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as "in chance time". As shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when it is determined that the 50th variation of the low probability/1st KT state is a loss or a small hit, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "Chance time is over!" is determined to be the second variation pattern #14 or the second variation pattern #15 accompanied by the end display of performing In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when determining a big hit as the 50th variation of the low probability/1st KT state, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "Chance time is over!" The second variation pattern #16 with a predetermined resurrection display after the end display to be performed is determined.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-7, when a big hit is achieved by the variation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first variation pattern #07 with a variation time of 10 seconds is displayed. configured to determine This is a case in which a big hit occurs immediately after the transition to the second KT state due to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. Since the variation of the second special symbol executed during the big hit variation of the first special symbol is a forced loss, the forced failure occurs frequently and the player wins a small win despite being in the second KT state. You will not receive any benefit from Therefore, in this characteristic part 052IW, by setting the fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol to a short fluctuation time, the transition to the big hit game state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol is made before the frequent occurrence of the forced loss. It is configured.

In addition, unlike this characteristic portion 052IW, even when the variation of the second special symbol is started during the big hit variation of the first special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol is not forced out (for example, the first When the second special symbol is fluctuating when the special symbol is stopped, the second special symbol is forcibly removed), the variation time of the first special symbol big hit during the KT state. may be a long variable time (eg, 1 minute). This is a case in which a big hit occurs immediately after the transition to the second KT state due to the variation display of the first special symbol. You will not be able to receive any profits from small wins. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the first special symbol jackpot in the KT state is set to a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, there is enough time to generate at least multiple small hits. (eg, 1 minute).

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the case of a high probability/1st KT state, the fluctuation after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable jackpot that triggered the high probability/1st KT state. A variation pattern table is selected according to the number of times. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is to be executed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability/first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. 10-9 (G) is selected and varied. A pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, any of the second variation patterns #17 to #21 is determined by

As with the first variation in the low-probability/1st KT state, as shown in FIG. In some cases, the second variation pattern #17, which is short variation of 5 seconds, is determined. On the other hand, even if it is determined to be a loss as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, it may be determined to be the second variation pattern #18 with reach. Further, even when it is determined to be a small hit as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, the variation pattern (second variation pattern #19) for preparing for opening the second start winning opening may be determined. On the other hand, even when it is determined as a small hit as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #20 with reach may be determined. Also, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (G), when determining a big hit as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #21 with reach is determined.

Also, in the case of executing the variation display after the second variation after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable jackpot that triggered the high probability / 1st KT state, the high probability shown in FIG. 10-9 (H) A second special symbol variation pattern table for probability/first KT and second and subsequent variations is selected to determine a variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (H), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed after the second variation in the high probability/first KT state, any of the second variation patterns #22 to #28 determined by

As with the 2nd to 49th fluctuations of the low probability/1st KT state, as shown in FIG. A second variation pattern #22 of shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds or a second variation pattern #23 of shortened variation with an even shorter variation time of 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a miss as the second and subsequent variations of the high probability/first KT state, it may be determined to the second variation pattern #24 with reach. In addition, when determining a small hit as the second and subsequent variations of the high probability/1st KT state, the second variation pattern #25 with a shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds, or a shortened variation with a shorter variation time of 1 second The second variation pattern #26 of variation may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined as a small hit as the second and subsequent variations in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #27 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns #22 and #25 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second reserved memory is not stored, and the second variation patterns #23 and #26 are those in which one or more second reserved memories are stored. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when As a result, the storage of the reserved memory is expedited and the operating rate is increased. Also, when it is determined as a big hit as the second and subsequent variations in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #28 with reach is determined.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability/second KT state, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability/second KT shown in FIG. 10-9 (I) is A variation pattern is determined upon selection. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/second KT state, one of the second variation patterns #29 to #34 is determined. .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (I), when it is determined to be a failure in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #29 with a short variation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. In other cases, the second variation pattern #30 of normal variation with a variation time of 5 seconds may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined to be a miss in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #31 with reach may be determined. Also, when it is determined to be a small hit in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern # 32 with a short variation time of 1.5 seconds or a normal variation time of 5 seconds The second variation pattern #33 of variation may be determined. Also, when determining a big hit in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #34 with reach is determined.

In the case of determining the variation pattern, more specifically, whether the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed, the current game state, and the result of the variable display are determined. Using the variation pattern table, lottery processing is performed based on the random number for determining the variation pattern, and which variation pattern is determined. FIG. 10-10 is for determining the variation pattern when the variable display result is a small hit in the second special symbol variation pattern table for high probability/second KT shown in FIG. 10-9 (I) It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a small hit variation pattern table.

As shown in FIG. 10-10, in this characteristic portion 052IW, in the case of performing the variation display of the second special symbol during the high probability/second KT state, when performing the variation display of the small hit , regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the second variation pattern #32 is determined with a probability of 70%, and the second variation pattern #33 is determined with a probability of 30%. Therefore, in this example, in the case of the second KT state, there is a high probability that the variation pattern of shortened variation of 1.5 seconds will be selected.

In addition, in FIG. 10-10, as an example, the variation pattern table in the case of executing the small hit variation of the second special symbol during the high probability/second KT state was shown, but FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9 The other variation pattern tables shown are similarly configured, and each variation pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6".

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-8 to 10-10, a shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second is performed in the case of the 1st KT state, and a shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is performed in the case of the 2nd KT state with a high probability , but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. For example, it may be configured such that a shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second is performed in the case of a low probability state, and a shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is performed in the case of a high probability state.

(Open pattern of special variable winning ball device 7)
Next, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 will be described. 10-11 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7. FIG. First, using FIG. 10-11 (1), a special variable winning ball when controlled to a jackpot game based on 10R variable probability big hit, 6R variable probability big hit, and 2R variable probability big hit (hereinafter also simply referred to as "variable probability big hit") The opening pattern of the device 7 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), when the first round of the jackpot game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is opened. controlled by When a game ball wins while the big winning hole is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23 .

In addition, in the jackpot game based on the probability variable jackpot, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), when the winning of the second game ball into the jackpot is detected in the first round, the solenoid 052IW109 is driven and V The area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to be open, and the game ball can enter the V area 052IW104. Then, when a predetermined period of time (eg, 29 seconds) elapses in the first round or when a predetermined number (eg, 10) of prizes are detected in the large winning opening, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), a special When the variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is controlled to be closed again and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed, the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is also controlled to be closed.

When a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 and is detected by the V area switch 052IW106 within a predetermined detection valid period, the game state is controlled to a probability variable state after the big hit game is over. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variable jackpot, the predetermined detection effective period starts at the timing when the V-region opening/closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to open, and the V-region opening/closing plate 052IW101 is opened. It is a period until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses after being controlled to the closed state again.

Next, using FIG. 10-11 (2), the opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 when controlled to the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot and the 2R normal jackpot (hereinafter also simply referred to as "normal jackpot"). Describe the pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), when the first round of the jackpot game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is opened. controlled by When a game ball wins while the big winning hole is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23 .

Also, in the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot, as shown in FIG. The area switch plate 052IW101 is controlled to be open for a very short period (0.02 seconds in this example). Then, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses in the first round or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prizes are detected in the large winning opening, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), a special The variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is controlled to be closed again, and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), in a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot, the predetermined detection valid period is after a very short opening period (in this example, 0.02 seconds) of the V-area opening/closing plate 052IW101. It is a period until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the variable probability jackpot, the opening period of the V-region opening/closing plate 052IW101 is long. Therefore, it is easy for the game ball to enter the V area 052IW104 during the predetermined detection valid period, and it is easy to be controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big hit game. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), in a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot, the opening period of the V-region opening/closing plate 052IW101 is extremely short. Therefore, it is practically difficult for the game ball to enter the V area 052IW104 during the predetermined effective period of detection, and it is extremely rare to be controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, in this example, in the big win game based on the variable probability big win, game balls enter the V area 052IW104 at a higher rate during the big win game than in the big win game based on the normal big win.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14 are explanatory diagrams for explaining opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. 10-12 show opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit A. FIG. 10-13 show opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit B. FIG. 10-14 show opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit C. FIG. 10-12(1) to 10-14(1) respectively show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the 1KT state, and FIG. 10-12(2). 10-14(2) respectively show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state.

First, the release patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the 1KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12(1) to 10-14(1). As shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 Variation display of the pattern is executed, and when it is determined to be a normal pattern hit, the winning pattern is derived and displayed on the normal pattern display device 20, and when it is determined to be a loss, the lost pattern is derived and displayed on the normal pattern display device 20.例文帳に追加be done. In this characteristic portion 052IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), the variation time of normal symbols is set to 0.2 seconds, and winning symbols and losing symbols are derived and displayed. The time is 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning pattern is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), after the pattern fixing time 0.2 seconds has passed, the second start winning opening is opened. After 0.1 second of the pre-processing time has passed, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole.

When a game ball wins in the second starting prize opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined to be a small hit, A small winning symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. When the small winning symbols are derived and displayed, if the small winning is A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-12 (1). , in the case of a small hit B, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (1), the special variable prize winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and in the case of a small hit C, as shown in FIG. As shown in -14 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and a game ball can enter the special winning hole (however, in the case of a small hit A, , Since the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only for a very short period of 0.2 seconds, winning can hardly be expected). However, in the 1KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-12(1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is as short as 0.2 seconds, 0.8 seconds or 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although small hits are likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to enter the special winning hole (for example, about one ball per 100 fluctuation displays).

In the 1KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-12(1) to 10-14(1), after finishing the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B, the next variable winning ball device 6B can be opened. After at least 0.5 seconds, which is the total of the next normal symbol fluctuation time 0.2 seconds, the symbol determination time 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening pre-processing time 0.1 seconds, has passed. be. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 052IW, in the first KT state, a closed period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 052IW, in the first KT state, after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbols are not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state. After 0.5 seconds, which is the total of the normal symbol fluctuation time 0.2 seconds, the symbol determination time 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening pre-processing time 0.1 seconds, and the game ball It is configured to take about 0.6 seconds from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. As described above, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the state where the normal symbols are not changed to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state is more The variable winning ball device 6B is already opened because the time from the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 to the arrival of the game ball at the variable winning ball device 6B is shorter than the time when the game ball normally does not change the pattern. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B when it is controlled to the state. Therefore, in the 1KT state, a game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 in a state in which the normal symbols are not changed easily wins the variable winning ball device 6B.

Next, the release patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12(2) to 10-14(2). As shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 Variation display of the pattern is executed, and when it is determined to be a normal pattern hit, the winning pattern is derived and displayed on the normal pattern display device 20, and when it is determined to be a loss, the lost pattern is derived and displayed on the normal pattern display device 20.例文帳に追加be done. In this characteristic portion 052IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), the variation time of the normal pattern is set to 1.0 seconds, and the winning pattern and the losing pattern are derived and displayed. The time is 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning pattern is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), after the pattern fixing time 0.2 seconds has passed, the second start winning opening is opened. After the pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds has elapsed, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole.

When the game ball wins in the second starting prize opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is decided to make a small hit, A small winning symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. When the small winning symbols are derived and displayed, if the small winning is A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-12 (2). , in the case of a small hit B, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, As shown in -14 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and a game ball can enter the special winning hole.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is as short as 0.2 seconds. In addition, in this characteristic portion 052IW, in the second KT state, the interval period (closing period) after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is at least 3.8 seconds (ordinary design fluctuation time 1.0 seconds + design determination time 0). A relatively long period of 0.2 seconds + 2.6 seconds before the second start winning opening processing is ensured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-12(2) to 10-14(2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long. , Compared to the 1KT state, the game ball is more likely to enter the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side, and the game ball is more likely to enter the special winning hole. However, in the case of a small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only for a very short 0.2 seconds, so even in the 2KT state, winning of game balls into the special winning opening can hardly be expected.

In addition, in the second KT state, the game ball is likely to enter the special winning hole and the prize ball is easily obtained. ” is displayed.

Further, in this example, the case where the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is changed according to which of the small winning types A to C is shown, but such a mode is shown. not limited to For example, the number of times the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened may be varied depending on which of the small wins A to C the small win type is. In this case, for example, in the case of the small win A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only once during the small win game, while in the case of the small win B or the small win C, the small win game is performed. The special variable winning ball device 17 may be configured to be opened 2 to 11 times. Further, for example, even if the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is short to some extent, by executing the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17 for 0.4 seconds four times, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) ) may be configured to provide a small hit type in which game balls can win to some extent, and various aspects are conceivable. Also, in this example, a case was shown in which there are three types of small wins A to C, but the configuration is not limited to such an aspect, and for example, four or more types of small wins may be provided. good too.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 052IW, in the second KT state, after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state. After 3.8 seconds, which is the total of the normal pattern fluctuation time 1.0 seconds, the pattern confirmation time 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening pre-processing time 2.6 seconds, and the game ball It is configured to take about 0.6 seconds from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. As described above, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the state where the normal symbols are not changed to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is more The variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state because it is longer than the time from when the game ball passes through the pass gate 41 to when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B in a state where the normal pattern is not varied. The game ball reaches the variable prize winning ball device 6B before being controlled to . Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for a game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 in a state in which the normal symbols are not changed to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 052IW, the process of executing the variable display of normal symbols and controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is performed by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103). (see step S26) is executed. In addition, the game control microcomputer 100, in the normal symbol process processing of step S26, determines whether the game state is a variable probability state (high probability state), or whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state or a second KT state. Regardless of whether there is a jackpot game state or not, the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%) is used to determine whether or not to hit a regular pattern.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 052IW, the normal symbol fluctuation time and the symbol fixing time are the same in the 1st KT state and the 2nd KT state by 0.2 seconds each, and the time before the second start winning opening opening processing is the same. A case has been shown in which the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B is varied by shortening it to 0.1 seconds in the 1KT state and lengthening it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state. can't For example, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to have different closing periods (interval periods) by differentiating the fluctuation time and the symbol fixing time between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second starting winning hole opening process after closing the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be controllable, and the time after the second starting winning hole opening process is different between the first KT state and the second KT state. The closed period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be varied by changing the variable winning ball device 6B. In particular, by shortening the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress the winning of prizes in the special winning openings in the first KT state. .

As will be described later, in the first KT state, the characteristic portion 052IW controls the high base state by setting a high base flag indicating the high base state. As shown in 10-14(1), control is performed so that the open time of the variable winning ball device 6B is lengthened. Also, in the second KT state, by controlling to the low base state without setting the high base flag, as shown in FIGS. It is controlled to shorten the time.

In addition, for example, a special flag (open extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, FIGS. 14 (1) is controlled by the first opening pattern (long opening) that opens the variable winning ball device 6B for a long time, and if the special flag is not set, FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 The variable winning ball device 6B shown in (2) may be configured to be controlled by a second opening pattern (short opening) that opens for a short period of time. That is, the special flag may be set only in the 1KT state, and the special flag may not be set in other states including the jackpot game state.

Also, even in the first KT state, when executing the last variable display in the low probability/first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened. For example, the above-mentioned special flag may be erased in response to the 49th special symbol variation stop in the 50 special symbol shortened variation periods in the low probability/first KT state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the variable winning ball device 6B being open for a long time when the left-hand shot is notified after the low probability/first KT state is ended. be able to.

As described above, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured using the flag (special flag) for controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B, the flag for shortening the variable display of the special symbol is used. In this case, the special flag and the shortening variation flag may be separately managed and controlled.

Also, the variable winning ball device 6B may be short-circuited during the low probability/non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the probability of opening the variable winning ball device 6B is increased in the low probability/non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are shot. , it is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 6B from winning a prize, and it is possible to prevent the right-handed operation from being performed during the low-probability/non-KT state.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 052IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14, the variation time of normal symbols is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. For example, when the variable display of the second special symbol having a relatively long variation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable winning balls are variable winning balls in a state where the normal symbols are stopped from varying and there is no reserved memory of the normal symbols. This is because the device 6B is in a closed state, and it is possible to capture aiming at the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol (when it becomes a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the passing gate The variable winning ball device 6B does not open until the game ball passing through 41 reaches the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the winning of the special winning hole becomes possible). On the other hand, in this characteristic portion 052IW, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened before the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and reaches the variable winning ball device 6B. is set to start, it is possible to eliminate capture elements by a shooting operation aimed at the small hit generation timing based on the variable display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

(Production control command)
10-15 and 10-16 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. FIG. In the example shown in FIGS. 10-15, commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H) are ornaments variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to variable display of special symbols. It is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies the variation pattern of the symbol. It should be noted that the effect control command specifying the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H), the image display device 5 starts variable display of the decoration pattern. Control.

Command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (loss designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is lost. Command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (10R probability variable jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a 10R probability variable jackpot. . Command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variable jackpot designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a 6R probability variable jackpot. . The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a 6R normal jackpot. . Command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variable jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a 2R probability variable jackpot. . The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a 2R normal jackpot. . The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as display result designation commands. In addition, in this characteristic portion 052IW, since the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the variation pattern command, the display result designation command received immediately before the first variation pattern command by the effect control CPU 120 is It can be determined that it is a display result specifying command for the first special symbol, and the display result specifying command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be a display result specifying command for the second special symbol, so the display result The specified command can be used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the display result specified command for the first special symbol and the display result specified command for the second special symbol may be separate.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the display result designation command, but corresponds to 10R variable probability big hit/6R probability variable big win/6R normal big win/2R probability variable big win/2R normal big win/minor win/loss. A variation pattern command may be determined, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

Command 9C00 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) that designates that lighting of the right-handed display 26 is finished. The command 9C01 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) that designates that lighting of the right-handed display 26 is started.

Command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol determination designation command) capable of specifying stop of variable display of the first special symbol. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

The command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first forced symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying that the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. Command A003 (H) is an effect control command (second compulsory design determination designation command) capable of specifying that the variable display of the second special design is forcibly stopped.

Command BXXX(H) (X=arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent out from the start of the big win game to the end of the big win game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (jackpot start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of a big hit game. B001(H) is an effect control command (jackpot end designation command: ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of a small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX(H) is an effect control command (large winning opening open display command) that designates a display during the round during the big win game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. Command B2XX(H) is an effect control command (post-opening big winning opening display command) that designates display after a round (display of interval between rounds) during a big win game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (large winning opening designation command) that designates that a game ball has entered a large winning opening. Command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening designation command) that designates that a game ball has won a special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start winning designation command) indicating that the game ball has won the first start winning opening while the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start winning designation command) indicating that the game ball has won the second start winning opening while the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. A command indicating the first reserved memory number may be transmitted as the first effective start winning prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved memory number may be transmitted as the second effective start winning prize designation command. Then, the first effective starting winning designation command and the second effective starting winning designation command are commands indicating that there is a starting winning prize.

The command C801 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage designation command) that designates that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 .

Command D000 (H) is a production control command (first customer waiting demo display designation command). Command D001 (H) is a production control command (second customer waiting demo display designation command). The first customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Also, the second customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

Command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability/non-KT background designation command) for designating background display when the game state is low probability/non-KT state. Command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability/first KT background designation command) for designating background display when the game state is low probability/first KT state. Command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high probability/first KT background designation command) for designating background display when the game state is high probability/first KT state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high probability/second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability/second KT state.

Command E1XX (H) is an effect control command (setting command) that designates the currently set setting value. Note that the setting value is set to "XX". For example, when the setting value is set to "1", command E100(H) is transmitted as the setting command. Further, for example, when the setting value is set to "6", the command E105(H) is transmitted as the setting command.

The effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. 10-15 and FIG. 10-16, the display state of the image display device 5 is changed, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the sound control board 13. FIG. Incidentally, the effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 10-15 and 10-16 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed production control command related to the jackpot game and a production control command indicating a game state (for example, a production control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 .

(First special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 10-17 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is the case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. In addition, when the value of the first special symbol process flag is the value indicating step S110A, it means that the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed in the first special symbol display device 4A.

In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the character product control process flag indicates the normal character product control process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 052IWS50A). In addition, when the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the normal role control process (step S120), that is, when the value of the role product control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is the case where the value indicating the end processing (step S128) is not reached, and the case is neither during the big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during the small winning game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the normal accessory control process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step 052IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is checked. If the first pending memory number is 0, a first customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS52A).

If the first reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102, (step 052IWS53A), decrease the value of the first reserved storage number by 1 (subtract 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter), and shift the contents of each storage area (step 052IWS54A). That is, each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 is changed to the first reserved memory number=n− Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number is extracted always matches the order of the first reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It's like That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so the order in which each random number value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The order of extraction is also identifiably preserved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a setting command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 052IWS55A). In this example, the setting command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by executing the processing of step 052 IWS 55A. The setting command is also sent when executed.

The timing of transmitting the setting command is not limited to the one shown in this example. may be configured.

Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS56A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the low probability / non-KT state is set, and the low probability / non-KT background designation command is issued. If there is, it is determined to be in the low probability/first KT state and a low probability/first KT background designation command is issued. Determine and issue a high probability/first KT background designation command, and if the variable probability flag is on and the high base flag is off, determine that it is in a high probability/second KT state and issue a high probability/second KT background designation command, Send.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the second special symbol is in the midst of a big hit variation (step 052IWS57A). Concretely, when the second big win flag indicating that the big win will be made is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the second special symbol is in the middle of the big win variation. When it is determined that the second special symbol is in the middle of the big hit fluctuation, the process proceeds to step 052IWS69A without performing the processing after step 052IWS58A. As a result, when the variation of the first special pattern is started during the big hit variation of the second special pattern, it is forcibly lost regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly detaching is not limited to the one described above. For example, in step 052IWS57A, when the second special pattern is in the midst of a big hit fluctuation, a process of setting a random value (fixed value) as a hit determination random number is performed, and by moving to step 052IWS59A, at the time of starting winning A win may be forcibly determined regardless of which hit determination random number has been acquired.

Also, for example, when the second special symbol is in the middle of the big hit fluctuation at step 052IWS57A, the process of steps 052IWS58A to S63A is not performed, and a random value (fixed value) is set as the random number for hit determination, and a small value is set. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly lost regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

If the second special symbol is not in the middle of the big hit variation, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the first random number storage buffer (step 052IWS58A), and executes the big hit determination module (step 052IWS59A). The big-hit determination module is a program that determines that a big-hit will be made when the hit-judgment random number matches a predetermined big-hit determination value. When it is determined to be a big win (step 052IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first big win flag indicating that a big win will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol (step 052IWS61A). . Based on the hit type determination random number, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot (step 052IWS62A), the jackpot type is stored (step 052IWS63A), and step 052IWS69A. to

In addition, when the game control microcomputer 100 does not make a big hit at step 052IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes a small hit determination module (step 052IWS64A). The small-hit determination module is a program that determines a small-hit if the random number for the hit determination (random number for the small-hit determination may be used) matches a predetermined small-hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 052IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first small win flag indicating that a small win will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol ( Step 052 IWS 66A). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the minor winning type based on the winning type determination random number (step 052IWS67A), and stores the minor winning type (step 052IWS68A). Incidentally, in this example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the small hit type is determined as the small hit A (see FIG. 10-6 (A)). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS69A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the number of remaining high base states is "0" (step 052IWS69A), and if it is "0", step 052IWS75A. to If the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, if it is in the low probability/first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 052IWS70A), It is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step 052IWS71A). If the value of the high base number counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 052IWS75A. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 052IWS72A) and shortens the variable display of the special symbols. Reset the special figure time saving flag indicating that it is under control (step 052IWS73A). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is extended until the end of variation (step 052IWS74A). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS75A.

In this characteristic portion 052IW, as will be described later, the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the variable display in the high base state is managed at a low probability at the end of the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot. This is the case where 50 times of fluctuation display is performed under control to the /high base state (low probability/first KT state). In the case of the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), when starting the 50th variation display, it is determined as Y in steps 052IWS71A and S71B, and the high base flag is set in steps 052IWS72A and S72B. Along with being reset, step 052IWS73A, step 052IWS73A, S73B also reset the special figure time-saving flag, it will shift to the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)).

In addition, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) continues the right-handed notification and continues the right-handed state, and although the high base state has ended as a game state, the fluctuation reduction common to the 1st KT state This is a flag for setting the effect background in common with the first KT state while maintaining the state.

In this example, the processing of step 052IWS74A and the processing of step 052IWS74B, which will be described later, are executed, and the high base state is caused by the start of fluctuation of either the first special symbol variable display or the second special symbol variable display. When the final variation of (in this example, the 50th variation display) is started, a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set to extend the variation reduction state. In this case, when the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set, whether the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol (in this example, the 50th variation display) ends Or, according to the start of the variable display of the other special symbol (in this example, the 51st variable display), the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is reset, and the extension of the variable shortened state is completed. is desirable.

Then, in step 052IWS75A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step 052IWS75A). Although not shown, the symbols to be stopped are determined immediately before step 052IWS75A.

In step 052IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probability-variable big-hit determination table or the probability-variable big-hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

(First variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 10-18 is a flow chart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether or not the special figure time saving flag indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is being shortened is set. (Step 052IWS1700A). In addition, in this example, the special symbol time saving flag is set and the shortening control of the variable display of the special symbol is performed, so that it is more advantageous to execute the variable display of the second special symbol (Fig. 10-7 (see FIG. 10-9), the state is controlled to the KT state because it becomes a state in which small hits are likely to occur. If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 is a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern, non-shown in FIG. 10-7 (A) Select the first special symbol variation pattern table for KT (step 052IWS1701A). If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, if the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 is a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern, KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (B) Select the first special symbol variation pattern table for time (step 052IWS1702A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 052IWS1701A and S1702A and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer, Which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 10-7 is to be used is determined (step 052IWS1703A). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Further, after determining the variation time, the variation pattern for which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1704A).

Further, when the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step 052IWS1703A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the variation time data indicating the determined variation time to the first variation time timer and sets the variation time. measurement is started (step 052IWS1705A), and the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is started (step 052IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 052IWS1707A).

(First special symbol variation process)
FIG. 10-19 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the role product control process flag indicates the normal role product control process (step S120) (step 052IWS1120A). In addition, when the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the normal role control process (step S120), that is, when the value of the role product control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is the case where the value does not indicate the end processing (step S128), and the case is neither during the big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during the small winning game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the role product control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103, if not yet transmitted, determines whether or not to make a big hit, and the type of the big win. Based on the determination result, one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 7 designation command) to the effect control CPU 120 control to transmit to (step 052IWS1121A).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first variable time timer (step 052IWS1122A), and when the first variable time timer times out (step 052IWS1123A), performs control to transmit the first symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 052 IWS 1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A) (step 052IWS1130A).

If the first variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second special symbol display device 4B is displaying the big hit symbol (step 052IWS1125A). Whether or not the second special symbol display device 4B derives and displays the big hit symbol is, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing, It can be determined by confirming whether or not a second big hit flag indicating a big hit is set based on the variable display of the second special symbol.

If the second special symbol display device 4B does not derive and display the big winning symbol, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second special symbol display device 4B derives and displays the small winning symbol (step 052IWS1126A). Whether or not the small winning symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not a second small hit flag indicating a small hit is set based on the variable display of the second special symbol. If the second special symbol display device 4B does not derive and display the small winning symbol, the process is terminated as it is.

If the second special symbol display device 4B is deriving and displaying a small winning symbol, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol being executed will result in a big winning (step 052IWS1127A). . It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed will result in a big hit can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the first big hit flag is set. If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed does not result in a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the variation display of the first special symbol being executed results in a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether the big hit type is a 10R probability variable big hit or a 6R probability variable big hit (step 052IWS1128A). Whether or not the 10R probability variable jackpot or the 6R probability variable jackpot is determined can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A. If it is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 6R probability variable jackpot, the process is terminated as it is.

When the second special symbol display device 4B derives and displays the jackpot pattern (Y of step 052IWS1125A), or when the minor hit pattern is derived and displayed (Y of step 052IWS1126A), either the 10R probability variable jackpot or the 6R probability variable jackpot. When the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed (Y of step 052IWS1127A, N of step 052IWS1128A), the CPU 103 instructs the effect control CPU 120 to display the first compulsory symbol. Control is performed to transmit the confirmation designation command (step 052IWS1129A). In this case, if the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A) (step 052IWS1130A).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS1125A to S1129A, in this characteristic part 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, or when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit. In the case where the variation display of the first special symbol that results in a normal jackpot (in this example, a 6R normal jackpot) is being executed, the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol is stopped. A situation in which a big hit or a small hit occurs simultaneously with the second special symbol is prevented. In this case, on the side of the effect control CPU 120, when the variation display of the first special symbol is forced out, the variation of the decoration symbol is based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted at step 052IWS1129A. As a result of the display, control is performed so as to forcibly stop and display the lost pattern.

In addition, in this example, it is a case where the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the probability variable big hit (in this example, the 10R probability variable big hit or the 6R probability variable big hit) When the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y in step 052IWS1128A), but in this case, the variable display of the second special symbol is Based on the small winning, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small winning opening preprocessing (step S126), and the game shifts to the small winning game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, step 052IWS1120A is judged as N, the processing of steps 052IWS1121A to S1130A is skipped, and the first variable time timer of step 052IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a probability variation big win is being executed, the first variation time timer is set during the small win game. is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, it is a case where the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and during the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a loss or a small hit. If there is, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see N of step 052IWS1127A). Therefore, even when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small win and the variation display of the first special symbol that results in a loss or a small win is being executed, the first variation is performed during the small win game. The update of the time timer is interrupted, the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small winning game is finished, the update of the first variable time timer is resumed.

(First special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-20 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 052IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag (step 052IWS2011A). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2012A), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2013A).

In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, when the game state is controlled to the KT state, the person who performed the right-handed operation is in the player's favor and the hit right indicator 26 is illuminated. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed indicator 26 is lit during the low-probability/first KT state, but the 50th variation display is performed by executing the processing of steps 052IWS69A-S74A and S69B-S74B. At the start, the low probability/1st KT state is terminated and the transition to the normal state (non-KT state) is performed, and the processing of steps 052IWS2010A to S2013A and S2010B to S2013B is executed to end the 50th fluctuation display. When doing so, the right hitting indicator 26 is turned off.

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS2014A). Incidentally, in this case, if the first compulsory design confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 052IWS1129A of the first special design variation processing, regardless of the determination result at the start of variation, the first special design is forced as the stop design. Derivation and display of the target missing pattern.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step 052IWS2015A). When the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot start flag indicating the start of the jackpot (step 052IWS2016A). Also, the CPU 103 clears the first jackpot flag (step 052IWS2017A).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed indicator 26 (step 052IWS2018A), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2019A). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027A.

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS2018A and S2019A, in this example, lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is started when a big hit is achieved in the variation display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big win game. , and the right-handed indicator 26 is illuminated.

In this example, after the big-hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big-hit game is started based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, so the right-hand shot is made at the timing when the game ball passes the passage gate 41. You may comprise so that lighting of the indicator 26 may be started.

When the first big hit flag is not set (N of step 052IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first small hit flag is set (step 052IWS2020A). When the 1st small hit flag is set, control which transmits the small hit start designation command vis-a-vis production control CPU120 is done (step 052IWS2021A). Also, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 052IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the role product control process flag to a value corresponding to the small winning opening preprocessing (step 052IWS2026A). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027A.

In this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is originally more advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the small winning game. However, as already explained, when a small win is obtained in the variable display of the first special symbol, the type of the small win is only a small win A, and winning of the game ball into the special winning hole can hardly be expected. Therefore, in this example, when a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right hitting indicator 26 is not lit, and the right hitting lighting start designation command is not transmitted.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step 052IWS2027A).

In this example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed with the first special symbol, it is configured to be able to execute a right-handed notification prompting the player to shoot the game ball to the right of the game area. there is In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stop-displayed in the first special symbol, it is configured to be able to execute a launch promotion notification prompting the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the passage gate 41 as a right-handed notification. may be

In addition, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed with the second special pattern, the right hitting notification and the launch promotion notice are not executed, and when the game ball wins the first start winning hole in that state, the right hitting notice and the launch promotion notice are issued. (In this case, since it is in the state of waiting for passage through the gate, even if the game ball wins the first start winning opening, the variable display of the first special symbol will not be started immediately, and will be the first reserved memory) can be configured to

Conversely, when the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state), the degree of recognition is low (for example, sound output at a low volume or small screen display). may be configured to perform a left-handed notification prompting the player to shoot the game ball to the left of the game area. On the other hand, in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), when the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening or the special winning opening is detected, the degree of recognition is high (for example, loud sound output, (Large screen display) may be configured to notify left-handed players. With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately perform the launch notification. In particular, according to the above configuration, for a player who accidentally shoots a game ball to the right side of the game area, a slight left-handed notification is given in a mode in which the degree of recognition of the surroundings of the gaming machine is low. For a player who intentionally performs a right-handed operation, a left-handed notification may be given in a mode in which the degree of awareness of the surroundings of the gaming machine is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to prompt the game store clerk to return to the left-handed operation to the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation.

Further, in the above case, when the number of game balls detected at the passage gate 41, the second start winning opening, or the special winning opening reaches a certain number, it may be configured to perform left-handed notification. In addition, at the passage gate 41, when a game ball is detected multiple times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), left-handed notification is performed, and at the second start winning opening and special winning opening, more than a predetermined number It may be configured to perform left-handed notification when game balls of a specific number (for example, one) or more are detected.

It should be noted that, in this characteristic part 052IW, a demonstration display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied. When the winning of the game ball is detected, the execution of the demonstration display being executed may be terminated and left-handed notification may be performed.

(Second special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 10-21 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol normal process in the second special symbol process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal process. In addition, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, there is a state in which the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner in the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the character product control process flag indicates the normal character product control process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 052IWS50B). In addition, when the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the normal role control process (step S120), that is, when the value of the role product control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is the case where the value does not indicate the end processing (step S128), and the case is neither during the big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during the small winning game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the normal role product control process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step 052IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is checked. If the second pending memory number is 0, a second customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS52B).

If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102, (step 052IWS53B), decrease the value of the second reserved storage number by 1 (subtract 1 from the count value of the second reserved storage number counter), and shift the contents of each storage area (step 052IWS54B). That is, each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 is changed to the second reserved memory number=n− Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved memory number is extracted always matches the order of the second reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It's like That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so the order in which each random number value is extracted can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a setting command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 052IWS55B). In this example, the setting command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by executing the processing of step 052 IWS 55B. The setting command is also sent when executed.

Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS56B). It should be noted that the specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step 052IWS56A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the first special symbol is in the middle of a big hit variation (step 052IWS57B). Concretely, when the first big win flag indicating that the big win will be achieved is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the first special symbol is in the midst of the big win variation. When it is determined that the first special symbol is in the middle of the big hit fluctuation, the process proceeds to step 052IWS69B without performing the processing after step 052IWS58B. Thus, when the variation of the second special pattern is started during the big hit variation of the first special pattern, it is forced to lose regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly detaching is not limited to the one described above. For example, in step 052IWS57B, when the first special symbol is in the middle of a big hit fluctuation, a process of setting a random number (fixed value) as a hit determination random number is performed, and by moving to step 052IWS59B, any time at the time of start winning Regardless of whether or not the random number for the hit determination has been obtained, the game may be forcibly lost.

Also, for example, when the first special symbol is in the middle of the big hit fluctuation at step 052IWS57B, the process of steps 052IWS58B to S63B is not performed, and a random number value (fixed value) is set as the random number for hit determination and a small value is set. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly lost regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

If the first special symbol is not in the middle of the big hit change, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the second random number storage buffer (step 052IWS58B), and executes the big hit determination module (step 052IWS59B). The big-hit determination module is a program that determines that a big-hit will be made when the hit-judgment random number matches a predetermined big-hit determination value. When it is determined to be a big win (step 052IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big win flag indicating that a big win will be made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 052IWS61B). . Based on the hit type determination random number, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, a 2R probability variable jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot (step 052IWS62B), and the jackpot type is stored (step 052IWS63B). ), go to step 052 IWS69B.

Further, when the game control microcomputer 100 does not make a big hit at step 052IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes a small hit determination module (step 052IWS64B). The small-hit determination module is a program that determines a small-hit if the random number for the hit determination (random number for the small-hit determination may be used) matches a predetermined small-hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 052IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small win flag indicating that a small win will be made based on the variable display of the second special symbol ( step 052 IWS 66B). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the minor winning type based on the winning type determination random number (step 052IWS67B), and stores the minor winning type (step 052IWS68B). Incidentally, in this example, when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the small hit type is determined as the small hit B or the small hit C (see FIG. 10-6 (B)). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS69B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 052IWS69B), and if it is "0", proceeds to step 052IWS75B. If the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, if it is in the low probability/first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 052IWS70B), It is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step 052IWS71B). If the value of the high base number counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 052IWS75B. When the value of the high base frequency counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 052IWS72B) and shortens the variable display of the special symbols. Reset the special figure time saving flag indicating that it is under control (step 052IWS73B). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 052IWS74B). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS75B.

Then, in step 052IWS75B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step 052IWS75B). Although not shown, the symbols to be stopped are determined immediately before step 052IWS75B.

In step 052IWS59B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probability-variable big-hit determination table or the probability-variable big-hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) shown in FIG. 10-18. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 10-18, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process will be described. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first performs the same process as in step 052IWS1700A, and confirms whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set. If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 is a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern, non-shown in FIG. 10-8 (C) Select the second special symbol variation pattern table for KT. If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 is whether or not the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set, and depending on the number of variations, variation Select one of the second special symbol variation pattern tables for KT shown in FIGS. 10-8(D) to 10-9(I) as the variation pattern table for determining the pattern. For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability / if the 1st KT state), if it is the first variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-8 (D) Select, if it is the 2nd to 49th variation, select the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-8 (E), and if it is the 50th variation, the second Select the special symbol variation pattern table. Also, for example, if both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability/1st KT state), the second special symbol variation shown in FIG. 10-9 (G) if the first variation The pattern table is selected, and if it is after the second variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-9 (H) is selected. Also, for example, if the probability variation flag is ON and the high base flag is OFF (high probability/second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-9 (I) is selected.

(Second special symbol variation process)
FIG. 10-22 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the role product control process flag indicates the normal role product control process (step S120) (step 052IWS1120B). In addition, when the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the normal role control process (step S120), that is, when the value of the role product control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is the case where the value does not indicate the end processing (step S128), and the case is neither during the big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during the small winning game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the role product control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103, if not yet transmitted, determines whether or not to make a big hit, and the type of the big win. Based on the determination result, any display result designation command (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 5 designation command, display result 6 designation command, display result 7 designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second variable time timer (step 052IWS1122B), and when the second variable time timer times out (step 052IWS1123B), performs control to transmit the second symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 052 IWS 1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 052IWS1130B).

When the second variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the first special symbol display device 4A is deriving and displaying the jackpot symbol (step 052IWS1125B). Whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing, It can be determined by confirming whether or not a first big hit flag indicating that a big hit will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol is set.

If the first special symbol display device 4A does not derive and display the big winning symbol, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the first special symbol display device 4A derives and displays the small winning symbol (step 052IWS1126B). Whether or not the small winning symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not a first small hit flag indicating that a small hit will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol is set. If the first special symbol display device 4A does not derive and display the small winning symbol, the process is terminated as it is.

If the first special symbol display device 4A is deriving and displaying a small winning symbol, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol being executed will result in a big winning (step 052IWS1127B). . It should be noted that whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol being executed will result in a big win can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the second big win flag is set. If the variation display of the second special symbol being executed does not result in a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the variation display of the second special symbol being executed results in a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit type is a 10R probability variable big hit, a 6R probability variable big hit, or a 2R probability variable big hit (step 052IWS1128B). . Whether or not it is a 10R variable probability big hit, a 6R probability variable big hit, or a 2R probability variable big hit can be determined, for example, by confirming the type of big win stored in step 052IWS63B. If it is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 2R probability variable jackpot, the process is terminated as it is.

When the first special symbol display device 4A derives and displays the jackpot pattern (Y of step 052IWS1125B), or when the minor hit pattern is derived and displayed (Y of step 052IWS1126B), the 10R probability variable jackpot, the 6R probability variable jackpot, and When the variable display of the second special symbol that does not result in any of the 2R probability variable jackpots (that is, the 2R normal jackpots) is being executed (Y in step 052IWS1127B, N in step 052IWS1128B), the CPU 103 controls the effect control CPU 120 to transmit the second compulsory pattern confirmation designation command (step 052IWS1129B). In this case, if the second big hit flag and the second small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the second big hit flag and the second small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 052IWS1130B).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS1125B to S1129B, in this characteristic part 052IW, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, or when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit. In this case, when the variable display of the second special symbol that results in a normal jackpot (in this example, a 2R normal jackpot) is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol is displayed. A situation in which a big hit or a small hit occurs at the same time with the second special symbol is prevented. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the second special symbol variation display is forced out, the decoration symbol variation is based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 052IWS1129B. As a result of the display, control is performed so as to forcibly stop and display the lost pattern.

In addition, in this example, it is a case where the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the probability variation big hit (in this example, 10R probability variation big hit, 6R probability variation big hit, Or 2R probability variation big hit), when the variation display of the second special symbol is being executed, the second special symbol variation processing is terminated as it is (see Y in step 052IWS1128B), but in this case, the first special Based on the fact that the variation display of the symbols has become a small win, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small win opening preprocessing (step S126), and the game shifts to a small win game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, step 052IWS1120B is determined as N, steps 052IWS1121B to S1130B are skipped, and step 052IWS1122B does not update the second variable time timer. Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol that becomes a probability variable big hit is being executed, the second variation time timer is set during the small winning game. is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, it is a case where the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and during the variation display of the second special symbol that becomes a loss or a small hit. Even if there is, the second special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see N in step 052IWS1127B). Therefore, even when the variation display of the first special symbol results in a small win and the variation display of the second special symbol that results in a loss or a small win is being executed, the second variation is performed during the small win game. When the update of the time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and the small winning game is finished, the update of the second variable time timer is resumed.

By constructing as described above, in the normal state after the end of the first KT state (after the end of the time-saving state), the remaining second reserved memory can be digested, and the occurrence of a big hit at unintended timing when the player is absent. can be suppressed.

In addition, a variable winning ball device for the first special symbol is provided below the winning ball device 6A (first start winning hole), and a winning ball device for the second special symbol ( A game machine configured to provide a starting winning hole which is not a variable winning ball device, and configured to shift to a normal state via a time-saving state of a first special pattern after the end of a second KT state (small winning RUSH). , As described above, a configuration may be applied in which the variable display of the second special symbol is forced out. In this case, since the variation efficiency of the first special symbol increases, the frequency of occurrence of small hits based on the variation display of the first special symbol also increases. To further suppress the occurrence of a big win at an unintended timing in the absence of a player by increasing the frequency of playing, suppressing the occurrence of the variable display of the second special pattern based on the second reserved memory in the normal state. can be done.

(Second special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-23 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol stop processing. In the second special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 052IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 052IWS2011B). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed display device 26 (step 052IWS2012B), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS2014B). In this case, if the second compulsory design confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 052IWS1129B of the second special design variation process, regardless of the determination result at the start of variation, the second special design is forced as a stop design. Derivation and display of the target missing pattern.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second big hit flag is set (step 052IWS2015B). When the second jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot start flag (step 052IWS2016B). Also, the CPU 103 clears the second big hit flag (step 052IWS2017B).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed indicator 26 (step 052IWS2018B), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2019B). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027B.

By executing the processing of steps 052 IWS2018B and S2019B, in this example, lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is started when a big hit is achieved in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big win game. , and the right-handed indicator 26 is illuminated.

When the second big hit flag is not set (N of step 052IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small hit flag is set (step 052IWS2020B). When the 2nd small hit flag is set, control which transmits the small hit start specification command vis-a-vis production control CPU120 is done (step 052IWS2021B). Also, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 052IWS2022B).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set (step 052IWS2023B). If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right hitting indicator 26 (step 052 IWS 2024 B), and the right for the effect control CPU 120 Control is performed to transmit a lighting start designation command (step 052IWS2025B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the role product control process flag to a value corresponding to the small winning opening pre-processing (step 052IWS2026B). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027B.

By executing the processes of steps 052IWS2024B and S2025B, in this example, lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is started when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is better for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the small winning game. Advantageously, the hit right indicator 26 is lit.

However, in this example, even if a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right-handed indicator 26 should already be on during the KT state. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination processing of step 052IWS2023B, if a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol during the KT state, the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is started in duplicate. or a right-handed lighting start designation command is not performed.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step 052IWS2027B).

(Accessory control normal processing)
FIG. 10-24 is a flow chart showing a role product control normal process (step S120) in the role product control process process. In the role product control normal process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the jackpot start flag is set (step 052IWS2101). If the jackpot start flag is not set, the process is terminated as it is.

If the jackpot start flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot start flag (step 052IWS2102). Next, the CPU 103 sets the timer before opening the big winning opening (step 052IWS2103), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the jackpot type (step 052IWS2104), and sets the round number counter indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot to "1". ' is set (step 052 IWS 2105).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the role product control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting process (step 052IWS2106).

(Gate passage waiting process)
FIG. 10-25 is a flow chart showing the gate passage waiting process (step S121) in the role product control process process. In the gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a detection signal has been input from the gate switch 21 (step 052IWS2501). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is not input, the process is terminated. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103, if set, resets the probability variation flag, high base flag, special figure time saving flag, and clears the value of the high base number counter to 0 ( step 052 IWS 2502). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (step 052IWS2503), and sets the value of the role control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step 052IWS2504).

In this characteristic part 052IW, the passage gate 41 is played instead of immediately starting the jackpot game when the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed as a result of the variable display of the second special pattern by executing the gate passage waiting process. On the condition that the ball passes and is detected by the gate switch 21, it is configured to shift to a big hit game.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 10-26 is a flow chart showing the process during jackpot opening (step S123) in the role product control process process. In the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the first count switch 23 is on (step 052IWS2401). If the first count switch 23 is in the ON state, that is, if the game ball that has entered the large winning opening is detected, the CPU 103 determines the winning number for counting the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening. The counter value is incremented by 1 (step 052IWS2402). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2403).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V area switch 052IW106 is on (step 052IWS2404). If the V area switch 052IW106 is on, that is, if a game ball that has entered the V area 052IW104 is detected, the CPU 103 sets a V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the V area 052IW104. (Step 052 IWS 2405).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the winning number counter is 10 (step 052IWS2406). If the value of the winning number counter is 10, the process proceeds to step 052 IWS2409. If the value of the winning number counter is not 10, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the big winning opening (step 052IWS2407), and the opening time timer after the subtraction times out. (step 052IWS2408). If the open time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the value of the winning number counter is 10 (Y at step 052IWS2406) or when the opening time timer times out (Y at step 052IWS2408), the CPU 103 drives the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door. It stops and controls the big winning opening to be closed (step 052IWS2409). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a display command after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2410). Also, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the round number counter (step 052IWS2411).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the role product control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release post-processing (step 052IWS2412).

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 10-27 is a flow chart showing the jackpot ending process (step S125) in the role product control process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 052IWS2200), and when the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2202. When the big win end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 sets the big win end display timer to display time corresponding to the time (big win end display time) during which the big win end display is performed on the image display device 5. A value is set (step 052IWS2201), and the process ends.

At step 052IWS2202, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer (step 052IWS2202). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big win end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big win end display time has elapsed (step 052IWS2203). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS2203), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V prize flag is set (step 052IWS2204). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag (step 052IWS2205), sets the variable probability flag, and shifts to the variable probability state (high probability state) (step 052IWS2206).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the type of the jackpot that ended this time is the 10R probability variable jackpot or the 2R probability variable jackpot (step 052IWS2207). Whether or not the 10R probability variable jackpot or the 2R probability variable jackpot can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 052IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot, the CPU 103 sets a special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 052IWS2208). Then, the process moves to step 052 IWS2215. In the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot, the high base flag is not set. probability/second KT state).

If it is neither the 10R probability variable jackpot nor the 2R probability variable jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot that ended this time is the 6R probability variable jackpot (step 052IWS2209). It should be noted that whether or not the 6R probability variable big hit can be determined by confirming the big hit type stored in step 052IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process and step 052IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process, for example. If it is a 6R probability variable jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 052IWS2210), further sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 052IWS2211). Then, the process moves to step 052 IWS2215. Therefore, in the case of a 6R probability variable jackpot, if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, it will be controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state).

In the case of a 6R probability variable jackpot, only the high base flag is set and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, since the high base number counter is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (see step 052 IWS2502 of the gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base number counter remains 0. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable jackpot, it is controlled to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and since the value of the high base number counter is 0 in the subsequent variation display, It is determined as Y in step 052IWS69A of the first special symbol normal processing and step 052IWS69B of the second special symbol normal processing, and the subtraction processing of the high base number counter of step 052IWS70A and step 052IWS70B is not performed. Then, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) is maintained until the next big win occurs.

If it is not a 6R probability variable jackpot (that is, if it is a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 052IWS2212), and sets the special figure time saving flag. to the KT state (step 052IWS2213). Also, the CPU 103 sets the high base number counter to "50" (step 052IWS2214). Then, the process moves to step 052 IWS2215. Therefore, in the case of a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot, the game is controlled to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the role product control process flag to a value corresponding to the normal role product control process (step 052IWS2215).

(small hit end processing)
FIG. 10-28 is a flow chart showing a small winning end process (step S128) in the role product control process process. In the small-hit end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small-hit end display timer is set (step 052IWS2300), and when the small-hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2302. When the small-hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 causes the small-hit end display timer to display corresponding to the time during which the small-hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (small-hit end display time). A value corresponding to the time is set (step 052IWS2301), and the process ends.

At step 052IWS2302, 1 is subtracted from the value of the small hit end display timer (step 052IWS2302). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small-hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small-hit end display time has elapsed (step 052IWS2303). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the small hit end display time has passed (Y of step 052IWS2303), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set (step 052IWS2304). If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 checks whether the right-handed indicator 26 is lit (step 052IWS2305). If the right-handed indicator 26 is lit, the CPU 103 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 052 IWS 2306), and transmits a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed (step 052IWS2307).

In this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the non-KT state, the lighting of the right hand indicator 26 is started at the start of the small winning game (steps 052IWS2023B-S2025B). ), the processing of steps 052IWS2304 to S2307 is executed, and the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 ends at the end of the small winning game.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the role product control process flag to a value corresponding to the normal role product control process (step 052IWS2308).

(Transition of game state)
Here, the transition of the game state in this characteristic portion 052IW will be described. FIG. 10-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the game state transitions in this characteristic portion 052IW. First, in the characteristic portion 052IW, in the low-probability/low-base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player shoots the game ball aiming at the left side of the game area (left hitting). Therefore, in the normal state, the starting winning to the first starting winning opening mainly occurs, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big win occurs in the low probability/low base state, a 10R probability variable big win, a 6R probability variable big win, or a 6R normal big win mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variable jackpot occurs in a low probability/low base state, if a game ball enters V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, a high probability/ It shifts to a low base state (high probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. Also, if a 6R variable probability big hit occurs in the low probability/low base state, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability/high base state (high probability/ 1KT state), and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204-S2206, S2209-S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs in the low probability/low base state, after the jackpot game ends, the transition is made to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and whether the next jackpot will occur. The low-probability/high-base state is maintained until 50 fluctuation displays are completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

After transitioning to the KT state (high-probability/high-base state, low-probability/high-base state, high-probability/low-base state), in this characteristic portion 052IW, the player aims at the right side of the game area. to perform the shooting operation (right hitting) of the game ball. Therefore, in the KT state, the start winning to the second start winning opening is mainly generated, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big win occurs in the KT state, a 10R probability variable big win, a 6R probability variable big win, a 2R probability variable big win, or a 2R normal big win occurs mainly.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variable big hit or a 2R probability variable big hit occurs in a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big win game. Then, after the jackpot game ends, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big win occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, when a 6R variable probability big hit occurs in a high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a big win game, a high probability is reached after the end of the big win game. / high base state (high probability/first KT state), and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204-S2206, S2209-S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, in this characteristic portion 052IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of the 6R probability variable jackpot is 50% in total (see FIG. 10-5), so once high probability / high When the base state is reached, the high probability/high base state loops at a rate of 50%. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), the state shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state) after the end of the jackpot game. , the low-probability/high-base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the 50-time variation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variable big hit or a 2R probability variable big hit occurs in the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big win game. Then, after the jackpot game ends, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big win occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, when a 6R probability variable big hit occurs in a low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a big win game, a high probability is reached after the end of the big win game. / high base state (high probability/first KT state), and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204-S2206, S2209-S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), the state shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state) after the end of the jackpot game. , the low-probability/high-base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the 50-time variation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214). In addition, in this characteristic portion 052IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of the 2R normal jackpot is 35% (see FIGS. 10-5 (D) and (E)). Once in the low-probability/high-base state, the low-probability/high-base state loops at a rate of 35%. In addition, after the 6R normal jackpot or 2R normal jackpot occurs and the low probability/high base state is reached, if 50 times of fluctuation display ends without the next jackpot As shown, it shifts to the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (see steps 052IWS69A-S73A, S69B-S73B).

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when the 10R probability variable big hit or the 2R probability variable big hit occurs in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big win game. Then, after the jackpot game ends, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big win occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, in this characteristic portion 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of the 10R probability variable big hit or the 2R probability variable big hit is 15 when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. % (see FIGS. 10-5(D) and (E)), once the high-probability/low-base state is reached, the high-probability/low-base state loops at a rate of 15%. In addition, when a 6R probability variable big hit occurs in a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a big win game, a high probability is reached after the end of the big win game. / high base state (high probability/first KT state), and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204-S2206, S2209-S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), after the jackpot game ends, the state is shifted to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state). , the low-probability/high-base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the 50-time variation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

In addition, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) has been described, but the second special symbol changes at a low rate It is also possible that a display is performed. In this case, when a 10R probability variable big hit or a 2R probability variable big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big win game, the transition to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) is made. become. Further, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, when the 2R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to the low-probability/high base state (low-probability/1st KT state), and until the next jackpot occurs or 50 times of fluctuation display is completed, the low-probability/high probability is reached. The base state will be maintained.

Also, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. may be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variable jackpot occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, when the 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), and until the next jackpot occurs or 50 times of fluctuation display is completed, the low probability/high probability is reached. The base state will be maintained.

Also, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. may be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variable jackpot occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, when the 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), and until the next jackpot occurs or 50 times of fluctuation display is completed, the low probability/high probability is reached. The base state will be maintained.

Also, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. may be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variable jackpot occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, when the 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), and until the next jackpot occurs or 50 times of fluctuation display is completed, the low probability/high probability is reached. The base state will be maintained.

(Normal pattern process processing)
Next, the normal symbol process processing (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 10-30 is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol process processing. In the normal symbol process process, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) detects that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 and the gate switch 21 has been turned on (step 052IWS5111), Control is performed to transmit a gate passage designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS5112). Then, the CPU 103 executes gate switch passage processing (step 052IWS5113).

In this characteristic part 052IW, when the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected by executing the processing of steps 052IWS5111 to S5113, a gate passage designation command is transmitted. In this characteristic portion 052IW, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate and also plays the role of an operating area. Regardless of whether or not the gate passage specification command is transmitted.

Then, the CPU 103 executes one of the processes shown in steps 052IWS5100 to S5104 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

It should be noted that, in this characteristic portion 052IW, regardless of whether or not the state is waiting for passage through the gate, when passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected in step 052IWS5111, the gate switch passage processing of step 052IWS5113 is executed. Variation display of normal symbols is executed, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, only when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 when not waiting for passage of the gate, the variable display of the normal symbols is executed, and in the state of waiting for passage of the gate, even if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal symbols are displayed. may be configured not to execute the variable display.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 052IW, the passage gate 41 is used as a gate for both the normal starting area and the operating area. Since it is executed prior to the symbol process processing (see step S26), the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41 as the normal start region is detected after the detection processing of the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41 as the operating region. A detection process is performed. Therefore, the processing for starting the big win game can be executed quickly.

Gate switch passage processing (step 052IWS5113): The CPU 103 sets the count value (gate passage storage number) of the gate passage storage counter (counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41) to the maximum value (in this example, " 4”) is reached. If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage memory counter is incremented by one. It should be noted that the LED of the normal figure holding indicator 25C is lit according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 103 extracts the value of the normal symbol per determination random number and stores it in a storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the gate passage memory number.

Normal design normal processing (step 052IWS5100): The CPU 103 is in a state where the fluctuation of the normal design can be started (for example, when the value of the normal design process flag is a value indicating step 052IWS5100, specifically, the normal design When the variable winning ball device 6B is not in the opening/closing operation based on the fact that the normal symbol is not variably displayed on the display device 20 and the symbol is derived and displayed by hitting the normal symbol display device 20), the gate passage is stored. Check the value of a number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passage storage number counter is confirmed. If the gate passing memory number is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not the stop pattern of the normal pattern is to be a winning pattern). Then, the normal pattern process timer is set for the normal pattern fluctuation time, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal design process flag is normally updated to the value (specifically "1") indicating the design variation process (step 052IWS5101).

Normal symbol variation process (step 052 IWS5101): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if timed out, sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time to the normal symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal design process flag is normally updated to a value (specifically "2") indicating the design stop processing (step 052IWS5102).

Normal symbol stop process (step 052 IWS5102): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out. If it is not a hit pattern (if it is a lost pattern), the value of the normal design process flag is updated to a value (specifically "0") indicating normal design normal processing (step 052IWS5100). On the other hand, if the stop pattern of the normal pattern is a hit pattern, the time before opening the normal electric accessary product is set to the normal pattern process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "3") indicating normal electric accessary product opening preprocessing (step 052IWS5103).

Ordinary electric accessory opening preprocessing (step 052IWS5103): The CPU 103 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the ordinary electric accessory operating time to the normal symbol process timer, and sets the timer. to start opening the variable winning ball device 6B. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "4") indicating normal electric auditors product operation processing (step 052IWS5104).

Normal electric accessary product operation processing (step 052IWS5104): The CPU 103 measures the normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, the variable winning ball device 6B is closed. Then, the value of the normal design process flag is normally updated to a value (specifically "0") indicating normal design processing (step 052IWS5100).

(Normal pattern normal processing)
FIG. 10-31 is a flow chart showing normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100). In the normal symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the number of gate passage memories is 0 by confirming the count value of the gate passage memory number counter (step 052IWS5121). If the number of gate passages stored is 0 (Y in step 052IWS5121), the process ends. If the gate passing memory number is not 0 (N of step 052IWS5121), the CPU 103 reads out the normal symbol per determination random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing memory number=1 (step 052IWS5122). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the gate passing storage number counter by 1, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 052IWS5123). That is, the random number value for determining per normal symbol stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing storage number = n-1 Store. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers for judging normal symbols stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective gate passing memory numbers are extracted is always the gate passing memory number=1, 2, 3, 4 order. are designed to match.

Next, the CPU 103 performs lottery processing based on random numbers (random number values for normal symbol hit determination) using a normal symbol determination table for determining whether or not normal symbol hits are determined, and whether or not normal symbol hits are determined. (Step 052IWS5127). In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, in step 052IWS5127, the CPU 103 uniformly determines whether the variable probability state, KT state, or high base state is 99/100. It is determined to be a normal pattern per probability.

At step 052IWS5127, if the read normal symbol winning determination random number value is within the winning range (if it is a winning), the CPU 103 sets a winning symbol as the display result (step 052IWS5128), and proceeds to step 052IWS5130. In step 052IWS5127, if the read normal symbol hit determination random number value is not within the winning range (if it is a loss), the CPU 103 sets a losing symbol as the display result (step 052IWS5129), and proceeds to step 052IWS5130.

At step 052IWS5130, if the high base flag is set, the CPU 103 sets 0.2 seconds to the normal design process timer as the normal design fluctuation time (Y at step 052IWS5130, S5131). Also, if the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 second is set in the normal design process timer as the normal design fluctuation time (N of step 052 IWS5130, S5132).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically "1") indicating normal symbol variation processing (step 052IWS5101) (step 052IWS5133).

(Normal symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-32 is a flowchart showing normal symbol stop processing (step 052IWS5102). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the normal symbol process timer (step 052IWS3701). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 052IWS3702). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N of step 052 IWS3702), the process is terminated as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time elapses (Y in step 052IWS3702), the CPU 103 determines whether the normal symbol stop symbol is a winning symbol (step 052IWS5127). (step 052IWS3703). It should be noted that whether or not the stop pattern of the normal pattern is a winning pattern can be confirmed by checking whether or not the flag is set by, for example, setting a normal pattern hitting determination flag when it is determined to be a winning at step 052IWS5127. can be done.

When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a winning symbol but a losing symbol (N in step 052IWS3703), the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value indicating normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100). Specifically, it is updated to "0") (step 052IWS3708).

At step 052IWS3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (Y at step 052IWS3703), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 052IWS3704). That is, in the case of the first KT state, 0.1 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step 052IWS3706). Also, if the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step 052IWS3705). .

Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically "3") corresponding to the normal electric accessary product release preprocessing (step 052IWS5103) (step 052IWS3707).

(Normal electric accessory opening preprocessing)
FIG. 10-33 is a flow chart showing normal electric accessory opening preprocessing (step 052IWS5103). In the normal electric accessary product opening preprocessing, the CPU 103 normally -1 the value of the symbol process timer (step 052IWS3801). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 052IWS3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N of step 052 IWS3802), the process is terminated as it is.

When the normal pattern process timer times out, that is, when the time before opening the normal electric accessory has passed (Y in step 052IWS3802), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 052IWS3803). , When it is set, that is, when it is in the 1st KT state, 5.5 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessary product opening time (step 052IWS3805). Also, if the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 052IWS3804).

In this way, in this characteristic part 052IW, 5.5 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the 1st KT state, and 0.2 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the normal state or the 2nd KT state. By doing so, the first KT state is a state in which it is easier to start and win in the second start winning port than in the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, in the first KT state, game balls are less likely to reach the special variable winning ball device 17 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B than in the normal state or the second KT state.

Incidentally, when the gaming state is the first KT state, the method of control for making it easier to start winning in the second start winning opening is not limited to the one shown in this characteristic portion 052IW. For example, in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened more times than in the normal state or the second KT state (for example, in the normal state or the second KT state, the variable winning ball device The number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 6B may be set to 2 times in the first KT state, while the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 6B is set to 1 time. By doing so, in the first KT state, by increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B is opened, it is possible to make it easier to start winning in the second starting winning hole.

Further, for example, in the case of the first KT state, compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state, the above-described control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B and the variable winning ball device 6B may be executed in combination with control for increasing the number of openings of .

Next, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B to open state (step 052IWS3806). Specifically, the solenoid 81 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 6B.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically "4") corresponding to the normal electric accessary product operation process (step 052IWS5104) (step 052IWS3807).

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 10-34 to 10-37 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S75). The production control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the production control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 052IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter and the read pointer. The case where the two match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the command reception buffer stores the reception command, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 052IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step 052IWS613). The reason for incrementing by 2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received production control command is a setting command (step 052IWS614), the production control CPU 0120 stores the setting value indicated by the received setting command in the setting value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS615). .

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 052IWS616), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS617). Then, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step 052IWS618).

If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step 052IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS620 ).

If the received effect control command is any of the design determination designation commands (first design determination designation command, second design determination designation command, first forced design determination designation command, second forced design determination designation command) (step 052IWS621 ), the effect control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 052IWS622). For example, when the first symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first confirmation command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second symbol confirmation designation command is received, the second confirmation command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the first compulsory design determination designation command is received, the first compulsory determination command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second compulsory design determination designation command is received, the second compulsory determination command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 052IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 052IWS624). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 052IWS625).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 052IWS626), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the display of the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 052IWS627). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 052IWS628).

In this example, by executing the processing of steps 052IWS624 and S627, a right-handed display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the jackpot game.

In addition, for example, by changing the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display displayed during the jackpot game, it may be configured to execute a set value suggestion effect that suggests the current set value. For example, when the right-handed display is started in step 052IWS624, the right-handed display is normally started in the display color of white. If the set value is "2", start right-handed display in green color at a relatively high rate, or start right-handed display in green color at a relatively high rate , when the setting value is "3", the yellow display color starts right-handed display at a relatively high rate, and when the setting value is "4", the orange display color is started at a relatively high rate. When the set value is "5", the display color of red is started at a relatively high rate, and when the set value is "6", the rate is relatively high. Right-handed display of rainbow display colors may be started.

Further, for example, the right-hand hitting display is configured to continue to be executed even during the KT state after the end of the big win game, and the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-hand hitting display is changed and set at the timing of the end of the big win game. It may be configured to execute a value suggesting presentation.

Further, for example, when the change display of 50 times is completed in the low probability/1st KT state and the transition to the normal state (low probability/low base state) is made, the left-handed display is started, and the left-handed display is configured. The setting value suggestion effect may be executed by changing the display mode (for example, display color) of the display. When the control of the game state is switched in some form, the setting value suggesting effect may be executed.

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step 052IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit start designation command reception flag (step 052IWS630).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step 052IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit end designation command reception flag (step 052IWS632).

If the received effect control command is a display command during the opening of the big winning hole (step 052IWS633), the effect control CPU 120 determines the winning number for counting the number of game balls that have won the big winning hole during the round of the big win game. The counter value is reset (cleared to 0) (step 052IWS634). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a large winning opening open flag that designates that the large winning opening is being opened (in the round period during the big winning game) (step 052IWS635).

In this example, by executing the process of step 052IWS634, the value of the winning number counter is cleared to 0 at the timing of receiving the large winning opening open display command (the timing of starting the round), so it is extremely rare. Also when over winning is detected during the interval period after the end of the round period, the value is counted in the winning number counter.

If the received effect control command is a display command after the opening of the large winning opening (step 052IWS636), the effect control CPU 120 sets a flag after opening the large winning opening that specifies that it is the interval period after opening the large winning opening. (step 052IWS637).

If the received production control command is a right-handed lighting start designation command (step 052IWS638), the production control CPU 120 performs control to start lighting of the right-handed informing LED 37 (step 052IWS639).

If the received production control command is a right-handed lighting end designation command (step 052IWS640), the production control CPU 120 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed informing LED 37 (step 052IWS641).

If the received effect control command is a low-probability/non-KT background designation command (step 052IWS642), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image in the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the low-probability/non-KT state (for example, A blue background image) is controlled (step 052IWS643). Also, if the effect control CPU 120 is set, it resets the first KT state flag indicating the first KT state (step 052IWS644). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 counts the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the big winning opening and the special winning opening during the jackpot game and the high probability/second KT state. If the ball number counter is set, the value of the prize ball number counter is reset (cleared to 0) (step 052IWS645).

In this example, during the jackpot game (except during the jackpot game based on the 2R variable probability jackpot and the 2R normal jackpot), the game ball enters the big win port, or the game ball enters the special win port during the high probability/second KT state. When a ball wins, the value of the winning ball counter is cumulatively updated (see steps 052IWS660 and S667), but by executing the process of step 052IWS645, the gaming state is low probability/ The value of the prize ball number counter is cleared to 0 when the low probability/low base state is reached after 50 fluctuation displays are completed after the high base state (low probability/1st KT state).

If the received effect control command is a low probability/first KT background designation command (step 052IWS646), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image in the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the low probability/first KT state (for example, A green background image) is controlled (step 052IWS647). In addition, the effect control CPU120 sets the first KT state flag (step 052IWS648), and if it is set, a high probability state flag indicating a high probability state and a second KT state flag indicating a second KT state. Reset the 2KT status flag (step 052IWS649).

If the received effect control command is a high probability/first KT background designation command (step 052 IWS 650), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image in the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the high probability/first KT state (for example, A yellow background image) is displayed (step 052 IWS 651). Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 052IWS652), and if set, resets the second KT state flag (step 052IWS653).

If the received effect control command is a high probability/second KT background designation command (step 052IWS654), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image in the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the high probability/second KT state (for example, A red background image) is controlled (step 052 IWS 655). Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 052IWS656), and if set, resets the first KT state flag (step 052IWS657).

If the received effect control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 052IWS658), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a big win game based on the 10R probability variable big hit, the 6R probability variable big win, or the 6R normal big win is in progress. (step 052IWS659). Whether or not the jackpot game based on the 10R probability variable jackpot, the 6R probability variable jackpot, or the 6R normal jackpot is in progress can be determined, for example, if the value of the production control process flag is during the jackpot production process (step S176) to the ending production process (step S177). ) and confirms whether the display result designation commands stored in the display result designation command storage area are display result 2 designation commands to display result 4 designation commands. can be determined by

During the jackpot game based on the 10R variable probability jackpot, the 6R probability variable jackpot, or the 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 adds 15 to the value of the winning ball counter (step 052IWS660). Also, the effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the number of prize balls displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the counter for the number of prize balls after addition (step 052IWS661). The display of the number of prize balls is a display of the accumulated number of the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the big winning opening and the special winning opening during the jackpot game and the high probability/second KT state.

By executing the processing of steps 052 IWS658 to S661, in this example, a prize ball is entered into a big winning opening during a big winning game based on a 10R variable probability big win, a 6R probability variable big win, or a 6R normal big win. The value of the number counter and the ball number display are updated. On the other hand, even during the jackpot game, if a prize is won in the jackpot during the jackpot game based on the 2R probability variable jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot, the value of the prize ball number counter is not updated, and the prize ball counter is not updated. The number display is also not updated.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes an over winning suggestive effect process for determining and executing an over winning suggestive effect (step 052IWS662). Note that the "over-winning effect suggesting effect" is an effect that is executed at the timing when an over-winning to the big winning hole occurs, and suggests the currently set set value.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a number-of-balls display suggestion effect process for determining and executing a number-of-balls display suggestion effect (step 052IWS663). In addition, the "suggestion of the number of prize balls display" is based on the number of prize balls paid out based on winning the big prize opening or special prize opening during the jackpot game or high probability / 2nd KT state. This effect is executed when the number (in this example, 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, 2666) is reached, suggesting the currently set value.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes prize ball number emphasizing effect processing for determining and executing the prize ball number emphasizing effect (step 052IWS664). In addition, the "prize number emphasizing effect" is based on the fact that the number of prize balls paid out based on winning a big prize opening or special prize opening during a big win game or a high probability / 2nd KT state is a predetermined number. (In this example, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000 and 5000) is emphasized.

If the received effect control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 052IWS665), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS666). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, during the high probability/second KT state), the effect control CPU 120 adds 10 to the value of the number-of-balls counter (step 052IWS667). Also, the effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the number of prize balls displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the counter for the number of prize balls after addition (step 052IWS668).

By executing the processing of steps 052 IWS665 to S668, in this example, the value of the prize ball number counter and the prize balls are generated based on the occurrence of a small hit in the high probability/second KT state and the prize winning to the special prize opening. Number display is updated. On the other hand, even in the KT state, if a special winning prize occurs during the high probability/1st KT state or low probability/1st KT state, the value of the winning balls counter is not updated. The display of the number of prize balls is also not updated (however, the value of the counter of the number of prize balls is not updated, and the value of the counter of the number of prize balls is not reset).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a small-hit winning suggestion performance process for determining and executing a small-hit winning suggestion performance (step 052IWS669). It should be noted that the "suggestion effect at the time of winning a small prize" is executed at the timing when a small win occurs during the high probability / 2nd KT state and a special prize winning opening occurs, and is a production that suggests the currently set setting value. .

Next, the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step 052IWS663, and executes the number-of-balls display suggestion effect process (step 052IWS663). Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize number emphasizing effect process (step 052IWS664).

If the received production control command is another command, the production control CPU 120 stores the received production control command and executes processing for setting a flag corresponding to the received production control command (step 052 IWS 670 ). Then, the process proceeds to step 052 IWS611.

(Suggestion effect processing at the time of over winning)
FIG. 10-38 is a flow chart showing the over winning suggestive effect process (step 052IWS662). In the over winning suggestive effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first adds 1 to the value of the winning number counter (step 052IWS301). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the winning prize number counter after addition is 11 or more (step 052IWS302). If the value of the number-of-wins counter is 11 or more (that is, if over-winning to the big-winning opening has occurred), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence and type of over-winning suggestive effect. Lottery processing based on random numbers is performed using the over-winning suggestive effect determination table (step 052 IWS 303) to determine the presence or absence of over-winning suggestive effect and the type thereof.

FIG. 10-39 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the over-winning suggestive effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-39, in the table for determining over winning suggestive effects, there are no over winning suggesting effect, over winning suggesting effect A, over winning suggesting effect B, over winning suggesting effect C, and over winning suggesting effect C. A judgment value is assigned to each of the suggesting effect D, the suggesting effect E at the time of over winning, and the suggesting effect F at the time of over winning.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, in this example, when a game ball wins in the big winning hole, the winning display (in this example, "+15 ”) is displayed, and the normal winning sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-39, when the "over winning indication effect A" is executed, the winning indication is displayed in blue color on the image display device 5, and the speaker 8L is displayed. , 8R output a winning sound of sound A which is different from the normal sound. Further, when the "over winning indication effect B" is executed, the winning indication is displayed in green color on the image display device 5, and the winning of the sound B different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound is output. Further, when the "over winning indication effect C" is executed, the winning indication is displayed in yellow display color on the image display device 5, and the winning of the sound C different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound is output. In addition, when the "over winning indication effect D" is executed, the winning display is displayed in orange on the image display device 5, and the winning of the sound D different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound is output. In addition, when the "over winning indication effect E" is executed, the winning indication is displayed in red color on the image display device 5, and the winning of the sound E different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound is output. In addition, when the "over winning indication effect F" is executed, the winning indication is displayed in rainbow display colors on the image display device 5, and a sound F different from the normal sound is produced from the speakers 8L and 8R. Winning sound is output.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, in the over winning suggestive effect determination table, different determination values are assigned according to which of the set values "1" to "6" the current set value is. At step 052IWS303, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the stored contents of the setting value storage area (see step 052IWS615) and specifies the current setting value. Then, based on the determination value corresponding to the specified setting value, the presence or absence and type of the suggestive effect at the time of over winning is determined.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, in this example, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect A is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "2", the ratio of execution of the over-winning suggestive effect B is determined to be relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "3", the ratio of execution of the over-winning suggestion effect C to be determined is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "4", the ratio of execution of the over-winning suggesting effect D is relatively high. Further, in the present example, when the set value is "5", the ratio of execution of the over winning indication effect E to be executed is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "6", the ratio of execution of the over-winning suggestion effect F to be determined is relatively high.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-39, in this example, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determining the execution of the over winning suggestive effect, which is the sum of the over winning suggestive effects A to F, is 10% + 8% + 7% + 5% + 5% + 5% = 40%, 45% when the set value is "2", 50% when the set value is "3", and the set value If it is "4", it is 55%, if it is a set value of "5", it is 60%, and if it is a set value of "6", it is 65%. Thus, in this example, since the over winning occurs relatively rarely, the ratio of determining the execution of the over winning suggesting effect is relatively high compared to the small winning suggesting effect described later. there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not execution of the suggestive effect at the time of over winning has been determined in step 052IWS303 (step 052IWS304). If execution of the over-winning suggesting effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display a winning display corresponding to the determined over-winning suggesting effect (step 052 IWS 305). . For example, if it is determined to execute the over-winning indication effect A, the image display device 5 is controlled to display the winning indication in a blue display color. Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to output a prize winning sound corresponding to the determined type of suggestive effect at the time of over winning from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 052IWS306). For example, if it is decided to execute the over-winning suggestion effect A, control is performed to output the winning sound of the sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, when the value of the winning number counter is 10 or less (N of step 052 IWS302), or when it is determined that there is no suggestive effect at the time of over winning (N of step 052 IWS304), the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 In step 052, control is performed to display the winning display in the normal display color (white in this example) (step 052IWS307). Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs control for outputting the normal winning prize sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 052IWS308).

(Suggestion effect processing at the time of small hit winning)
FIG. 10-40 is a flow chart showing the hint effect process (step 052IWS669) at the time of winning a small prize. In the small-hit winning suggestion performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first performs lottery processing based on random numbers using a small-hit winning suggestion performance determination table for determining the presence or absence and type of the small-hit winning suggestion performance. Then, the presence or absence and type of suggestive effect at the time of winning a small prize are determined (step 052IWS321).

FIG. 10-41 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the small winning suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-41, in the small winning prize suggesting effect determination table, there are no suggesting effect when winning a small win, suggesting effect A when winning a small win, suggesting effect B when winning a small win, suggesting effect when winning a small win. Determination values are assigned to C, suggestion performance D at the time of winning a small prize, suggestion performance E at the time of winning a small prize, and suggestion performance F at the time of winning a small prize.

As shown in FIG. 10-41, in this example, when a game ball wins in the special winning hole, the winning display (in this example, "+10 ”) is displayed, and the normal winning sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-41, when the "suggestion effect at the time of winning a small prize A" is executed, the winning display is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and the speaker A winning sound of sound A different from the normal sound is output from 8L and 8R. In addition, when the ``suggestion effect B at the time of winning a small prize'' is executed, the winning display is displayed in a green display color on the image display device 5, and a sound B different from the normal sound is produced from the speakers 8L and 8R. Winning sound is output. In addition, when the "minor winning prize indication effect C" is executed, the winning display is displayed in yellow display color on the image display device 5, and the sound C different from the normal sound is produced from the speakers 8L and 8R. Winning sound is output. In addition, when the ``small winning winning suggestion effect D'' is executed, the winning display is displayed in orange on the image display device 5, and the sound D different from the normal sound is produced from the speakers 8L and 8R. Winning sound is output. In addition, when the "minor winning winning indication effect E" is executed, the winning indication is displayed in red color on the image display device 5, and a sound E different from the normal sound is produced from the speakers 8L and 8R. Winning sound is output. In addition, when the "minor winning winning indication effect F" is executed, the winning display is displayed in rainbow display colors on the image display device 5, and a sound F different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Winning sound is output.

As shown in FIG. 10-41, in the small winning prize suggesting effect determination table, different determination values are assigned according to which of the set values "1" to "6" the current set value is. . At step 052IWS321, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the stored contents of the setting value storage area (see step 052IWS615) and identifies the current setting value. Then, based on the determination value corresponding to the specified setting value, the presence or absence and type of suggestive effect at the time of winning a small prize are determined.

As shown in FIG. 10-41, in this example, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect A at the time of winning a small prize is relatively high. In addition, in this example, when the set value is "2", the ratio of execution of the suggestion effect B at the time of winning a small prize is determined is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "3", the ratio of execution of the hint effect C at the time of winning a small prize is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "4", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect D at the time of winning a small prize is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "5", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect E at the time of winning a small prize is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "6", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect F at the time of winning a small prize is relatively high.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-41, in this example, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggested effect at the time of winning a small hit by totaling the suggested effects A to F at the time of winning a small win is 2% + 1% + 1% + 1% = 5%, 6% when the setting value is "2", 7% when the setting value is "3", and the setting value is "4 , 9% if the set value is "5", and 10% if the set value is "6". Thus, in this example, compared with the above-described over winning suggesting effect, the ratio of determining the execution of the small winning suggesting effect is relatively low.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not execution of the suggestion effect at the time of winning a small prize is determined in step 052IWS321 (step 052IWS322). If the execution of the suggestion effect at the time of winning a small prize is determined, the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display a winning display corresponding to the type of the suggested effect at the time of winning a small prize determined (step 052IWS323). For example, if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect A at the time of winning a small prize, the image display device 5 is controlled to display the winning display in a blue display color. Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs control for outputting a winning sound corresponding to the type of the determined small win winning suggestion effect from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 052IWS324). For example, if it is decided to execute the suggestive effect A at the time of winning a small prize, control is performed to output the winning sound of the sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no suggestive effect at the time of winning a small prize (N in step 052 IWS322), the effect control CPU 120 displays the winning display in the normal display color (white in this example) on the image display device 5. control is performed (step 052IWS325). Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs control for outputting the normal winning prize sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 052IWS326).

It should be noted that the reliability of setting value suggestion may be different between the case of executing the over winning suggestion performance and the case of executing the small winning prize suggestion performance. For example, the suggestive effect F at the time of over winning can be executed at any of the set values ``1'' to ``6'', but is executed at a relatively high rate when the set value is ``6'', whereas it is executed at a relatively high rate. It may be configured such that the setting value "6" is determined when the prize-winning suggestive effect F is executed. Conversely, for example, the suggestive effect F at the time of winning a small prize can be executed at any of the set values "1" to "6", but is executed at a relatively high rate when the set value is "6". On the other hand, the set value may be determined to be "6" if the over-winning-time suggestion effect F is executed.

In addition, in this example, in the over winning indication effect and the small winning indication indication effect, the display mode (in this example, the display color) of the winning indication is made different from normal, and a winning sound different from normal is output. Although a case of executing according to a mode is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, by making only one of the display mode (in this example, the display color) of the winning display and the winning sound different from the normal mode, a suggestive effect at the time of over winning or a suggestive effect at the time of small winning is executed. It may be configured as In addition, for example, by displaying an effect display or changing the display color of the lamp or LED at the timing of the occurrence of over winning or the occurrence of winning to a special winning opening, a suggestive effect at the time of over winning or a small winning It may be configured to execute a time-suggesting effect.

(Suggestion effect processing for displaying the number of prize balls)
FIG. 10-42 is a flow chart showing the number-of-balls display suggestion effect process (step 052IWS663). In the prize ball number display suggestion effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 456 first (step 052IWS341). In this example, if a game ball enters the big winning hole during a big win game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15. If the value of the winning ball number counter is 465, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the winning ball number counter has reached 456 first.

If the value of the number-of-balls counter reaches 456 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "4" (step 052IWS342). Whether or not the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "4" can be specifically determined by confirming the contents stored in the set value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "4", the effect control CPU 120 draws lots based on random numbers using a number-of-balls display suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence or absence of the number-of-balls display suggestion effect. Processing is carried out, and the presence or absence of the effect A indicating the number of prize balls is determined (step 052IWS343). Then, the process proceeds to step 052 IWS359.

FIG. 10-43 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the number-of-balls display suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the number-of-balls display suggestion effect A is executed, the character display such as "456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is It is suggested that the set value is greater than or equal to "4". As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, execution of the number-of-balls display suggestion effect A is determined with a probability of 3%. In this example, since the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed only when the set value is equal to or greater than the set value "4", if the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed, at least the set value "4" is executed. "It will be determined that it is more than that.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 456 first (N in step 052 IWS341), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the value of the prize ball counter reaches 555 first ( step 052 IWS 344). In this example, if a game ball enters the big winning hole during the big win game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15. If the value of the winning ball number counter is 555, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the winning ball number counter has reached 555 first.

If the value of the number-of-balls counter reaches 555 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "5" (step 052IWS345). Whether or not the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "5" can be specifically determined by confirming the contents stored in the set value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "5", the effect control CPU 120 uses the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table to perform lottery processing based on random numbers, and whether or not the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is present. is determined (step 052 IWS 346). Then, the process proceeds to step 052 IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the number-of-balls display suggestive effect B is executed, the character display such as "555 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is It is suggested that the set value is greater than or equal to "5". As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, execution of the number-of-balls display suggesting effect B is determined with a probability of 2%. In this example, since the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed only when the set value is equal to or greater than the set value "5", if the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed, at least the set value "5" "It will be determined that it is more than that.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 555 first (N in step 052 IWS344), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the value of the prize ball counter reaches 666 first ( step 052 IWS 347). In this example, if a game ball enters the big winning hole during a big win game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15. If the value of the winning ball number counter is 675, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the winning ball number counter has reached 666 first.

If the value of the number-of-balls counter reaches 666 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "6" (step 052IWS348). Whether or not the current setting value is "6" can be specifically determined by confirming the contents stored in the setting value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is set value "6", the effect control CPU 120 performs lottery processing based on random numbers using the number-of-balls display suggestion effect determination table, and determines the presence or absence of the number-of-balls display suggestion effect C. Determine (step 052IWS349). Then, the process proceeds to step 052 IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the number-of-balls display suggesting effect C is executed, the character display such as "666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is A setting of "6" is suggested. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, execution of the number-of-balls-display suggestion effect C is determined with a probability of 1%. In this example, since the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed only when the set value is "6", if the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed, the set value is "6". One thing is certain.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 666 first (N in step 052 IWS347), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2456 first ( step 052 IWS 350). In this example, 15 prize balls are obtained if game balls enter the big prize opening during the big win game, and 10 prize balls are obtained if the game balls enter the special prize opening during the high probability/second KT state. is obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is incremented by 15 or 10, so in step 052IWS350, the effect control CPU 120 determines that if the value of the prize ball counter is 2460 or 2465, the prize ball Determine that the value of the number counter reaches 2456 first.

If the value of the number-of-balls counter reaches 2456 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "4" (step 052IWS351). Whether or not the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "4" can be specifically determined by confirming the contents stored in the set value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "4", the effect control CPU 120 uses the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table to perform a lottery process based on random numbers, and determines the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect D. is determined (step 052IWS352). Then, the process proceeds to step 052 IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the number-of-balls display suggestive effect D is executed, the character display such as "2456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is It is suggested that the set value is greater than or equal to "4". As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, execution of the number-of-balls display suggestion effect D is determined with a probability of 5%. In this example, the number-of-balls display suggestion effect D is executed only when the set value is equal to or greater than the set value "4". It is determined that the above is the case.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2456 first (N in step 052 IWS350), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2555 first ( step 052 IWS 353). In this example, 15 prize balls are obtained if game balls enter the big prize opening during the big win game, and 10 prize balls are obtained if the game balls enter the special prize opening during the high probability/second KT state. is obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is incremented by 15 or 10, so in step 052IWS353, the effect control CPU 120 determines that if the value of the prize ball counter is 2555 or 2560, the prize ball Determine that the value of the number counter reaches 2555 first.

If the value of the number-of-balls counter reaches 2555 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "5" (step 052IWS354). Whether or not the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "5" can be specifically determined by confirming the contents stored in the set value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "5", the effect control CPU 120 uses the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table to perform a lottery process based on random numbers, and determines the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect E. is determined (step 052IWS355). Then, the process proceeds to step 052 IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the number-of-balls display suggestion effect E is executed, the character display such as "2555 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is It is suggested that the set value is greater than or equal to "5". As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, execution of the number-of-balls display suggestion effect E is determined with a probability of 3%. In this example, since the performance E suggesting the display of the number of prize balls is executed only when the set value is equal to or greater than the set value "5", if the performance E suggesting the display of the number of prize balls is executed, the set value "5" will be displayed. It is determined that the above is the case.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2555 first (N in step 052 IWS353), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2666 first ( step 052 IWS 356). In this example, 15 prize balls are obtained if game balls enter the big prize opening during the big win game, and 10 prize balls are obtained if the game balls enter the special prize opening during the high probability/second KT state. is obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is incremented by 15 or 10. Therefore, at step 052IWS356, the effect control CPU 120 determines that if the value of the prize ball counter is 2670 or 2675, the prize ball Determine that the value of the number counter reaches 2666 first.

If the value of the number-of-balls counter reaches 2666 first, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the current set value is "6" (step 052IWS357). Whether or not the current setting value is "6" can be specifically determined by confirming the contents stored in the setting value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is set value "6", the effect control CPU 120 performs lottery processing based on random numbers using the number-of-balls display suggestion effect determination table, and determines the presence or absence of the number-of-balls display suggestion effect F. Determine (step 052 IWS 358). Then, the process proceeds to step 052 IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the number-of-balls display suggestive effect F is executed, the character display such as "2666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is A setting of "6" is suggested. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, execution of the number-of-balls display suggestion effect F is determined with a probability of 2%. In this example, the number-of-balls display suggestion effect F is executed only when the set value is "6". One thing is certain.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not execution of the award number display suggestion effect is determined in steps 052IWS343, S346, S349, S352, S355 and S358 (step 052IWS359). If execution of the number-of-balls display suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to execute the determined type of number-of-balls display suggestion effect in the image display device 5 (step 052IWS360). For example, if it is decided to execute the number-of-balls display suggestion effect A, the image display device 5 is controlled to display characters such as "456 OVER".

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-43, when viewed from the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to C executed during the period of the big win game, the period of the big win game becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases. As the number of winning balls is displayed, the probability of execution of the effect indicating the number of prize balls decreases to 3%, 2%, and 1%. 6” The accuracy of confirmation and setpoint suggestion is increased. Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-43, when viewed from the number of prize ball display suggestion effects D to F executed during the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH), during the small hit RUSH As the period becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases, the execution probability of the number of prize ball display suggestion effect decreases to 5%, 3%, and 2%, while the set value "4" or more is confirmed, and the set value The accuracy of "5" or more confirmation, setting value "6" confirmation and setting value suggestion has increased.

It should be noted that not only the mode shown in this example, but also the execution probability of the number-of-balls display suggesting effect increases as the period during the big-win game or the period during the small-win RUSH increases and the number of prize balls increases. It can be configured as follows. Further, for example, as the period during the big win game or the period during the small win RUSH becomes longer and the number of winning balls increases, the accuracy of suggesting the setting value may be lowered.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-43, the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to C executed during the period of the big win game and the prize ball number display suggestion executed during the period of the small win RUSH Although the execution probabilities of the number-of-balls display suggestive effect are different for the effects D to F, the game is not limited to such a mode, and is configured to execute the number-of-balls display-suggestive effect with the same execution probability. may

(Number of prize balls emphasizing effect processing)
FIG. 10-44 is a flow chart showing the prize number emphasizing effect process (step 052IWS664). In the prize ball number emphasizing effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter reaches the threshold value for each 1000 (in this example, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000 and 5000). is confirmed (step 052IWS371). In this example, if a game ball enters the big winning hole during a big win game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15. For example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 1000 or 1005, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 1000 first. Also, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 2000 or 2005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2000 first. Also, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 3000 or 3005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 3000 first. Also, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 4000 or 4005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 4000 first. Also, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 5000 or 5005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 5000 first.

If the value of the number-of-balls counter first reaches the threshold for each 1,000, the effect control CPU 120 uses a number-of-balls-number-emphasizing effect determination table for determining whether or not to emphasize the number-of-balls-winning effect, and generates a random number. A lottery process based on the above is performed, and the presence or absence of the number-of-balls emphasizing effect is determined (step 052IWS372).

FIG. 10-45 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the number-of-balls emphasis effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-45, in this example, when the value of the number-of-balls counter reaches 1000, execution of the number-of-balls emphasizing effect A is determined with a probability of 50%. When the prize number emphasizing effect A is executed, the character display such as "1000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. - 特許庁Further, in this example, when the value of the number-of-balls counter reaches 2000, execution of the number-of-balls emphasizing effect B is determined with a probability of 60%. When the number-of-balls emphasizing effect B is executed, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "2000 OVER". Further, in this example, when the value of the number-of-balls counter reaches 3000, execution of the number-of-balls emphasizing effect C is determined with a probability of 70%. When the number-of-balls emphasizing effect C is executed, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "3000 OVER". Further, in this example, when the value of the number-of-balls counter reaches 4000, execution of the number-of-balls emphasizing effect D is determined with a probability of 80%. When the prize number emphasizing effect D is executed, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as "4000 OVER". Further, in this example, when the value of the number-of-balls counter reaches 5000, execution of the number-of-balls emphasizing effect E is determined with a probability of 90%. When the number-of-balls emphasizing effect E is executed, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "5000 OVER".

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not execution of the prize number emphasizing effect has been determined in step 052IWS372 (step 052IWS373). If execution of the number-of-balls emphasizing effect has been determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to execute the number-of-balls emphasizing effect of the determined type (step 052IWS374). For example, if execution of the number-of-balls emphasizing effect A is determined, the image display device 5 is controlled to display characters such as "1000 OVER".

In addition, in this example, when the number of prize balls reaches 1,000, 2,000, 3,000, 4,000, and 5,000, a case is shown in which the number of prize balls emphasizing effect can be executed. It is not limited to modes. For example, it is possible to execute the prize number emphasizing effect when the number of prize balls reaches 1,000, 2,000, and 3,000, not necessarily in all cases. may be configured. Further, for example, even when the number of prize balls reaches 6000 or 7000, the number-of-prize-balls emphasizing effect may be executed, and various modes are conceivable.

As shown in FIGS. 10-44 and 10-45, the number-of-balls emphasizing effect is irrelevant to the current set value, unlike the number-of-balls display suggesting effect shown in FIGS. 10-42 and 10-43. It is a production that is determined and executed. It should be noted that, without being limited to such a mode, for example, by changing the display mode of the number-of-balls emphasizing effect, the number-of-balls-number-emphasizing effect may be executed in a mode that suggests the current set value. For example, by displaying characters such as "1000 OVER" and "2000 OVER" in a display color different from usual, the current set value may be suggested.

(variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 10-46 is a flow chart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not a variation pattern command is received (step 052IWS811). Whether or not the variation pattern command is received is determined by, for example, setting a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that the variation pattern command has been received when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis process (step S75). Then, at step 052 IWS 811, it is checked whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set.

If the variation pattern command is received, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS812). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the non-KT state), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is time to execute the variable display of the first special symbol. is confirmed (step 052IWS813). Whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is, for example, whether the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the first variation pattern #01 to #09. It can be determined by checking whether If the variable display of the first special symbol is not to be executed (that is, if the variable display of the second special symbol is to be executed), the process is terminated as it is. If the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 052IWS815).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if the KT state), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is time to execute the variable display of the second special symbol. (Step 052 IWS 814). It should be noted that whether or not to execute the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command designates the second variation pattern #01 to #34 It can be determined by checking whether If the variable display of the second special symbol is not to be executed (that is, if the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed), the process is terminated as it is. If the variable display of the second special symbol is to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 052IWS815).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS812 to S815, in this characteristic part 052IW, when the non-KT state, the variable display of the decoration design is performed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the first special design. When it is executed and in the KT state, the variable display of the decorative design is executed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the second special design. In other words, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, if the KT state, or even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if the non-KT state. , The variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 10-47 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed (step 052IWS920). It should be noted that whether or not it is a case of executing the variation display of the first special symbol, for example, the variation pattern command stored in the variation pattern command storage area designates the first variation pattern #01 to #09. It can be determined by confirming whether or not there is. In the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display of this time is for a small hit (step 052IWS921). It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of this time is a small win is determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is a display result 7 designation command. can be determined by If it is a small hit variation, the effect control CPU 120 determines a non-reach losing symbol as a stop symbol of the decoration symbol (step 052IWS922).

As already explained, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small win is achieved, there is only a case where the small win A is achieved, and the game ball is moved to the special winning opening during the small win game. can hardly be expected to win the prize. Therefore, by executing the processing of steps 052 IWS920 to S922, in this example, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed and becomes a small hit, the non-reach losing symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. This prevents the player from having excessive expectations.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol (N of step 052IWS920) or when it is not a small hit variation (N of step 052IWS921), the effect control CPU 120 is the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the result of the variation display. is determined (step 052IWS923). At step 052 IWS 923, when the display result 1 designation command is received (when it is determined to be lost), the effect control CPU 120 has only the left, middle, right decorative patterns that are completely unmatched, or only the left and right decorative patterns. A combination of matching reach-losing symbols is determined. When a display result 2 designating command is received (when a 10R probability variable big hit is determined), a combination of patterns in which left, middle and right decoration patterns are odd number patterns and are aligned with the pattern '7' is determined. When a display result 3 designating command is received (when 6R probability variable big hit is determined), a combination of patterns in which left, middle and right decoration patterns are odd number patterns other than "7" is determined. In addition, when the display result 5 designation command is received (when the 2R probability variable jackpot is determined), the combination of patterns including the special pattern (in this example, the pattern "R") is determined. . In addition, when a display result 4 designation command or a display result 6 designation command is received (when a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot is determined), a pattern combination in which left, middle, and right decorative patterns are even-numbered patterns. to decide. Also, when the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined as a small hit), a combination of decoration designs of a small hit design (for example, "135") is determined.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the change display of this time is a loss (step 052IWS924). It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of this time is a failure can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 1 designation command. can be determined by If it is not an outlier change, the process proceeds directly to step 052IWS928. If it is a deviation change (Y in step 052IWS924), the effect control CPU 120 executes a setting value suggesting effect setting process for determining the presence or absence and type of a set value suggesting effect suggesting the currently set value. (Step 052 IWS 925).

At step 052IWS925, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the setting value stored in the setting value storage area (see step 052IWS615). Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs lottery processing based on random numbers using a table corresponding to the specified setting value as a setting value suggesting effect determination table for determining the presence or absence and type of the setting value suggesting effect, and sets. Determines the presence and type of value suggestive rendering.

FIG. 10-48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the setting value suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-48, in the setting value suggesting effect determination table, there are set value suggesting effect none, set value suggesting effect A, set value suggesting effect B, setting value suggesting effect C, setting value suggesting effect D, set value Judgment values are assigned to the suggestive effect E and the set value suggestive effect F, respectively.

The setting value suggesting effect A is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a blue display color on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. Highest execution rate in some cases. Further, the setting value suggesting effect B is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a green display color on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. , the execution ratio is the highest. Further, the set value suggesting effect C is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a yellow display color on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. , the execution ratio is the highest. Also, the set value suggesting effect D is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in an orange display color on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. , the execution ratio is the highest. Also, the set value suggesting effect E is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a red display color on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. , the execution ratio is the highest. Further, the setting value suggesting effect F is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a rainbow display color on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 6” has the highest execution ratio.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS926). If the 2KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the 2KT state), the process proceeds directly to step 052IWS928. If the second KT state flag is set (Y of step 052IWS926), that is, if it is the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 is a small hit RUSH suggesting that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) continues. A small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence and type of continuation suggestion effect is executed (step 052IWS927).

FIG. 10-49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-49, in the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table, there is no small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B are determined respectively. value is assigned. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined effect image in a blue display color on the image display device 5 . Further, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined effect image in a red display color on the image display device 5 .

As shown in FIG. 10-49, in this example, the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest when the setting value is "1", and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect when the setting value is "2" When the execution ratio is the next highest, and the set value is "3", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance is the next highest, and when the set value is "4", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance. is the next highest, the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance is the next highest when the set value is “5”, and the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance is the highest when the set value is “6”. getting low.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-49, the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest when the setting value is "1", and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B when the setting value is "6". has the highest execution ratio.

In this example, when the set value is "1", the probability of the big win is lowest, and when the set value is "6", the probability of the big win is the highest. Since the second KT state may end as a trigger, the setting value "1" is the setting state in which the second KT state is most likely to continue (the degree of expectation for continuation is high), and the setting value "6" It can be said that the setting state in which the second KT state is most difficult to continue (the degree of expectation for continuation is low) is the case where there is. Therefore, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the set value is "6", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the lowest. Therefore, by executing the small winning RUSH continuation suggestion performance, it is possible to heighten expectations for the continuation of the second KT state (small winning RUSH).

As described above, the degree of expectation for continuation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is the degree of expectation that the control period to the second KT state will become longer without the occurrence of a big win.

Further, in this example, since the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest when the set value is "1", especially by executing the small win RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, It is possible to further increase expectations for the continuation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH).

Next, the effect control CPU 120, based on the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command, when determining the variation pattern of the decorative pattern to be used, and the execution of the set value suggestion effect and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect , selects the process table corresponding to the setting value suggestion effect or the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect (step 052IWS928).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process timer set value of the process data 1 in the process table selected at step 052IWS928 to the process timer and starts the process timer (step 052IWS929). Next, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L, 8R) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 052 IWS 930). For example, a control signal (display control execution data) is output to the VDP in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . In addition, it outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the LED control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

If it is decided to execute the setting value suggesting effect, step 052 IWS 930 and the effect processing during variable display (step S 172) are executed according to the process table including the set value suggesting effect selected in step 052 IWS 928. The setting value suggesting effect is executed while the pattern is being displayed in a variable manner (during the deviation variation).

In addition, when execution of small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production is decided, according to the process table which includes the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production which is selected with step 052IWS928 step 052IWS930 and production processing during variable display (step S172) is executed. By doing so, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance is executed during the variable display of the decoration pattern (during the deviation variation during the second KT state).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time to the decoration design variation time timer and starts the decoration design variation time timer (step 052IWS931). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 052IWS932).

(Effect processing during variable display)
FIG. 10-50 is a flow chart showing the effect process during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 052IWS8101), and subtracts 1 from the value of the decorative design fluctuation time timer (step 052IWS8102). When the process timer times out (step 052IWS8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step 052IWS8104). Also, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data which are set next (step 052IWS8105).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS8106). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the non-KT state), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has received the first symbol confirmation designation command (for example, the 1 confirmation command reception flag is set) (step 052 IWS8107). If the first symbol determination designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8110).

If the first symbol confirmation designation command is not received, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is received (for example, whether or not the first forced confirmation command reception flag is set). is confirmed (step 052IWS8108). If the first compulsory design determination designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs processing to replace the stop design of the decorative design determined in step 052IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with the lost design (step 052IWS8109). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8110).

If the 1st KT state flag or the 2nd KT state flag is set in step 052 IWS8106 (that is, if it is in the KT state), the effect control CPU 120 receives the second symbol confirmation designation command (for example, the 2 confirms whether or not the definite command reception flag is set (step 052IWS8111). If the second symbol determination designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8114).

If the second symbol confirmation designation command is not received, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received (for example, whether or not the second forced confirmation command reception flag is set). is confirmed (step 052IWS8112). If the second compulsory design determination designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs processing to replace the stop design of the decorative design determined in step 052IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with the lost design (step 052IWS8113). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8114).

When the first compulsory design determination designation command is not received at step 052IWS8108, or when the second compulsory design determination designation command is not received at step 052IWS8112, the effect control CPU 120 is a decoration design fluctuation time timer. has timed out (step 052IWS8115). If the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 120 switches to process data for standby effect (step 052IWS8116). Then, the effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 052IWS8117).

In this example, as already explained, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit, and when the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a loss, a small hit, or a probability variable big hit, is being executed. During the small winning game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Further, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit, and when the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a loss, a small hit, or a probability variable big hit, is being executed, during the small winning game. , the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. The fact that the decorative design variable time timer timed out in step 052IWS8115 without receiving any of the design determination designation commands means that the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted in this way, and the first This is the case where the variable display of the special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed. In this case, in this example, by executing the processing of steps 052 IWS8116 and S8117, the effect is switched to the standby effect, and then the updating of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is resumed, and finally one special The standby effect is continued until the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol ends. Note that the "standby effect" is, for example, a temporary stop state effect in which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns on the image display device 5 are shaken or slightly fluctuated.

It should be noted that, for example, in the image display device 5, for example, when the variable display of the system small pattern and the fourth pattern is also executed, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the first special When the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is continuously performed, the variable display of these system small symbols and the fourth symbol is also continuously performed. Then, when the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is restarted and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finally stopped and displayed, these system small symbols and the fourth symbol are displayed. The variable display is also stopped.

(Waiting process per special figure)
Figures 10-51 and 10-52 are flowcharts showing the special figure per waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process. In the special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the big hit symbol is being displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 052IWS9701). . If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step 052 IWS9706. In this characterizing portion 052IW, when a jackpot symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol, a stop symbol display flag 1 is set at step 052IWS9705. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the performance during the big win is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot symbols have been confirmed and displayed, but the effect during the jackpot has not yet been executed. Without executing, go to step 052 IWS9706.

If the stop design display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop design display flag 2 indicating that the small winning design is displayed as the stop design of the decoration design is set. (Step 052 IWS9702). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step 052IWS9717. In this characterizing part 052IW, when a small winning design is displayed as a stop design of the decoration design, a stop design display flag 2 is set at step 052IWS9716. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when executing the effect during the small winning. Therefore, the fact that the stop design display flag 2 is set means that the small winning design has been confirmed and displayed, but since the small winning medium effect is not yet executed, the stop design of the decoration design of step 052 IWS9703 is displayed. Go to step 052IWS9717 without executing the process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 120 displays the left, middle, and right decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the image display device 5. , small winning symbols) are controlled to be displayed (step 052IWS9703). It should be noted that when the first compulsory design decision designation command or the second compulsory design decision designation command is received, and the process of replacing with the lost design is executed in steps 052IWS8109 and S8113, in step 052IWS9703, the performance control CPU 120 determines that the design is lost. is displayed.

When the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (Y in step 052IWS9704), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 052IWS9705).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a jackpot start designation command has been received (step 052IWS9706). When the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 052IWS9707).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the number of winning balls is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS9708). If the display of the number of prize balls is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the type of the hit that has occurred this time is the 10R variable probability jackpot, the 6R probability variable jackpot, or the 6R normal jackpot (step 052 IWS9709). Whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot is determined, for example, by determining whether the received display result designation command is a display result 2 designation command to a display result 4 designation command. It can be determined by checking. If the 10R variable probability big win, the 6R variable probability big win, or the 6R normal big win, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying the number of winning balls on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS9710).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS9708 to S9710, in this example, display of the number of winning balls is started when a big win game based on the 10R variable probability big win, the 6R probability variable big win, or the 6R normal big win is started. On the other hand, even if it is a big win, when a big win game based on the 2R probability variable big win or the 2R normal big win is started, the display of the number of winning balls is not started.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the effect during the big hit (step 052IWS9711). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 052IWS9712), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number In accordance with data 1), control of the performance devices (image display device 5 as performance parts, various lamps as performance parts, and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts) is executed (step 052IWS9713).

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process (step S176) during the big hit (step 052IWS9714).

If the jackpot pattern is not confirmed and displayed in the processing of step 052IWS9703 (N of step 052IWS9704), if the small winning pattern is confirmed and displayed in the processing of step 052IWS9703 (Y of step 052IWS9715), the effect control CPU 120 stops. The symbol display flag 2 is set (step 052IWS9716).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a small hit start designation command is received (step 052IWS9717). When the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 052IWS9718).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the small winning effect (step 052IWS9719). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 052IWS9720), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number In accordance with data 1), control of the performance devices (image display device 5 as performance parts, various lamps as performance parts, and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts) is executed (step 052IWS9721).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the small winning effect process (step S174) (step 052IWS9722).

In the process of step 052IWS9703, if the big hit pattern or the small hit pattern is not displayed (that is, if the lost pattern is displayed) (N in step 052IWS9704 and N in step 052IWS9715), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 052IWS9723).

(Ending effect processing)
FIG. 10-53 is a flow chart showing the ending effect processing (step S177) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step 052IWS951). It should be noted that the effect period measuring timer is set based on the completion of all the rounds of the big win game in the effect process during the big win (see step S176). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step 052IWS952).

When the production period measurement timer has not timed out (step 052IWS952 N), the production control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 052IWS953), and controls the production device (image display device 5 , game effect lamp 9, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) are executed (step 052IWS954). For example, an effect such as displaying that the big win is over or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 052IWS955), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 052IWS956). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step 052IWS957).

If the production period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 052IWS952), the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot game to end this time is a jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable jackpot or the 6R normal jackpot (step 052IWS958). Whether or not the 6R probability variable jackpot or the 6R normal jackpot is determined is, for example, whether the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result designation command 3 or the display result designation command 4. can be determined by checking If it is a 6R probability variable jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to terminate the display of the number of winning balls on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS959).

By executing the processing of steps 052 IWS958 to S959, in this example, when executing a jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable jackpot or the 6R normal jackpot, the number of prize balls is displayed during the jackpot game, and the jackpot is won. The display of the number of prize balls is erased when the game is ended, and the display of the number of prize balls is not displayed during the high probability/first KT state or the low probability/first KT state after the end of the big win game.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot game to end this time is a jackpot game based on the 2R probability variable jackpot (step 052IWS960). Whether or not the 2R probability variable jackpot is determined can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 5 designation command. If it is a 2R probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the number of prize balls is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS961). If the display of the number of prize balls is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start the display of the number of prize balls on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS962).

By executing the processing of steps 052 IWS960 to S962, in this example, when executing a jackpot game based on the 2R probability variable jackpot, the number of prize balls is not displayed during the jackpot game (however, In this example, if the number of prize balls is displayed before the 2R probability variable jackpot is displayed, the number of prize balls is displayed continuously, but the display is not updated), high probability after the end of the jackpot game. / The number of prize balls is displayed during the second KT state.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 052IWS963).

(Production example)
Next, an effect mode of the effect executed in this characterizing portion 052IW will be described. First, the effect mode of the set value suggesting effect will be described. FIG. 10-54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effect mode of the set value suggesting effect. In this example, it is possible to execute the set value suggesting effect in the variable display of the decorative symbols that are lost. As shown in FIG. 10-54 (A), when the image display device 5 is executing the variable display of the left, middle, and right decoration patterns, when it comes time to execute the set value suggesting effect, FIG. 10-54 (B1 ) to (B3), the setting value suggesting effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-54 (B1) to (B3), the setting value suggestion effect is executed by displaying predetermined character images 052IW001, 052IW002, and 052IW003 on the image display device 5. FIG. In this case, for example, when the set value suggesting effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. A value suggesting rendition is performed. Further, for example, when the set value suggesting effect C is executed, as shown in FIG. Suggestion production is executed. Further, for example, when the set value suggesting effect E is executed, as shown in FIG. Suggestion production is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-54, the case where the set value suggestion effect A, the set value suggestion effect C, and the set value suggestion effect E are executed is shown. , a predetermined character image is displayed in a green display color, a predetermined character image is displayed in an orange display color when the set value suggestion effect D is executed, and a rainbow color is displayed when the set value suggestion effect F is executed. A predetermined character image is displayed in a color display color.

In this example, which set value is currently set for the player depends on whether a character image of a different display color is displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern to be lost and whether the set value suggestion effect is executed. can give hope to

Next, the effect mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 10-55 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effect mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. In this example, it is possible to execute a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect in the variable display of the decorative pattern that is to be lost during the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH).

In this example, when in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-55(A), for example, a character display 052IW004 such as "small win RUSH" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the second KT state is displayed. It is recognizably displayed that it is inside. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (A), when executing the variable display of the left, middle and right decorative patterns in the image display device 5 during the second KT state, the execution timing of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 (B1) to (B3), a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 (B1) and (B2), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed by displaying predetermined effect images 052IW005 and 052IW006 on the image display device 5. FIG. In this example, a case is shown in which racing car images are displayed as the predetermined effect images 052IW005 and 052IW006. In this case, for example, when executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, as shown in FIG. A small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B, as shown in FIG. Small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production is executed.

In this example, during the variable display of the decoration pattern to be lost in the second KT state, by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect or by displaying the effect image of any display color, the small win RUSH continuation suggestion Depending on whether or not the performance is executed, the player can have expectations for the continuation of the second KT state (small win RUSH).

Next, the display mode of the right hitting information will be described. FIG. 10-56 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the notification of hitting to the right. In this example, regardless of whether the big win is achieved by the variable display of the first special symbol or the big win is achieved by the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, when the jackpot game is in progress. As shown in FIG. 10-56 (1), the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) turns on the right-handed indicator 26 (see steps 052IWS2018A, S2018B). In addition, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. reference). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-56(1), the effect control CPU 120 displays a right-handed display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 (see step 052IWS624).

Further, in this example, when a small hit is achieved by the variable display of the second special symbol, during the small winning game, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (2), the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically At this time, the right-handed indicator 26 is lit by the CPU 103 (see step 052IWS2024B). Also, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (2), the right-handed notification LED 37 is lit by the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2025B, S639) . However, unlike during the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 10-56(2), the right-handed display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not displayed.

On the other hand, in this example, when a small hit is achieved in the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. The hitting notification LED 37 is not lit, and the right hitting display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not displayed.

Next, a description will be given of the performance aspects of the over winning suggesting effect, the small winning winning suggesting effect, and the number of prize balls display suggesting effect. FIG. 10-57 and FIG. 10-58 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the effect modes of the over winning suggesting effect, the small winning winning suggesting effect, and the number of prize balls display suggesting effect. In FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, the display screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), (C), . . . Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, the case of being controlled to the jackpot game state based on the 10R probability variable jackpot is shown.

As shown in FIG. 10-57(A), during the jackpot game, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "Jacking!" and the number of rounds such as "Round 2". The number of prize balls display 052IW008 is displayed. Also, when a normal winning (not over winning) to the big winning opening occurs during the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 052IW009 (in this example, character display of "+15") is displayed, and normal winning sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see steps 052IWS307 and S308).

Next, it is assumed that an over-win occurs during the jackpot game, and execution of the over-win-time suggestive performance is determined based on the occurrence of the over win. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-57(C), a winning display 052IW010 (character display of "+15" in this example) corresponding to the determined type of over-winning suggestion effect is displayed, and the speaker 8L is displayed. , 8R output a prize winning sound corresponding to the type of over winning suggestive effect determined (see steps 052, IWS305 and S306). For example, when the over-winning effect A is executed, the image display device 5 displays the winning display in a blue display color, and the winning sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, it is assumed that the number of prize balls reaches 456, and execution of the number of prize balls display suggesting effect A is determined based on the number of prize balls reaching 456. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-57(D), the character display 052IW011 such as "456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the number-of-balls display suggestion effect A is executed (see step 052IWS360).

In addition, in this example, the case of executing the number-of-balls display suggestion effect A is shown. OVER" is displayed, and the number-of-balls display suggestion performance B is executed. Further, for example, when execution of the number-of-balls display suggestion effect C is determined, the image display device 5 displays "666
OVER" is displayed, and the number-of-balls display suggestion effect C is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-58(E), when the big win game ends, the game state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state after the big win game ends. Also, when it is controlled to the high probability/second KT state, as shown in FIG. is displayed.

Next, in the high-probability/second KT state, a game ball enters the special winning hole as a small hit, but if execution of the suggestive performance at the time of small winning is not decided, see FIG. 10-58. As shown in (F), a winning display 052IW012 (character display of "+10" in this example) is displayed in a normal display color (in this example, white), and a normal sound is generated from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound is output (see step 052IWS325, S326).

Next, a small hit occurs during the high probability/2nd KT state, and the game ball enters the special winning hole, and based on the fact that the game ball enters the special winning hole, a suggestive performance at the time of winning the small win. shall be decided. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-58 (G), a winning display 052IW013 (in this example, character display of "+10") corresponding to the type of the determined small winning winning suggestion effect is displayed, and a speaker is displayed. From 8L and 8R, a prize winning sound corresponding to the type of the determined small winning prize suggestive effect is output (see steps 052, IWS323 and S324). For example, in the case of executing the suggestion effect A at the time of winning a small prize, the winning display is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and the winning sound of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, it is assumed that the number of prize balls reaches 2666 during the high probability/second KT state, and execution of the number of prize balls display suggesting effect F is determined based on the number of prize balls reaching 2666. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-58(H), the character display 052IW014 such as "2666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the number-of-balls display suggestion effect F is executed (see step 052IWS360).

In this example, the case of executing the number-of-balls display suggestion effect F is shown. OVER" is displayed, and the number-of-balls display suggestion effect D is executed. Further, for example, when execution of the number-of-balls display suggestion effect E is determined, a character display such as "2555 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the number-of-balls display suggestion effect E is executed.

Also, in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, although illustration is omitted, for example, execution of the prize number emphasizing effect A is determined based on the number of prize balls reaching 1000. In this case, a character display such as "1000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize number emphasizing effect A is executed. Further, for example, when execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect B is determined based on the number of prize balls reaching 2000, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as "2000 OVER". , the number-of-balls emphasizing effect B is executed. Further, for example, when execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect C is determined based on the number of prize balls reaching 3,000, a character display such as "3000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , the number-of-balls emphasizing effect C is executed. Further, for example, when execution of the number of prize balls emphasizing effect D is determined based on the number of prize balls reaching 4000, a character display such as "4000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , the number-of-balls emphasizing effect D is executed. Further, for example, when execution of the number of prize balls emphasizing effect E is determined based on the number of prize balls reaching 5000, a character display such as "5000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , the number-of-balls emphasizing effect E is executed.

In this example, the number of prize balls reached 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666 (in other words, a small hit during a big hit game or a high probability/second KT state (Total gaming value given by the player), the case is shown in which the prize ball number display suggesting effects A to F are executed at different selection ratios, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, according to the number of small hits occurring during the high probability/2nd KT state and the number of executions of the variable display executed during the high probability/2KT state, different selection ratios are used to indicate the number of prize balls display indications A to F. may be configured to execute, and various aspects are conceivable.

Next, a description will be given of the control of the variable display in the case of a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol. FIG. 10-59 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small win is achieved in the variable display of one special symbol during the variable display of the other special symbol.

During the variable display of the first special symbol to be a big hit, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol is a probability variable big hit (in this example, 10R probability variable In the case of a big hit variation such as a big hit or a 6R probability variable big hit), as shown in FIG. 10-59(A), the variable display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the updating of the first variable time timer is restarted (steps 052IWS1120A, Step 052 (see Y in IWS1128A).

On the other hand, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a normal jackpot (in this example, a 6R normal jackpot), as shown in FIG. When the first special symbol is changed, the variation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a lost symbol (N of step 052IWS1128A, see step 052IWS1129A).

It should be noted that, during the variable display of the first special symbol that becomes a loss or a small hit, if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 10-59 (C), Even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the updating of the first variable time timer is restarted (steps 052IWS1120A, Step 052 (see N of IWS1127A).

During the variable display of the second special symbol to be a big hit, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is a probability variable big hit (in this example, 10R probability variable In the case of a jackpot variation such as a jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 2R probability variable jackpot), as shown in FIG. is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to the value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, Step 052 (see Y in IWS1128B).

On the other hand, if the variation display of the second special symbol is a normal jackpot (in this example, a 2R normal jackpot), as shown in FIG. When it is done, the variable display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped in the lost symbol (see step 052IWS1128B N, step 052IWS1129B).

It should be noted that, during the variable display of the second special symbol that becomes a loss or a small hit, if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 10-59 (F), The variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to the value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, Step 052 (see N of IWS1127B).

The control method in the case of a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the variable display of one special symbol is not limited to the mode shown in this example. Hereinafter, a modified example of the control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of one special symbol during the variable display of the other special symbol will be described.

(Modification 1)
FIG. 10-60 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in Modification 1. FIG. In FIG. 10-60, the processes of steps 052IWS1120A to S1127A are similar to those processes shown in FIG. 10-19, but in modification 1, the determination process of step 052IWS1128A shown in FIG. 10-19 does not exist. .

In the modified example 1, if the variation display of the first special symbol being executed becomes a big hit, the CPU 103 proceeds to the processing of step S1129A as it is, and transmits the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120. control is performed (step 052IWS1129A). In addition, in FIG. 10-60, the processing of step 052IWS1130A is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 10-19.

FIG. 10-61 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 1. FIG. In FIG. 10-61, the processes of steps 052IWS1120B to S1127B are similar to those processes shown in FIG. 10-22, but in modification 1, there is no determination process of step 052IWS1128B shown in FIG. 10-22. .

In the modified example 1, if the variation display of the second special symbol being executed becomes a big hit, the CPU 103 proceeds to the processing of step S1129B as it is, and transmits the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120. control is performed (step 052IWS1129B). In addition, in FIG. 10-61, the processing of step 052IWS1130B is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 10-22.

FIG. 10-62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when the variable display of the other special symbol results in a small win while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed in Modification 1. FIG.

When the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special pattern during the variable display of the first special pattern that becomes a big hit, whether the variable display of the first special pattern is a big winning variation that becomes a probability variable big win. As shown in FIG. 10-62(A), when the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the first special pattern is also forced to be a lost pattern, regardless of whether the big hit variation is a normal big hit. Stopped display (N of step 052IWS1127A, see step 052IWS1129A).

On the other hand, during the variable display of the first special symbol that is a loss or a small hit, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 10-62 (B), Even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the updating of the first variable time timer is restarted (steps 052IWS1120A, Step 052 (see N of IWS1127A).

When the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol to be a big hit, whether the variation display of the second special symbol is a big hit variation to be a probability variable big hit. As shown in FIG. 10-62(C), regardless of whether it is a big hit variation that is a normal big hit, when the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special pattern is also forced to be a lost pattern. Stopped display (N of step 052IWS1127B, see step 052IWS1129B).

On the other hand, during the variable display of the second special symbol that becomes a loss or a small hit, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 10-62 (D), The variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to the value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, Step 052 (see N of IWS1127B).

(Modification 2)
FIG. 10-63 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in Modification 2. FIG. In FIG. 10-63, the processes of steps 052IWS1120A to S1126A are the same as those processes shown in FIG. Instead, it includes the processing of step 052IWS1127C.

In modification 2, if the variation display of the first special symbol being executed results in a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the variable display of the first special symbol being executed does not result in a big hit, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A). In addition, in FIG. 10-63, the process of step 052IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

FIG. 10-64 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 2. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 10-64, the processes of steps 052IWS1120B to S1126B are the same as those processes shown in FIG. Instead, it includes the processing of step 052IWS1127D.

In the modification 2, if the variation display of the second special symbol being executed results in a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the variable display of the second special symbol being executed does not result in a big hit, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129B). In addition, in FIG. 10-64, the process of step 052IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-22.

FIG. 10-65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when the variable display of the other special symbol results in a small win while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed in Modification 2. FIG.

When the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special pattern during the variable display of the first special pattern that becomes a big hit, whether the variable display of the first special pattern is a big winning variation that becomes a probability variable big win. As shown in FIG. 10-65(A), the first special symbol continues to be varied and displayed even if the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed, regardless of whether it is a big hit variation that is a normal big hit. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the updating of the first variable time timer is restarted (steps 052IWS1120A, Step 052 (see Y in IWS1127C).

On the other hand, during the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a loss or a small hit, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 10-65 (B), When the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is also forced to be stopped and displayed as a lost symbol (step 052IWS1127C N, step 052IWS1129A).

When the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol to be a big hit, whether the variation display of the second special symbol is a big hit variation to be a probability variable big hit. As shown in FIG. 10-65(C), the second special symbol is continuously displayed even if the small winning symbols are stop-displayed regardless of whether or not the variation is a big hit that is a normal big hit. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to the value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, Step 052 (see Y in IWS1127D).

On the other hand, during the variable display of the second special symbol that becomes a loss or a small hit, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 10-65 (D), When the small winning symbol is stop-displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is also forcefully stopped-displayed as a lost symbol (N of step 052IWS1127D, see step 052IWS1129B).

In addition, as a control method in the case of a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol, in addition to those shown in the first and second modifications, for example, losing During the variable display of the first special symbol, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, it is forced to come off and stop, while the first special symbol to be a small winning is displayed during the variable display. In the variable display of the second special symbol, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation may be continued.

Further, for example, when the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special pattern during the variable display of the first special pattern that becomes the 10R probability variable big hit, the second special pattern that becomes the 2R probability variable big hit is forced to come off and stop. In the case where the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation may be continued.

Also, for example, during normal state (low probability/low base state), when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is lost and fluctuates. It may be constructed so as to be stopped forcibly in either small hit variation or big hit variation. With such a configuration, in this example, when 50 fluctuation displays are completed in the low-probability/high-base state, the transition to the low-probability/low-base state occurs (see FIG. 10-29). When 1 to 4 second reserved memories are accumulated when the variable display is ended and the state is shifted to the low probability/low base state, and if there is a second reserved memory that becomes a big hit among them, it is forced to lose and stop. Thus, it is possible to prevent a big hit at an unintended timing. In addition, in particular, in the gaming machine configured to be controllable to the KT state as in this example, by performing a right-handed operation in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the second start winning port that is easy to start winning It is also possible to have a capture method in which the first start winning opening is started to win and the first special symbol is displayed variably, while the second special symbol is variably displayed by the start winning. It is effective as a preventive measure for the method.

As described above, various aspects can be conceived as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of one special symbol during the variable display of the other special symbol.

(Modification 3)
In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, in the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the same control is performed to forcibly stop and display the missing symbol. A case (see FIG. 10-59) is shown, but different controls are possible. FIG. 10-66 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 3. As shown in FIG. Incidentally, in the modification 3, the first special symbol variation process is the same as the process shown in FIGS. 10-19. In FIG. 10-66, the processes of steps 052IWS1120B to S1125B are similar to those processes shown in FIG. not exist. Therefore, in Modification 3, if the first special symbol display device 4A does not derive and display the jackpot symbol (N of step 052IWS1125B), the CPU 103 terminates the process.

FIG. 10-67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when the variable display of the other special symbol results in a small win while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed in Modification 3. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 10-67 (A) and (C), in modification 3, during the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a loss, a small hit, or a probability variable big hit, the small hit is displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol. When the symbols are stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed, as in FIGS. 10-59(A) and (C). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-67 (D) and (F), during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that is a loss, a small hit, or a probability variable big hit, the small winning symbol stops in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. When it is displayed, like FIGS. 10-59(D) and (F), even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol continues to be variably displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-67(B), in the modification 3, during the variable display of the first special symbol, which is usually a big hit, the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol. Similarly to FIG. 10-59(B), when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a lost symbol.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-67(E), in Modification 3, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit. , unlike FIG. 10-59(E), the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-67, in modification 3, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the variable display of the special symbol is forced by the missing symbol. Stop display control is different.

In addition, in the modification 3, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed by the second special symbol variation display during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit, the game is forcibly lost and stopped, while the normal big hit is achieved. While the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the variable display is continued when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol. do not have. For example, conversely, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed by the second special symbol variation display during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit, the variable display is continued while the normal big win is performed. It may be constructed such that when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed by the variation display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, the machine is forced to come off and stop. In addition, for example, (irrespective of whether it is a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot), during the execution of the variable display of the first special pattern that will be a big hit, when the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed with the second special pattern variable display, the forced loss is performed. On the other hand, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol which becomes a big hit (regardless of whether it is a probability variable big win or a normal big win), it fluctuates. The display may be configured to continue. As such, in some form, the control for the forced dropout stop may be different between the case of performing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of performing the variable display of the second special symbol.

(Modification 4)
FIG. 10-68 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in Modification 4. FIG. In FIG. 10-68, the processing of steps 052IWS1120A-S1128A are similar to those shown in FIG. 10-19.

In the modification 4, in step 052IWS1128A, when the variation display of the first special symbol that is neither the 10R probability variation jackpot nor the 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, the 6R normal jackpot) is being executed, the CPU 103 determines that the probability variation flag is It is checked whether it is set (step 052IWS1131A). If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if the probability variation state is not set), the process is terminated as it is. If the variable probability flag is set (that is, if it is in the variable probability state), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A). The processing of step 052IWS1130A is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 10-19.

In the modification 4, by executing the determination process of step 052IWS1131A, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit, The variable display of the first special pattern is not uniformly stopped and displayed with the lost pattern, but the variable display of the first special pattern is forcibly stopped and displayed with the lost pattern in the probability variable state. On the other hand, even if the variable display of the first special symbol, which is usually a big hit, is not in the probability variable state, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 10-69 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 4. FIG. In FIG. 10-69, the processes of steps 052IWS1120B-S1128B are similar to those shown in FIG. 10-22.

In modification 4, in step 052IWS1128B, when the variable display of the first special symbol that is neither the 10R probability variable jackpot, the 6R probability variable jackpot, nor the 2R probability variable jackpot (that is, the 2R normal jackpot) is being executed, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable probability flag is set (step 052IWS1131B). If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if the probability variation state is not set), the process is terminated as it is. If the variable probability flag is set (that is, if the variable probability state), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the second compulsory design confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129B). The processing of step 052IWS1130B is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 10-22.

In modification 4, by executing the determination processing of step 052IWS1131B, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit, The variable display of the second special pattern is not uniformly stopped and displayed with the lost pattern, but the variable display of the second special pattern is forcibly stopped and displayed with the lost pattern in the probability variable state. On the other hand, even during variable display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit, if the probability variable state is not in effect, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed.

It should be noted that, in the modification 4, whether or not the probability variation flag is set (whether or not the probability variation state) was forcibly removed depending on whether the stop display in the pattern was shown, but only such an aspect can't For example, depending on whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set, it may be configured to forcibly stop and display the lost symbol. Further, for example, only when the high probability/low base state (high probability flag is ON, high base flag is OFF), control may be performed to forcibly stop and display the lost symbols. In some form, it may be configured so as to perform control to forcibly stop and display the lost symbols according to the current game state.

In addition, as described above, in the case of performing control to forcibly stop and display the losing pattern only in the high probability/low base state, it is possible to prevent a normal big hit due to the variable display of one identification information, It is possible to prevent the second KT state (small hit RUSH) from being interrupted.

As described above, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") having different advantages for the player can be set. be. In addition, it is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small win game state) that is a state different from the advantageous state, and a game is played according to the special state. It can be controlled to a special state (for example, KT state) in which value is likely to be given. Then, in response to the passage of the game medium (eg, game ball) through the specific area (eg, special winning hole), it is possible to execute a setting suggestive effect (eg, when winning a small prize). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect.

Specifically, in this example, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special winning hole during the high probability/second KT state (small winning RUSH), it is configured to be able to execute the suggestion effect at the time of winning a small winning. However, since the frequency of winning the special winning opening is particularly high during the small winning RUSH, it is possible to draw attention to the set suggesting performance (in this example, the suggesting performance at the time of winning the small winning), and to improve the interest of the setting suggesting performance. be able to.

In addition, in this example, a case was shown in which a setting suggestion effect (in this example, a suggestion effect at the time of winning a small hit) is executed based on the fact that a game ball has won a special winning hole as a specific area, but such a mode not limited to For example, it may be possible to execute the setting suggestion effect based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening (winning ball device 6A, variable winning ball device 6B), the general winning opening 10, and the big winning opening as the specific area. good. Further, it may be configured such that the setting suggesting effect can be executed based on the entry of the game ball into the out port as the specific area. Further, for example, it may be configured to be able to execute the setting suggesting effect based on the game ball passing through the gates such as the passage gate 41 as the specific area.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values "1" to "6") having different advantages for the player. In addition, it is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small win game state) that is a state different from the advantageous state, and a game is played according to the special state. It can be controlled to a special state (for example, KT state) in which value is likely to be given. In addition, it is possible to execute a setting suggesting effect (for example, a prize ball number display suggesting effect), and the ease with which the setting suggesting effect is executed varies depending on the length of the period during which the special state is controlled (for example, FIG. 10-43 , when the number of prize balls reaches 456, the prize ball number display suggestion effect A can be executed with a probability of 3%, and when the number of prize balls reaches 555, there is a probability of 2%. A number display suggesting performance B can be executed, when the number of prize balls reaches 666, a prize ball number display suggestion performance C can be executed with a probability of 1%, and when the number of prize balls reaches 2456, 5. The number of prize balls display suggestion performance D can be executed with a probability of 3%, and when the number of prize balls reaches 2555, the number of prize balls display suggestion performance E can be executed with a probability of 3%, and the number of prize balls is 2666. When the number of balls reaches 1, it is possible to execute the number-of-balls display suggesting effect F with a probability of 2%). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect.

In this example, the "length of the period controlled to the special state" is the timing when the number of prize balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, 2666 (in other words, Although a case is shown in which the number-of-balls display suggestion effect is executed during a period until a certain game value is awarded, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the "length of the period controlled to the special state" is the length of the period controlled to the advantageous state (in this example, the jackpot game state), and the special state (in this example, the small hit game state). It may be the length of the period in which the

Also, when using the length of the period controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) as the "length of the period controlled to the special state", the length of the period from the fanfare of the jackpot game to the ending is used. Alternatively, the length of the period of only the round game during the jackpot game may be used. In this case, for example, the longer the period from the fanfare to the ending of the jackpot game, the higher the ratio of the number-of-balls display suggestion effect may be executed. In addition, for example, in the case of a big win with a small number of rounds during a big win game, compared to a big win with a large number of rounds, it may be configured to execute the number-of-balls display suggestion performance at a higher rate.

Also, for example, as the "length of the period controlled in the special state", the number of small hits that occurred during the high probability / 2nd KT state, or the number of times of variable display executed during the high probability / 2nd KT state Accordingly, it may be configured to execute the number-of-balls display suggestion effect. In this case, for example, the higher the number of small wins, the higher the number of prize balls display suggestion effect may be executed, or the higher the number of executions of variable display, the higher the number of prize balls display suggestion effect may be executed. . Also, for example, at the timing when the high-probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) ends, the number of prize balls display suggestion effect may be executed at a high rate. can be considered.

Generally, in a game machine, when the number of prize balls reaches a certain number and a display such as "XXX OVER" is displayed, the number of prize balls emphasized "1000 OVER" or "1000 OVER" is displayed. It is displayed in units with a certain limit, such as displaying in units of 1000 prize balls such as "2000 OVER". On the other hand, the presentation indicating the number of prize balls shown in the present example is performed at timings different from normal, such as when the number of prize balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555 and 2666. Therefore, it is possible to expect a high setting while giving a sense of incongruity to the generation timing of the performance suggesting display of the number of prize balls, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Further, according to this characteristic portion 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big win pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state). Further, when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small winning game state). In addition, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for determining the big hit and the determination value for determining the small hit). In addition, the determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for judging a big hit) for determining to derive and display a specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. A special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display is included. In addition, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. Also, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the setting value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, appropriate playability can be realized.

In addition, according to this characteristic part 052IW, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect in response to the control to the special state (for example, it becomes a small hit during the high probability / 2 KT state and the game ball wins the special winning mouth Based on what has been done, it is possible to execute a suggesting effect at the time of winning a small prize or a suggesting effect of displaying the number of prize balls). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggesting effect in relation to the control to the special state.

It should be noted that, in this example, a case is shown in which a setting suggestion effect (in this example, a suggestion effect at the time of winning a small prize, a suggestion effect for displaying the number of prize balls) is executed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the special winning hole. , is not limited to such aspects. For example, it may be constructed such that the setting suggestion effect is executed at the start of the small winning game when the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to the open state during the small winning variation. Further, for example, by changing the mode of notification of a small hit when a small hit occurs, the setting suggesting effect may be executed. As long as it executes the setting suggestion effect in some form in response to the control to the small hit.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, when the control is in the advantageous state and when the control is in the special state, the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17) is set to the game. A medium (eg, game ball) can be controlled into an easy-to-enter state (eg, open state) and a non-easy-to-enter state (eg, closed state) in which it is difficult or impossible to enter. In addition, in response to the fact that the variable means is controlled to the easy-to-enter state, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened, Based on the fact that a game ball has entered a winning hole or a special winning hole, it is possible to execute a suggesting effect at the time of winning a small prize or a suggesting effect of displaying the number of prize balls). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggesting effect in relation to the control of the variable means.

In this example, when a setting suggestion effect (in this example, a suggestion effect at the time of winning a small prize, a suggestion effect for displaying the number of prize balls) is executed based on the fact that a game ball has won in a big winning hole or a special winning hole. is shown, but is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the opening performance is executed when the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to the open state, the setting suggestion performance is executed by changing the performance mode of the opening performance. It may be configured as In some form, the setting suggesting effect may be executed in response to the variable means being controlled to the easy-to-enter state.

In addition, according to this characteristic portion 052IW, when the control of the game state is switched (for example, at the start or end of the jackpot game, when transitioning from the low probability / 1st KT state to the normal state (low probability / low base state) ), it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect (for example, change the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display at step 052 IWS 624). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the switching of control of the game state.

In this example, "when the control of the game state is switched" is set when the jackpot game starts or ends, when the low probability/first KT state shifts to the normal state (low probability/low base state). Although the case where the suggestive effect is configured to be executable is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, a production period when shifting to a big win game during a high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH), or a shift from a big win game to a high base state (high probability/first KT state or low probability/first KT state). The setting suggestion effect may be configured to be executable during the time effect period. Further, for example, a game machine configured to shift to a high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH) based on the execution of a predetermined number of variable displays during the high base state or the occurrence of a predetermined number of small wins. , in the production period when transitioning from the high base state to the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH), it may be possible to configure the setting suggestion production to be executable, various as "when the control of the game state is switched" can be considered.

Also, in this example, the case where the setting suggesting effect is executed by changing the display mode of the right-handed display or the left-handed display is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, by changing the performance mode of the fanfare performance at the start of the big win or the ending performance at the end of the big win, the setting suggesting performance may be executed, and various modes are conceivable.

Further, according to this characteristic part 052IW, according to the number of times of control to the special state during the special state, the total game value given by the special state during the special state, or the number of times of execution of the variable display during the special state, It is possible to execute setting suggestion effects with different selection ratios (for example, depending on the number of prize balls reaching 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666, prizes with different selection ratios Executes ball number display suggestion effects A to F. Or, for example, according to the number of small hits that occur during the high probability/second KT state, or the number of times of execution of variable display that is executed during the high probability/second KT state , may be configured to execute the number-of-balls display suggestion effects A to F at different selection ratios.). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggesting effect in relation to the number of times the special state is controlled, the total game value, or the number of times the variable display is executed.

Further, according to this characterizing portion 052IW, the special states include an advantageous special state (eg, the second KT state) and a disadvantageous special state (eg, the first KT state) that is disadvantageous to the player compared to the advantageous special state. can be controlled to In addition, when the game medium passes through the specific area during the advantageous special state and when the game medium passes through the specific area during the disadvantageous special state, it is possible to execute the setting suggesting effects at different selection ratios (for example, Only when a game ball enters a special winning hole as a small hit during the second KT state, a suggesting effect at the time of winning a small win and a suggesting effect of displaying the number of prize balls can be executed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the type of special state.

In this example, only when a game ball wins a prize in the special winning hole during the second KT state, a case is shown in which the effect suggesting when winning a small prize or the effect suggesting the number of prize balls can be executed, but such a case is shown. It is not limited to any form. For example, even when a game ball enters a special winning hole during the 1st KT state, it is configured to be able to execute a suggestive effect at the time of winning a small prize or a suggestive effect of displaying the number of prize balls, and a game ball enters the special winning hole during the 2KT state. Winning a prize or a game ball entering a special prize winning opening during the 1st KT state, it is possible to execute a suggesting effect at the time of winning a small win or a suggesting effect of displaying the number of prize balls at a different rate. may be configured. In addition, for example, even if irregular winning of a game ball into a special winning hole occurs during a non-KT state, it may be configured to be able to execute a suggesting effect at the time of winning a small prize or a suggesting effect of displaying the number of prize balls. .

In the case of the above configuration, if a special winning slot or irregular winning occurs during the 1st KT state (high base state), if a special winning slot occurs during the 2nd KT state Compared to , it may be configured to execute the suggestion effect at the time of winning a small win or the suggestion effect to display the number of prize balls at a high rate, or the suggestion effect at the time of winning a small win or the suggestion effect to display the number of prize balls at a low rate. can be configured to run.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, during the jackpot game based on the 10R probability variable jackpot, the 6R probability variable jackpot, and the 6R normal jackpot, the value of the prize ball counter and the number of prize balls are displayed during the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH). is updated, and the value of the prize ball counter is not updated during the jackpot game based on the 2R variable hit and the 2R normal jackpot and during the high base state (high probability / 1st KT state, low probability / 1st KT state) (however, In principle, the display of the number of prize balls is hidden, and after 50 times of fluctuation display in the low probability / 1st KT state, it returns to the normal state (low probability / low base state). Although the case where control is performed to reset the value of the number-of-balls counter when shifting is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. The value of the number-of-balls counter may be updated during a big-hit game based on the 2R variable probability big-hit or the 2R normal big-hit.

In addition, in this example, by being configured as described above, for example, high probability / 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH) is terminated and high base state (high probability / 1st KT state, low probability / 1st KT state), the 10R variable probability big hit or the 2R variable probability big hit occurs during the high base state, and if it shifts to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) again, the prize during the previous small win RUSH. While the number of balls is taken over, the value of the number of prize balls counter can be updated and the display of the number of prize balls can be displayed.

In addition, not only the display of the number of prize balls as shown in this example, for example, when the 10R probability variable jackpot is shifted to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH), the high probability/second KT state It may be configured such that the number of prize balls in the section is counted during (small hit RUSH) and the big hit game just before that, and the counted value is displayed. Further, for example, by changing the display mode (in this example, the display color) of the aggregated value, a setting suggestion rendering that suggests the current setting value may be executed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, as a "setting suggestion effect", the current set value suggests any of the set values "1" to "6". Although the case of executing is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, instead of suggesting the current set value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in a mode of suggesting whether or not a setting change has been made to change the set value when the gaming machine is powered on. good. In this way, the "setting suggestion effect" may be any format that suggests settings.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, the variable display of the first identification information (eg, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (eg, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel. , when a specific display result (for example, a big win pattern) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) for the player, and the display result of the variable display is a special display result. When a display result (for example, a small winning pattern) is derived and displayed, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from the advantageous state. In addition, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a variable probability jackpot pattern) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot pattern). The degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, it is controlled to the probability variable state after the jackpot game ends). Also, during the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information corresponding to the first specific display result, during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the first specific display result, the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information is derived and displayed, the display result of the variable display of the one identification information is not derived and displayed (for example, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, the first special symbol or the second 2 The variable display of special symbols is continuously executed). Also, during the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information is derived and displayed, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, a lost design) (for example, the variable display of the first special design or the second special design is a lost design. is forcibly stopped). Therefore, it is possible to implement control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

Specifically, in spite of the transition to the second KT state (small hit RUSH) or probability variable state, if the variation display corresponding to the remaining retention of one identification information becomes a normal jackpot (non-probability variable jackpot), The second KT state (small hit RUSH) or variable probability state ends immediately, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game may decrease. On the other hand, if the variable display corresponding to the remaining retention of the identification information on one side is forcibly stopped and displayed (forcibly lost), even if the variable display is a probability variable big hit, it will be forced to be lost. As a result, the game value given to the player in an advantageous state (jackpot game state) decreases, which is not preferable. Therefore, in this feature part 052IW, while forcing the variation display that is a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) to be a target, for the variation display that is a probability variation jackpot, the variation is extended (interrupts the measurement of the variation time). , while suppressing the decrease in the game value given to the player, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this example, as a mode of "not stopping the variable display of one identification information", the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol Although the case of continuously executing is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped), and the suspended variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is restarted after the end of the small winning game. may As long as it does not completely stop the variable display in some form, it is acceptable.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, the second KT state) in which game value (for example, prize balls) is likely to be given in the special state. Therefore, by providing a situation in which the game value is likely to be given due to the special state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probable variable state))). Further, based on the derivation display of the first specific display result, control is performed to the specific state (for example, control to the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game based on the variable probability big hit), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed. Based on that, it is controlled to a non-specific state (for example, it is not controlled to a probability variable state after the end of a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot). Therefore, it is possible to implement control in consideration of whether or not to be controlled to a specific state.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probable variable state))). Further, it is possible to control to a specific state based on the game medium (eg, game ball) passing through the specific region (eg, V region 052IW104) while being controlled to be in an advantageous state. When the first specific display result is derived and displayed, game media pass through the specific region at a higher rate when controlled in an advantageous state compared to when the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (See Figures 10-11). Therefore, it is possible to implement control considering whether or not the game medium is likely to pass through the specific area.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, the special display result can be derived and displayed in both cases of executing variable display of the first identification information and executing variable display of the second identification information ( Figures 10-3 and 10-4). Also, during execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of the first identification information, based on the derived display of the special display result in the variable display of the second identification information, the first identification Variable display of information is derived and displayed based on a predetermined display result (see FIG. 10-67(B)). Further, when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information while the variable display of the second identification information corresponding to the second specific display result is being executed, the second identification information is not controlled to derive and display the variable display of a predetermined display result (see FIG. 10-67(E)). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize control that takes into consideration whether the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information is performed.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probable variable state))). Further, the variable display executing means performs variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, when being controlled to the specific state. During the execution of, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (FIGS. 10-68, 10- 69). Further, when being controlled to the non-specified state, during execution of variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information corresponding to the result of the second specific display, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, control is not performed to derive and display the variable display of the one identification information with the predetermined display result (see FIGS. 10-68 and 10-69). ). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize control that takes into consideration whether or not the control is in a specific state.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is based on the entry of the game medium (for example, the game ball) into the first start area (for example, the first start winning opening). ) can be variably displayed, and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is variably displayed based on the game medium entering the second start area (for example, the second start winning opening). It is possible. In addition, a variable means (for example, a special variable winning A ball device 17) is provided. In addition, after the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is executed, an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player and a special state (for example, a special state that is less advantageous than the advantageous state) For example, it can be controlled to either a small winning game state), and the variable means is controlled to the first state when it is controlled to the special state. In addition, the first starting area is provided so that a game medium that moves along a predetermined path (for example, a left area of the game area) among the movement paths in which the game medium can move can enter, and the variable means is one of the movement paths. A game medium that moves along a specific path (for example, a right area of the game area) is provided so as to be able to enter. In addition, it is possible to execute a specific notification (for example, right-handed notification shown in FIGS. 10-56 (1) and (2)) for promoting shooting of game media to a specific path, and variable display of the first identification information is executed, the specific notification is not executed (see, for example, FIG. 10-56 (3)). Therefore, it is possible to make an appropriate notification about the acceleration of the shooting of game media.

Specifically, as shown in the characteristic portion 052IW, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, and the small hit type on the side of the first special symbol can be executed in parallel. is configured so that the winning ratio (advantage) to the special winning port is lower than the small winning type on the second special symbol side, and when the small winning occurs in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the second special When the variable display of the symbol is forcibly stopped and stopped, if the right hitting notification is executed for the small hit on the side of the first special symbol with a low winning percentage (advantage), it is substantially It is not preferable that the player hits the game ball in vain even though it is almost impossible to expect to win a prize in the special prize winning opening, and rather disadvantageous launch promotion notification is performed. Therefore, in this example, while executing the right-handed notification for the small hit on the second special symbol side, by not executing the right-handed notification for the small hit on the first special symbol side. , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to the player's wasteful hitting, and to realize appropriate notification.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, the first reservation storage means (for example, the first reservation storage buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display of the first identification information as a reservation memory, and the variable display of the second identification information a second reserved storage means (for example, a second reserved storage buffer) capable of storing information relating to as reserved storage. Further, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or a display result of the variable display of the second identification information, an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) is entered. In addition to being controllable, when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or a display result of the variable display of the second identification information, a special state (for example, Small hit game state) can be controlled. Further, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information increases the frequency of the special display result. Further, when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, based on the derived display of the special display result as the display result of one of the variable displays, As the display result of the other variable display, a predetermined display result (for example, a lost pattern) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display can be forcibly terminated, and the reserved memory can be consumed smoothly.

In addition, according to this characteristic part 052IW, it is possible to give a predetermined value when controlled to a special state (for example, pay out 10 prize balls based on the winning of game balls to the special winning opening), It is possible to give a value higher than a predetermined value when controlled in an advantageous state (for example, pay out 15 prize balls based on the winning of game balls into the big winning opening). Further, as the specific notification, the first specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 shown in FIGS. 10-56 (1) and (2)) and the first specific notification It is possible to execute a second specific notification (for example, display of right-handed hitting display 052IW007 shown in FIG. 10-56(1)). Also, when controlled to the advantageous state, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed (see FIG. 10-56 (1)), and after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, it is controlled to the special state. 10-56(2)). Therefore, it is possible to realize the notification corresponding to the value that can be given.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, when the control is performed to the special state after the variable display of the first identification information is performed, it is more advantageous than when the control is performed to the special state after the variable display of the second identification information is performed. It is controlled to a special state with a low degree (for example, a small hit A). Further, when the special state is controlled after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the specific notification is executed (see FIGS. 10-56 (2) and (3)). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification in consideration of the player's advantage.

Further, according to this characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to execute a variable display effect (for example, variable display of a decoration pattern) corresponding to at least the variable display of the first identification information. In addition, it is possible to execute a variable display effect in a common mode when it is controlled to a special state and when it is not controlled to a special state (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained , forcibly stop and display non-reach out-of-order symbols). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's recognizability of the control to the special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed. In addition, it is possible to smoothly digest the reserved memory stored in the second reserved storage means.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, the delay means for delaying the movement of the game medium (for example, the regulation piece provided in the variable winning ball device 6B) is provided on the upstream side of the variable means in the specific path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the timing at which the control to the special state is executed after the variable display of the second identification information is executed in the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen the attack countermeasures against the gaming machine.

Note that the delay means is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 provided on the right side of the game area, a passage member is provided as a delay means for moving the game ball so as to meander left and right. You may

In addition, according to this characterizing portion 052IW, the game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) and the effect based on the information from the game control means Controlling effect control means (for example, effect control CPU 120) is provided. In addition, the game control means controls execution of notification by notification means (for example, right-handed indicator 26) that performs predetermined notification. Moreover, the effect control means executes specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed notification LED 37) in response to notification by the notification means. Therefore, appropriate notification can be realized while reducing the processing load of the effect control means.

In this example, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the right hitting notification is executed during the big win game. Although a case is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a special variable winning ball device (left big winning hole) is provided on the left side of the game area, and a special variable winning ball device (right big winning hole) is also provided on the right side of the game area. When the big win is achieved by the variation display of the pattern, the left big prize opening is opened during the big win game, and when the big win is achieved by the variation display of the second special pattern, the right big prize opening is opened during the big win game. When applied to a gaming machine configured as above, when a big hit is achieved by the variable display of the second special symbol, while executing the right-handed notification during the big win game, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. It may be configured not to execute the right hitting notification during the big winning game when the big winning is achieved. Further, in the case of such a configuration, when a big hit is achieved by the variable display of the first special symbol, it may be configured to execute left-handed notification during the big win game. In other words, the specific notification executing means may be configured to execute the specific notification when the variable means (in this example, the right big winning hole) is controlled to be in an advantageous state of the type to be controlled. With such a configuration, when a big hit is achieved by the variable display of the first special symbol, the player is prevented from erroneously performing a right-handed operation by executing a left-handed notice during the big-hit game. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player.

In addition, in this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, the case where the right hitting notification is executed even during the KT state is shown, but such a case is shown. It is not limited to any form. For example, when applied to a gaming machine in which the second start winning opening is provided on the left side of the game area, it is configured not to execute the right-handed notification during the KT state, the high base state, or the time saving state. good too.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the lighting of the right hitting indicator 26 and the right hitting notification LED 37 only during the jackpot game, the right hitting indication 052IW007 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 to execute the right hitting notification. Although the case where it does is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, even during the second KT state (during the small winning RUSH), when executing the first variation display after the end of the big winning game, in addition to the lighting of the right hitting display 26 and the right hitting notification LED 37 It is also possible to display a right-hand hitting display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5, thereby executing the right-hand hitting notification. Alternatively, in this case, for example, in the ending period at the end of the jackpot game, in addition to the lighting of the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37, the right-handed display 052IW007 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. You may comprise so that right-handed information may be performed by .

Further, in this example, the right-handed display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, in addition to the relatively large right-handed display 052IW007 as shown in FIG. By, you may comprise right-handed information so that it can be performed.

In addition, the way of small hit control is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a plurality of special variable winning ball devices are provided, and the special variable winning ball devices (special winning openings) to be opened are different depending on the type of the small win, and the variable display of the first special symbol indicates the small win. It may be configured such that the selection ratio of the small hit type is different between when it becomes and when it becomes a small hit by the variable display of the second special symbol. In this case, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the small winning type released by the special variable winning ball device with a small number of winning balls (or the small winning type with a low winning rate) is likely to be selected. , when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the small winning type opened by the special variable winning ball device with a large number of winning balls (or the small winning type of the open mode with a high winning rate) is likely to be selected. can be configured to

In addition, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol, right-handed notification is performed during the small winning game (see FIG. 10-56 (2)), and the variation display of the first special symbol is performed. In the case where a small hit occurs, the case where the right hitting notification is not performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-56 (3)) is shown, but when a small hit occurs in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol It may be configured so that there is a case where the right-handed information is not performed even in the case. For example, in a normal state and in a situation where a left-handed operation should be performed, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, the right-handed information is not given during the small-hit game. You may

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player. is. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from the advantageous state. is. In addition, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for determining the big hit and the determination value for determining the small hit). In addition, it is controllable to a non-specific state (eg, non-variable probability state) and a specific state (eg, variable probability state) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the non-specific state. In addition, the determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for judging a big hit) for determining to derive and display a specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. A special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display is included. In addition, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. In addition, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the setting value, and is common when being controlled to a non-specific state and when being controlled to a specific state (FIGS. 10-3 and 10 -4). Therefore, appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, if the setting values change the lottery probability and type distribution other than the jackpot winning probability, the difference in the degree of advantage (difference in ball output performance) depending on the setting value may become too noticeable, and gambling may become excessively high. There is Therefore, in this characteristic part 052IW, the number of special determination values is made common regardless of the set value (small hit winning probability is made common), thereby preventing the difference in the degree of advantage from becoming excessively large depending on the set value. This prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

In addition, according to this characteristic portion 052IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol and can be executed in parallel). In addition, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information increases the frequency of special display results (for example, small winning symbols). Therefore, in a game machine that can be controlled to a special state, it is possible to realize appropriate playability.

In addition, according to this characterizing portion 052IW, as special states, a first special state (for example, the first KT state) and a second special state (for example, the second KT state) that is more advantageous than the first special state. Controllable. Therefore, in a game machine that can be controlled to the second special state, it is possible to realize appropriate playability.

In addition, according to this characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to execute a special suggestive effect (for example, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestive effect shown in FIG. 10-55) corresponding to the advantage of the special state. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved by suggesting the advantage of the special state.

In addition, according to the present characteristic part 052IW, a predetermined display result (eg, winning pattern) different from the specific display result (eg, big hit pattern) and the special display result (eg, small winning pattern) is derived as the display result of the variable display. When the displayed variable display is executed, it is possible to execute a setting value suggesting effect (eg, the setting value suggesting effect shown in FIG. 10-54) that suggests a setting value. Therefore, by executing the set value suggesting effect, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this example, the case where the small winning RUSH continuation suggestive effect and the set value suggestive effect are executed in the variation display of losing is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to execute a small winning RUSH continuation suggesting effect or a set value suggesting effect during a big winning game or a small winning game, and various modes are conceivable.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). In addition, the type of special state is determined using a special type determination value (for example, a small hit type determination value) for determining the type of special state. Also, the number of special type determination values is common regardless of the setting value (see FIG. 10-6). Therefore, it is possible to realize more appropriate playability.

Specifically, in this feature part 052IW, the number of special type determination values is common regardless of the setting value (the small hit type distribution is common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the setting value is excessive It prevents it from becoming large and prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-6, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the allocation of the small hit type is the same, but such It is not limited to any form. For example, it may be configured such that the determination ratio of the small hit type is changed according to which one of the set values "1" to "6", so that the set value makes a difference in the degree of advantage.

In addition, according to this characterizing portion 052IW, it is possible to control a plurality of advantageous states (for example, 10R variable probability big hit, 6R variable probability big hit, 6R normal big hit, 2R probability variable big hit, 2R normal big hit). Also, the type of the advantageous state is determined using the advantage type determination value (for example, the jackpot type determination value) for determining the type of the advantageous state. Also, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the setting value (see FIG. 10-5). Therefore, it is possible to realize more appropriate playability.

Specifically, in this characteristic part 052IW, the number of advantageous type determination values is made common regardless of the set value (the jackpot type distribution is made common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the set value is excessively large. to prevent gambling from becoming excessively high.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-5, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the allocation of the jackpot type is the same, but such It is not limited to modes. For example, it is also possible to vary the determination ratio of the jackpot type depending on which of the set values "1" to "6" is set, so that the set value makes a difference in the degree of advantage.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, the variable display mode is determined using the variable display mode determination value (for example, the variation pattern determination value) for determining the variable display mode. Also, the number of variable display mode determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-10). Therefore, it is possible to realize more appropriate playability.

Specifically, in this characteristic portion 052IW, the number of variable display mode determination values is made common regardless of the set value (the distribution of variation patterns is made common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the set value is excessive. It prevents it from becoming large and prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

In particular, if the selection ratio of the variation pattern differs depending on the set value, the period from one small win control to the next small win control will change, and even if the small win winning probability is common, it is advantageous in elements other than the big win lottery. The degree (difference in ball output performance) is greatly different, which is not preferable, but in this characteristic part 052IW, by making the selection ratio of the variation pattern common regardless of the set value, such a problem is prevented. ing.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-10, regardless of which of the setting values "1" to "6", the allocation of the fluctuation pattern is the same, but such It is not limited to modes. For example, by varying the determination ratio of the variation pattern according to which of the set values "1" to "6" and providing a difference in the variation time, the variation efficiency can be varied depending on the set value. It may be configured such that the degree of advantage differs depending on the value.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player. is. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from the advantageous state. is. In addition, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for determining the big hit and the determination value for determining the small hit). In addition, the determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for judging a big hit) for determining to derive and display a specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. A special judgment value for determining to derive and display (for example, a judgment value for judging a small hit), and a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result as the display result of the variable display. and a predetermined judgment value (for example, a judgment value for discrepancy judgment). In addition, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. Also, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the setting value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination values corresponding to all set values, and the number of predetermined determination values varies depending on the set values (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the setting value and improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to control to a non-specific state (eg, non-variable probability state) and a specific state (eg, variable probability state) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the non-specific state. Further, the predetermined judgment value is included in judgment values corresponding to specific states of all setting values (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value during the specific state.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed in parallel with the variable display). Further, the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is greater than the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and the variable display of the second identification information during the specific state The corresponding decision values include predetermined decision values (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information during the specific state.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information increases the frequency of the special display result. Also, when a variable display is executed in which a predetermined display result (for example, a lost pattern) is derived and displayed by being controlled to a special state, a setting value suggestion effect (for example, the setting shown in FIG. 10-54) is executed. value suggestion performance) can be executed. Therefore, by executing the set value suggesting effect, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (eg, second special symbol). Further, when a specific display result (for example, a big win pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) for the player. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from the advantageous state. is. In addition, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for determining the big hit and the determination value for determining the small hit). In addition, the determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for judging a big hit) for determining to derive and display a specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. A special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display is included. In addition, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. In addition, the number of special determination values among the determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-4), and the determination corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information The number of special determination values differs between the value and the determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game while realizing an appropriate playability.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148127), the display result of the variable display is advantageous for the control of deriving and displaying the variable display of the identification information with the predetermined display result (forced deviation stop). Control considering the degree could not be realized. Therefore, in the characteristic part 052IW, with the aim of providing a game machine capable of realizing control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, is also disclosed.

(Means A1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and includes variable display of first identification information (for example, first special symbol) and second identification information (for example, second special symbol). Symbol) variable display execution means (for example, a portion that executes steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) and variable display display Advantageous state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (for example, game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, a part that executes steps S122 to S125 in CPU 103) and a special state that is different from the advantageous state when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display ( For example, a special state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU103) step S126 ~ S128 in the controllable game state) and a variable display execution means) identifies one of the first identification information and the second identification information based on the derivation and display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display of the identification information of the first identification information and the second identification information A first control that does not derive and display the display result of the variable display of information (for example, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol continues is executed), and the second control (for example, display the lost symbol and stop (for example, the first special symbol or The variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped by the missing symbol)), and the first control and the second control are performed according to the display result derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of steps 052IWS1128A and S1128B. For example, In Modification 1, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of steps 052IWS1127A and S1127B. For example, in Modification 2, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of steps 052IWS1130C and S1130D. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to implement control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means A2) In means A1, special state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, it may be configured to include a part for executing step 052IWS2208 in the CPU 103). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value is likely to be awarded due to the special state.

(Means A3) In means A1 or A2, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a variable probability jackpot pattern) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot pattern). A specific state control means (for example, a specific state control means (for example, The game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the part that executes step 052IWS2206 in the CPU 103)), and the specific state control means controls to the specific state based on the derivation display of the first specific display result. (For example, control to the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game based on the variable probability big hit), control to the non-specific state based on the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, the end of the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot) It may be configured so as not to control to the probability changing state later). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not to be controlled to a specific state.

(Means A4) In any one of means A1 to A3, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, variable probability big hit pattern) and a second specific display result (for example, normal big hit pattern). , A specific state that is different from the advantageous state and is controllable to a specific state (e.g., high-probability state (variable state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (e.g., low-probability state) Control means (e.g., game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) step 052IWS2206 portion) is provided, and the specific state control means is controlled to an advantageous state when the specific area (e.g., V area 052IW104) based on the game medium (for example, game ball) passed, can be controlled to a specific state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU103), step 052IWS2404, S2405, S2204 to S2206), when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, compared to the case where the second specific display result is derived and displayed, the ratio is higher when controlled to be in an advantageous state. (As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variable jackpot, the opening period of the V-region opening/closing plate 052IW101 is long. On the other hand, FIG. 10-11 (2) 2, in a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is extremely short.). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control that considers whether or not the game medium is likely to pass through the specific area.

(Means A5) In any one of means A1 to A4, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, probability variable jackpot pattern) and a second specific display result (for example, normal jackpot pattern). , the derivation display of the first specific display result is more advantageous for the player than the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, it is controlled to a probability variable state after the end of the big win game), The variable display execution means is capable of deriving and displaying a special display result (for example, game control The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS64A and S64B (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). During execution of the variable display corresponding to , based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information, the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, a modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A and S1130A when N in step 052IWS1128A. See FIG. 10-67 (B).), variable second identification information When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the display and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the variable display of the second identification information is performed with the predetermined display result. (For example, in the third modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not perform the processing of steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B. Figures 10-66 and 10-67 See (E).). According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize control that considers whether the first identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is variably displayed.

(Means A6) In any one of means A1 to A5, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, variable probability jackpot pattern) and a second specific display result (for example, normal jackpot pattern). , the derivation display of the first specific display result is more advantageous for the player than the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, it is controlled to a probability variable state after the end of the big win game), Specific state control that can be controlled to a specific state (e.g., high probability state (probable variable state)) that is different from the advantageous state and is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (e.g., low probability state) means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) step 052IWS2206 portion), the variable display execution means, when it is controlled to a specific state, the first identification information and During the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the second identification information, the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Then, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, in the fourth modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) Step 052: Execute IWS1129A and S1130A (see FIGS. 10-68 and 10-69), and change one of the first identification information and the second identification information when controlled to the non-specific state. During the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the variable display of the one identification information is displayed as the predetermined display result. (For example, in the fourth modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not move to steps 052IWS1129A and S1129B when N in steps 052IWS1131A and S1131B. -68, see Figure 10-69). According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not the control is in a specific state.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148127), the display result of the variable display is advantageous for the control of deriving and displaying the variable display of the identification information based on the predetermined display result (forced deviation stop). Control considering the degree could not be realized. Therefore, in the present characteristic part 052IW, with the aim of providing a game machine capable of realizing control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, is also disclosed.

(Means B1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and includes variable display of first identification information (for example, first special symbol) and second identification information (for example, second special symbol). Symbol) variable display execution means (for example, a portion that executes steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) and variable display display Advantageous state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (for example, game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, a part that executes steps S122 to S125 in CPU 103) and a special state that is different from the advantageous state when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display ( For example, a special state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU103) step S126 ~ S128 in the controllable game state) and a variable display execution means) is capable of deriving and displaying a special display result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (Specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS64A and S64B. See FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4.), variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is executed, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the first control (for example, the first variable time The updating of the timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed), and the variable display of the one identification information is a predetermined display result (for example, The second control (for example, to display the missing symbol and stop (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed by the missing symbol)). Which of the first control and the second control is executed depends on the display result derived and displayed in the variable display of one identification information (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically , the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B and S1130B according to the determination results of steps 052IWS1128A and S1128B. For example, in Modification 1, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of steps 052IWS1127A and S1127B. For example, in Modification 2, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of steps 052IWS1130C and S1130D. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to implement control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means B2) In means B1, special state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, it may be configured to include a portion for executing step 052IWS2208 in the CPU 103). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value is likely to be awarded due to the special state.

(Means B3) In means B1 or B2, the specific display results include a first specific display result (eg, variable probability big hit pattern) and a second specific display result (eg, normal jackpot pattern). A specific state control means (for example, a specific state control means (for example, The game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the part that executes step 052IWS2206 in the CPU 103)), and the specific state control means controls to the specific state based on the derivation display of the first specific display result. (For example, control to the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game based on the variable probability big hit), control to the non-specific state based on the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, the end of the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot) It may be configured so as not to control to the probability changing state later). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not to be controlled to a specific state.

(Means B4) In any one of means B1 to B3, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, probability variable jackpot pattern) and a second specific display result (for example, normal jackpot pattern). , A specific state that is different from the advantageous state and is controllable to a specific state (e.g., high-probability state (variable state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (e.g., low-probability state) Control means (e.g., game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) step 052IWS2206 portion) is provided, and the specific state control means is controlled to an advantageous state when the specific area (e.g., V area 052IW104) based on the game medium (for example, game ball) passed, can be controlled to a specific state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU103), step 052IWS2404, S2405, S2204 to S2206), when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, compared to the case where the second specific display result is derived and displayed, the ratio is higher when controlled to be in an advantageous state. (As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variable jackpot, the opening period of the V-region opening/closing plate 052IW101 is long. On the other hand, FIG. 10-11 (2) 2, in a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is extremely short.). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control that considers whether or not the game medium is likely to pass through the specific area.

(Means B5) In any one of means B1 to B4, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, variable probability big hit pattern) and a second specific display result (for example, normal big hit pattern). , the derivation display of the first specific display result is more advantageous for the player than the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, it is controlled to a probability variable state after the end of the big win game), The variable display execution means derives and displays the special display result in the variable display of the second identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the first identification information variable display. , the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, in the third modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is N at step 052IWS1128A, step 052IWS1129A, S1130A (See FIG. 10-67(B).) During the execution of the variable display of the second identification information corresponding to the second specific display result, the special display in the variable display of the first identification information When the result is derived and displayed, the variable display of the second identification information is not controlled to be derived and displayed with the predetermined display result (for example, in the third modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) 10-66 and 10-67 (E)). According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize control that considers whether the first identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is variably displayed.

(Means B6) In any one of means B1 to B5, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, probability variable jackpot pattern) and a second specific display result (for example, normal jackpot pattern). , the derivation display of the first specific display result is more advantageous for the player than the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, it is controlled to a probability variable state after the end of the big win game), Specific state control that can be controlled to a specific state (e.g., high probability state (probable variable state)) that is different from the advantageous state and is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (e.g., low probability state) means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) step 052IWS2206 portion), the variable display execution means, when it is controlled to a specific state, the first identification information and During the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the second identification information, the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Then, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, in the fourth modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) Step 052: Execute IWS1129A and S1130A (see FIGS. 10-68 and 10-69), and change one of the first identification information and the second identification information when controlled to the non-specific state. During the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the variable display of the one identification information is displayed as the predetermined display result. (For example, in the fourth modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not move to steps 052IWS1129A and S1129B when N in steps 052IWS1131A and S1131B. -68, see Figure 10-69). According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not the control is in a specific state.

It should be noted that the configuration indicated by the characterizing portion 052IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration indicated by the characterizing portion 21TM to form a gaming machine. For example, by applying the configuration in which the setting value shown in the characteristic portion 21TM can be changed to the present characteristic portion 052IW, the setting value suggestion effect can be executed, or the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect can be executed. , configured to be capable of executing a right-handed notification, configured to be capable of executing a suggestive effect at the time of over winning, configured to be capable of executing a suggestive effect at the time of winning a small prize, and configured to be capable of executing a suggestive effect of displaying the number of prize balls. You may Further, for example, a configuration that allows the setting value shown in the characteristic portion 21TM to be changed is applied to the present characteristic portion 052IW, and during execution of the variable display of one special symbol, a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the other special symbol. In this case, the variable display of one of the special symbols may be forcibly stopped or continued with the missing symbol.

Also, when applying the configuration shown in the characteristic portion 021TM, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the configuration may be such that the set value is suggested by changing the aspect of the ending effect. In this case, for example, in the ending production, mode transition notification including small win RUSH and chance mode is executed, card forgetting prevention notification such as prepaid card is executed, and manufacturer logo display is displayed. By changing the display mode of mode transition notification, card forgetting prevention notification, manufacturer's logo display, and changing the display mode of the image displayed at the same time, the setting value is suggested. You may

(Description of Characteristic Portion 16SH)
Next, the gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 16SH will be described. The gaming machine relating to the characteristic part 16SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area after the predetermined condition is established. In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 that can be controlled to a big win game state based on the passage of a game ball through a passage gate 41 after the big win symbols are derived and displayed will be described as an example.

The gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 16SH includes setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, in the setting change mode in the power-on processing shown in FIGS. It has a configurable CPU 103 .

Further, the gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 16SH includes an effect execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect for suggesting the setting means. The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing a gate-passing waiting-time suggestive effect suggesting the current set value among the set values of the jackpot winning probability set in six stages from 1 to 6. A control CPU 120 is provided.

Then, the effect executing means related to the characteristic part 16SH can execute the setting suggesting effect during the period from when the predetermined condition is satisfied until the game medium passes through the specific area. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a gate passage waiting time suggesting effect during a gate passage waiting period from after the big hit symbol is derived and displayed until the game ball passes through the passage gate 41.例文帳に追加

In addition, the gaming machine according to the characteristic portion 16SH can execute a shooting notification for notifying that the game medium should be shot toward the specific area during the period from when the predetermined condition is satisfied until the game medium passes through the specific area. is. In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, a game ball is shot aiming at the passage gate 41 during a gate passage waiting period from when the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed until the game ball passes the passage gate 41.例文帳に追加It is possible to execute a right-handed notification that prompts the player to hit.

In addition, the effect executing means related to the characterizing part 16SH suggests the setting by executing the launch notification in one of a plurality of special modes different from the normal mode as the setting suggesting effect. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment uses a special effect in which the background color is one of "green", "red", and "rainbow color" different from "white", as a suggestive effect when waiting for passage through the gate. The present setting value is suggested by suggesting the present setting value by executing the right hitting information of the aspect.

In addition, the gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 16SH can execute the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute the first special game and the second special game in parallel.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the characteristic portion 16SH is a variable decoration capable of executing the variable display of the decoration identification information in response to either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information. A display execution means is provided. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with an effect control CPU 120 capable of executing variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to either the first special game or the second special game. .

In addition, the effect executing means related to the characteristic part 16SH is controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display in which the variable display of the decoration identification information is executed, and the variable display in which the variable display of the decoration identification information is not executed. It is possible to execute the setting suggesting effect at a different rate between the case of being controlled to an advantageous state based on. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the special game in which the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed, and the special game in which the variable display of the decorative symbols is not executed. It is possible to execute the gate passage waiting time suggestive effect at a different rate between when the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the above.

Also, the gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 16SH can be controlled to a plurality of types of advantageous states. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can be controlled to a jackpot game state of a plurality of jackpot types.

Further, the effect executing means related to the characteristic portion 16SH can execute the setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the type of the advantageous state. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the gate passage waiting time suggestion effect at different ratios according to the jackpot type of the jackpot game state.

Also, the gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 16SH has different advantages for the player depending on the type of advantageous state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state differs depending on the jackpot type.

Further, the effect executing means related to the characteristic portion 16SH can execute the setting suggesting effect at different ratios according to the degree of advantage of the advantageous state. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the gate passage waiting time suggestion effect at different ratios according to the number of rounds in the jackpot game state.

Also, in the gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 16SH, the game state after the end of the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the advantageous state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the game state after the jackpot game state ends differs depending on the jackpot type.

Further, the effect executing means related to the characteristic part 16SH can execute the setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the game state after the end of the advantageous state. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the gate passage waiting time suggestion effect at different rates according to the game state after the end of the jackpot game state.

Also, the gaming machine according to the characteristic portion 16SH can perform variable display based on the establishment of the start condition. In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, the first starting condition is established by detecting the game ball passing through the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A by the first starting hole switch 22A. Afterwards, the first special game can be executed based on the establishment of the first start condition, for example, by the end of the previous first special game or the jackpot game state. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment sets the second starting condition by detecting the game ball passing through the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B by the second starting hole switch 22B. is established, the second special game can be executed based on the fact that the second start condition is established by, for example, the end of the previous second special game or the jackpot game state.

Also, in the gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 16SH, the start condition is not satisfied during the period from when the predetermined condition is satisfied until the game medium passes through the specific area. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, at step 052IWS50A in the first special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. Step 052 IWS50A;N), the first start condition is not established, and the first special game is not executed. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating gate passage waiting processing at step 052IWS50B in the second special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 10-21. If so (step 052IWS50B; N), the second start condition is not satisfied and the second special game is not executed.

(Suggestion effect processing when waiting for gate passage)
FIG. 11-1 is a flow chart showing an example of gate passage waiting time suggestion effect processing executed in step S173 in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the gate-passing wait suggestive effect process shown in FIG. 11-1, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the right-handed notification is being executed (step 16SHS1). Here, the effect control CPU 120 aims at the passage gate 41 during the gate passage waiting period from after the big hit pattern is derived and displayed until the game ball passes through the passage gate 41. Execute the right-handed notification that prompts the player. In the process of step 16SHS1, for example, a right-handed alert flag is provided which is set to ON when right-handed alert is executed, and determination is made based on whether or not this right-handed alert flag is in the ON state. do it.

If it is not during execution of right-handed information in step 16SHS1 (step 16SHS1; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a gate passage waiting designation command is received (step 16SHS2). Here, the gate passage waiting designation command is an effect control command designating that the gate passage waiting period for waiting for the game ball to pass through the passage gate 41 by deriving and displaying the jackpot symbol. For example, in the role product control process shown in FIG. 6, when updating the value of the role product control process flag to "1" corresponding to the gate passage wait process, the CPU 103 produces a gate passage wait designation command. Transmission settings for transmission to the control board 12 are made.

When the gate passage waiting designation command is not received in step 16SHS2 (step 16SHS2; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the gate passage waiting time suggestion effect processing. In this way, even if the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the notification of hitting to the right is not started when the gate passage waiting designation command is not received.

On the other hand, when the gate passage waiting designation command is received in step 16SHS2 (step 16SHS2; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence and type of the gate passage waiting suggesting effect (step 16SHS3). In the process of step 16SHS3, for example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a suggested effect during waiting for gate passage, which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or a random counter for effect, is extracted, and a gate stored in the ROM 121 in advance and prepared is extracted. The presence or absence and type of the gate-passage-waiting suggestive effect may be determined by referring to the passage-waiting-time suggestive effect determination table or the like.

(Suggestion effect determination table when waiting for gate passage)
FIG. 11-2 and FIG. 11-3 show an example of the configuration of the gate-passing wait suggesting effect determination table. As shown in FIGS. 11-2 and 11-3, in the gate-passing waiting suggestion effect determination table, for example, according to which of "1" to "6" the current set value of the jackpot winning probability is , "no suggestion effect when waiting for gate passage", "suggestion effect when waiting for gate passage A", "suggestion effect when waiting for gate passage B", or "suggestion effect when waiting for gate passage C". All you have to do is

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-2 and 11-3, the types of gate-passage waiting suggestive effects include "gate-passage waiting suggestive effect A", "gate-passage waiting suggestive effect B", "Gate Pass Waiting Suggestion Effect C" is set.

Here, when the gate-passing waiting-time suggestive effect is not executed, the background is set to "white" during the gate-passing waiting period after the big win pattern is derived and displayed until the game ball passes through the passing gate 41. Right-handed information is executed.

On the other hand, when the gate passage waiting time suggestive effect is executed, the background is different from "white" during the gate passage waiting period after the big win pattern is derived and displayed until the game ball passes through the passage gate 41.例文帳に追加A right-handed notification of a special mode that becomes a color is executed. For example, when the "gate-passing waiting time suggestive effect A" is executed, the background of the right-handed informing is displayed in "green". Further, when the "suggestion effect B when waiting for gate passage" is executed, the background at the time of notification of hitting to the right is displayed in "red". Further, when the "gate-passing waiting time suggestive effect C" is executed, the background at the time of notification of hitting to the right is displayed in "rainbow color".

In the processing of step 16SHS3, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the contents stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122 and identifies the current set value. Then, based on the determination value corresponding to the specified set value, the presence or absence and type of the gate passage waiting time suggestive effect are determined.

The suggested effect determination table for waiting to pass through the gate shown in FIG. This table is referred to when the display result is a "jackpot".

Here, the effect control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the first special game in the normal state, and variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the second special game in the KT state. Execute. Therefore, the gate-passing wait suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 11-2 is a table to be referred to when the display result of the special figure game corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbols is "big hit".

According to the gate passage waiting suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 11-2, the "gate passage wait suggestive effect A" is executed regardless of whether the current set value is any of the set values "1" to "6". can be determined According to such a configuration, when the display result of the special game corresponding to the variable display of the decoration pattern is "big hit", the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 after the big win pattern is derived and displayed. During the gate passage waiting period up to, when the "gate passage waiting time suggestive effect A" is executed and the background at the time of right-handed notification is displayed in "green", the current set value is the set value "1" to "6 It is not suggested definitively which of

Further, according to the gate passage waiting suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. , but if the current setting value is any of the setting values '1' to '3', it is decided to execute 'waiting for gate passage time suggestive effect B'. I don't get it. According to such a configuration, when the display result of the special game corresponding to the variable display of the decoration pattern is "big hit", the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 after the big win pattern is derived and displayed. During the waiting period for passing the gate, the ``suggestion effect B when waiting for the passage of the gate'' is executed, and when the background at the time of notification of hitting to the right is displayed in ``red'', the current set value is the set value ``4'' to ``6''. It is definitely suggested that it is either

Further, according to the gate passage waiting suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 11-2, when the current set value is the set value "6", it is decided to execute the "gate passage wait suggestive effect C". However, when the current set value is any one of "1" to "5", it cannot be decided to execute the "waiting for gate passage time suggestive effect C". According to such a configuration, when the display result of the special game corresponding to the variable display of the decoration pattern is "big hit", the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 after the big win pattern is derived and displayed. During the waiting period until passing the gate, the ``suggestion effect C when waiting for passage of the gate'' is executed, and when the background at the time of notification of the right-handed stroke is displayed in ``rainbow color'', the current set value is the set value ``6''. is definitely suggested.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 refers to different gate-passage waiting suggestive effect determination tables depending on which jackpot type "jackpot" has been achieved. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 refers to different gate passage wait time suggestion effect determination tables according to the number of rounds in the big win game state and the game state after the end of the big win game state.

11-2(A) is a table to be referred to when the display result of the second special game is "2R normal jackpot" in the KT state. 11-2(A), the display result of the special figure game corresponding to the variable display of the decoration pattern is "big hit", and the big win game state of 2 rounds is reached. It is a table that is controlled and referred to when transitioning to a low probability state after the end of the jackpot game state.

11-2(B) is a table to be referred to when the display result of the first special game is "6R normal jackpot" in the normal state. 11-2(B), the display result of the special figure game corresponding to the variable display of the decoration pattern is "big win", and the big win game state of 6 rounds is reached. It is a table that is controlled and referred to when transitioning to a low probability state after the end of the jackpot game state.

11-2(C) shows a suggestion effect determination table when waiting for gate passage. It is a table referred to when the display result of the 2 special game is "6R probability variable jackpot". 11-2(C), the display result of the special figure game corresponding to the variable display of the decoration pattern is "big win", and the big win game state of 6 rounds is reached. It is a table that is controlled and referred to when transitioning to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state.

11-2 (D) is a table to be referred to when the display result of the second special figure game is "2R probability variable big hit" in the KT state. 11-2(D), the display result of the special figure game corresponding to the variable display of the decoration pattern is "big hit", and the big win game state of 2 rounds is reached. It is a table that is controlled and referred to when transitioning to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state.

11-2 (E) shows a suggestion effect determination table when waiting for gate passage, when the display result of the first special figure game is "10R probability variable big hit" in the normal state, or in the KT state, the second It is a table referred to when the display result of the 2 special game is "10R probability variable jackpot". 11-2(E), the display result of the special figure game corresponding to the variable display of the decoration pattern is "big win", and the 10-round big win game state is reached. It is a table that is controlled and referred to when transitioning to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-29, the display result of the first special game is "6R normal jackpot" in the normal state, and the display result of the second special game in the KT state. becomes "2R normal jackpot", after the jackpot game state ends, the state shifts to the low probability/first KT state. Therefore, when the display result of the first special game is "6R normal jackpot" in the normal state, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is large, so the second special game in the KT state. It can be said that the degree of advantage for the player is greater than when the display result is "2R normal jackpot".

In this embodiment, according to the gate-passing waiting suggestive effect determination table shown in FIGS. 11-2 (A) and (B), the display result of the first special figure game is "6R normal jackpot" in the normal state. In this case, the determination ratio of the "suggestion effect when waiting to pass the gate A" is lower than when the display result of the second special game is "2R normal jackpot" in the KT state, and the "gate The determination ratios of "waiting for passage B" and "suggestive effect C for waiting for gate passage" are high. According to such a configuration, if the game state after the end of the big win game state is the same, the larger the number of rounds in the big win game state, in other words, the greater the degree of advantage for the player. ” indicates that the current setting value is one of the setting values “4” to “6”, or that the current setting value is the setting value “6”. easy.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-29, when the display result of the first special game is "6R probability variable big hit" in the normal state, and when the display result of the second special game is in the KT state, In both cases of the "6R probability variable big win", after the big win game state ends, the state shifts to the high probability/1st KT state, whereas the display of the first special game in the normal state. When the result is "6R normal jackpot", after the jackpot game state ends, the state shifts to the low probability/first KT state. Therefore, when the display result of the first special figure game is "6R probability variation big hit" in the normal state, or when the display result of the second special figure game is "6R probability variation big hit" in the KT state. Since the state is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big win game state, it is more advantageous to the player than the case where the display result of the first special game is "6R normal big win" in the normal state. It can be said that the degree is large.

In this embodiment, according to the gate-passing waiting suggestive effect determination table shown in FIGS. 11-2 (B) and (C), the display result of the first special figure game is "6R probability variable big hit" in the normal state. , or if the display result of the second special game is "6R probability variable big hit" in the KT state, the display result of the first special game is "6R normal big hit" in the normal state. ”, the decision ratio of “waiting for gate passage A suggestive effect A” is lower, and the decision ratio of “waiting for gate passage suggestive effect B” and “gate pass suggestive effect C” is higher. . According to such a configuration, when the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is the same, the case where the game state after the jackpot game state ends is a higher probability state, in other words, is advantageous for the player. If the degree of "jackpot" is large, the current setting value is one of the setting values "4" to "6", or the current setting value is the setting value "6". is likely to be definitely suggested.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-29, when the display result of the second special game is "2R probability variable big hit" in the KT state, after the big win gaming state ends, the high probability/2nd KT state is entered. On the other hand, when the display result of the first special figure game is "6R probability variation big hit" in the normal state, and when the display result of the second special figure game is "6R probability variation big hit" in the KT state. In either case, after the jackpot game state is over, the state shifts to the high probability/first KT state. Therefore, when the display result of the second special game is "2R probability variable big win" in the KT state, after the big win game state is over, the game ball easily enters the special winning hole and the prize ball can be obtained. Since it is controlled to the second KT state that is easy to understand, when the display result of the first special game is "6R probability variable big hit" in the normal state, or when the display result of the second special game is in the KT state. It can be said that the degree of advantage for the player is greater than in the case of the "6R probability variable big hit".

In this embodiment, according to the gate-passing waiting suggesting effect determination table shown in FIGS. 11-2 (C) and (D), the display result of the second special figure game is "2R probability variable big hit" in the KT state. In this case, when the display result of the first special figure game is "6R probability variation big hit" in the normal state, or when the display result of the second special figure game is "6R probability variation big hit" in the KT state ”, the decision ratio of “waiting for gate passage A suggestive effect A” is lower, and the decision ratio of “waiting for gate passage suggestive effect B” and “gate pass suggestive effect C” is higher. . According to such a configuration, even if the number of rounds in the big win game state is small, after the big win game state ends, the second KT state is reached in which the game balls are likely to enter the special winning hole and the prize balls are easily obtained. The current set value is any one of the set values "4" to "6" when it is controlled, in other words, when it becomes a "jackpot" that is more advantageous to the player. or that the current set value is the set value "6".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-29, when the display result of the first special game is "10R probability variable big hit" in the normal state, or when the display result of the second special game is in the KT state In both cases of "10R probability variable big win" and "2R probability variable big win" in the KT state, the display result of the second special game is "2R probability variable big win", after the big win gaming state ends, Transition to high probability/second KT state. Therefore, when the display result of the first special figure game is "10R probability variation big hit" in the normal state, or when the display result of the second special figure game is "10R probability variation big hit" in the KT state. Since the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is large, it can be said that the degree of advantage for the player is greater than when the display result of the second special game is "2R probability variable jackpot" in the KT state. .

In this embodiment, according to the gate-passing waiting suggestive effect determination table shown in FIGS. If it becomes, or if the display result of the second special game is "10R probability variable big hit" in the KT state, the display result of the second special diagram game is "2R probability variable big hit" in the KT state ”, the decision ratio of “waiting for gate passage A suggestive effect A” is lower, and the decision ratio of “waiting for gate passage suggestive effect B” and “gate pass suggestive effect C” is higher. . According to such a configuration, if the game state after the end of the big win game state is the same, the larger the number of rounds in the big win game state, in other words, the greater the degree of advantage for the player. ” indicates that the current setting value is one of the setting values “4” to “6”, or that the current setting value is the setting value “6”. easy.

Thus, in this embodiment, the display result of the first special game is "big hit" in the normal state, and the display result of the second special game is "big hit" in the KT state. In other words, when the display result of the special game corresponding to the variable display of the decoration pattern is "big hit", the degree of advantage for the player is large. In the case, it is easier to definitely suggest that the current setting value is one of the setting values "4" to "6" or that the current setting value is the setting value "6".

Here, the effect control CPU 120 derives and displays the jackpot symbols so that the jackpot type can be specified, and also derives and displays the jackpot symbols so that the jackpot type cannot be specified, and also allows the jackpot type to be specified. There is a case where the production during the jackpot is executed.

Therefore, when the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed so that the jackpot type can be specified, the jackpot type of "jackpot" that is more advantageous to the player is the more likely to be the current setting as the gate passage waiting time suggestive effect. It is possible to increase the expectation that the value is one of the set values "4" to "6" or that the current set value is the set value "6" is definitely suggested.

On the other hand, when the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed so that the jackpot type cannot be specified, the current set value is any one of the set values ``4'' to ``6'' as a suggestive effect when waiting for passage through the gate. Alternatively, by definitely suggesting that the current set value is the set value "6", it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the "jackpot" is a type of "jackpot" that is highly advantageous to the player. can.

The suggested effect determination table for waiting for passage through the gate shown in FIG. This table is referred to when the display result is a "jackpot".

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the first special game in the normal state, and variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the second special game in the KT state. Execute the display. Therefore, the gate-passing wait suggesting effect determination table shown in FIG. 11-3 is a table to be referred to when the display result of the special symbol game that does not correspond to the variable display of decorative symbols is "big hit".

Refer to the gate passage waiting time suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. It is a table where

According to the gate-passing-waiting suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 11-3(A), the gate-passing-waiting suggestive effect is not executed even if the current set value is any of the set values "1" to "6". It is decided that

In the gaming machine configured to be controllable to the KT state, by performing a right-handed operation in the normal state, the second start winning port, which is easy to start and win, is made to start and win, and the second special game is performed, while the first start is performed. It is also possible to make the first special game by starting the winning opening, but according to the configuration as shown in FIG. Even if the display result of the second special game that does not correspond to the display is a "big hit", the suggestion effect when waiting for the passage of the gate is not executed, so the current set value is suggested by the suggestion effect when waiting for the passage of the gate. to prevent such exploits from being promoted.

11-3(B) to 11-3(D), the gate passage wait time suggestive effect determination table shows that the display result of the first special game that does not correspond to the variable display of the decoration pattern is "big win" in the KT state. This table is referenced when

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-29, when the display result of the first special game is "big hit", the second KT is higher than when the display result of the second special game is "big hit". The rate of transitioning to a state or the rate of transitioning to a high probability state is low. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-7, when the display result of the first special symbol game that does not correspond to the variable display of decorative symbols in the KT state is "big hit", the variation time is set to "10 seconds". It's becoming

11-2 and 11-3 (B) to (D), according to the gate-passing-waiting suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. In the case of "big hit", the display result of the first special game is "big hit" in the normal state, or the display result of the second special game is "big hit" in the KT state. Compared to the case of , the decision ratio of "gate passage waiting suggestive effect A" is lower, and the decision ratio of "gate passage waiting suggestive effect B" and "gate pass wait suggestive effect C" is higher.

Therefore, even though the KT state is controlled to be more advantageous for the player than the normal state, when the display result of the first special game is "big hit", the ratio of shifting to the second KT state, , not only the rate of transition to the high probability state is low, but also the KT state ends in 10 seconds, which may reduce interest, as shown in FIGS. 11-3 (B) to (D). According to such a configuration, when the display result of the first special game is "big hit" in the KT state, the display result of the first special game is "big hit" in the normal state. or when the display result of the second special game is "big hit" when in the KT state, the current setting value is one of the setting values "4" to "6", Since it is easily suggested that the current set value is the set value "6", if the current set value is a high setting of "4" or higher, the desire to continue playing the game will be increased. can be enhanced.

Then, even when the display result of the first special game is "big hit" in the KT state, the effect control CPU 120 passes through different gates according to which jackpot type is "big hit". Refer to the waiting time suggestion effect determination table. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 refers to different gate passage wait time suggestion effect determination tables according to the number of rounds in the big win game state and the game state after the end of the big win game state.

11-3(B) shows a suggestion effect determination table when waiting for gate passage, when the display result of the first special figure game that does not correspond to the variable display of the decoration pattern in the KT state is "10R probability variable big hit". is a table referenced by 11-3(B), the display result of the first special figure game that does not correspond to the variable display of decorative symbols is "big hit" in the KT state. It is a table to be referred to when the game is controlled to a 10-round jackpot game state and shifted to a high-probability state after the jackpot game state ends.

11-3(C) shows a suggestion effect determination table at the time of waiting for gate passage, when the display result of the first special figure game that does not correspond to the variable display of the decoration pattern in the KT state is "6R probability variable big hit". is a table referenced by 11-3(C), the display result of the first special figure game that does not correspond to the variable display of decorative symbols in the KT state is "big hit". It is a table to be referred to when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state of 6 rounds and shifted to a high-probability state after the jackpot game state ends.

11-3(D) shows a suggestion effect determination table when waiting for passage through a gate, in the case where the display result of the first special figure game that does not correspond to the variable display of decorative symbols in the KT state is "6R normal jackpot". is a table referenced by In other words, in the gate-passing waiting suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. This is a table to be referred to when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state of 6 rounds and shifted to a low-probability state after the jackpot game state ends.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-29, when the display result of the first special game is "10 normal jackpot", after the jackpot game state ends, it is necessary to shift to the high probability/second KT state. On the other hand, when the display result of the first special game is "6R probability variable big win", after the big win game state ends, the state shifts to the high probability/first KT state. Therefore, when the display result of the first special game is "10 normal jackpot", after the jackpot game state ends, the second KT state is entered in which game balls are likely to enter the special prize winning opening and prize balls are easily obtained. Since it is controlled, it can be said that the degree of advantage for the player is greater than when the display result of the first special game is "6R probability variable big hit".

In this embodiment, according to the gate passage wait time suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. If this is the case, the decision ratio of "Suggestion effect when waiting for gate passage A" is lower than when the display result of the first special game is "10R probability variable jackpot" in the KT state, and "Gate The determination ratios of "waiting for passage B" and "suggestive effect C for waiting for gate passage" are high. According to such a configuration, when the display result of the first special figure game is "big win" in the KT state, the one with the smaller number of rounds in the big win game state, in other words, the player If the current setting value is one of the setting values "4" to "6", or if the current setting value is the setting value "6" It is easy to suggest something with certainty.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-29, when the display result of the first special game is "6R probability variable jackpot", after the jackpot game state ends, the transition to the high probability/1st KT state is made. , When the display result of the first special game is "6R normal jackpot", after the jackpot game state ends, the state shifts to the low probability/first KT state. Therefore, when the display result of the first special game is "6R probability variable big hit", the display result of the first special game is " It can be said that the degree of advantage for the player is greater than in the case of a 6R normal jackpot.

In this embodiment, according to the gate-passing-waiting suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 11-3(C) and (D), the display result of the first special figure game is "6R normal jackpot" in the KT state. If this is the case, the decision ratio of "Suggestion effect when waiting for gate passage A" is lower than when the display result of the first special game is "6R probability variable jackpot" in the KT state, and "Gate The determination ratios of "waiting for passage B" and "suggestive effect C for waiting for gate passage" are high. According to such a configuration, when the display result of the first special game is "big win" in the KT state, it is better to be controlled to the low probability state after the big win game state is finished. Then, in the case of a "jackpot" with a small degree of advantage for the player, the current set value is any one of the set values "4" to "6", or the current set value is set. The value "6" is likely to be definitely suggested.

As described above, in this embodiment, if the display result of the first special symbol game that does not correspond to the variable display of decorative symbols in the KT state is a "jackpot", the degree of advantage for the player is small. In the case of a "jackpot", it is more deterministic that the current setting value is one of the setting values "4" to "6", or that the current setting value is the setting value "6". easy to suggest.

Therefore, when the display result of the first special symbol game is "big win" in the KT state, regardless of whether or not the big win pattern is derived and displayed so that the type of the big win can be specified, the player can The smaller the degree of advantage of the "jackpot", the higher the motivation to continue the game when the current set value is "4" or higher.

Returning to the description of FIG. 11-1, after executing the process of step 16SHS3, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the gate passage waiting time suggestion effect based on the determination result of step 16SHS2 (step 16SHS4 ).

In step 16SHS4, when the suggestion effect at the time of waiting for gate passage is not executed (16SHS4; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes normal mode right-handed notification in which the background is "white" (step 16SHS5), and waits for gate passage. The hour suggesting effect processing is terminated. In this way, when the gate-passing wait time suggestive effect is not executed, after the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the normal mode right-handed notification with a "white" background is started.

On the other hand, if the gate passage wait time suggestive effect is to be executed in step 16SHS4 (16SHS4; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes a special mode right-handed notification in which the background is a color different from "white" (step 16SHS6), the gate-passage-waiting suggestion effect processing is terminated. In this way, when the performance suggestive of waiting for passage through the gate is executed, after the big win pattern is derived and displayed, the notification of hitting to the right in a special mode in which the background is a color different from ``white'' is started.

If the hitting right notification is being executed at step 16SHS1 (step 16SHS1; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hitting right notification in the special mode is being executed (step 16SHS7). In the process of step 16SHS7, for example, a special mode right-handed notification flag is provided that is set to an ON state when executing a special mode right-handed notification, and this special mode right-handed notification flag is in an ON state. The determination may be made based on whether or not

When the right-handed notification of the special mode is not being executed at step 16SHS7 (step 16SHS7; No), that is, when the right-handed notification of the normal mode is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 makes the background "white". The right hitting notification in the normal mode is continuously executed (step 16SHS5), and the gate passage waiting time suggestive effect processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the right-handed notification of the special mode is being executed at step 16SHS7 (step 16SHS7; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the gate passage designation command is received (step 16SHS8).

If the gate passage designation command is not received in step 16SHS8 (step 16SHS8; No), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the special mode right-handed notification in which the background is a color different from "white" (step 16SHS6), the gate-passage-waiting suggestion effect processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the gate passage waiting designation command is received in step 16SHS8 (step 16SHS8; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 ends the special mode right-handed notification, and the background becomes "white" in the normal mode. A right hitting notification is executed (step 16SHS5). In this way, when the gate-passing wait time suggestive effect is executed, the normal mode right-handed notification is switched to the normal mode right-handed notification based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41. - 特許庁

(Example of production operation of suggestion production when waiting for gate passage)
FIG. 11-4 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the gate passage waiting time suggestive effect in this embodiment.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in the special figure per waiting process shown in FIG. At the same time, the same decoration symbols temporarily stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 are confirmed and displayed.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image as shown in FIG. A small pattern 16SH1 may be displayed in the lower right portion of the display area of the device 5 as an image corresponding to the decoration pattern that has become difficult to see. In that case, the effect control CPU 120 also causes the small symbols to be confirmed and displayed when the decorative symbols are to be confirmed and displayed.

After deriving and displaying the jackpot symbol in this way, when it is determined not to execute the gate passage waiting time suggestion effect in the gate passage waiting time suggestion effect processing shown in FIG. As shown in 11-4 (B1), the normal form of hitting to the right notification with a "white" background is started. In the right-handed notification executed at this time, the effect control CPU 120, for example, prompts the player to shoot the game ball to the right of the game area. display. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays, for example, a launch promotion display 16SH3 prompting the player to aim at the passage gate 41 and launch the game ball.

On the other hand, after deriving and displaying the jackpot symbol, it is determined to execute the suggestion effect of waiting for gate passage, for example, "suggestion effect of waiting for gate passage C" in the process of suggesting effect of waiting for gate passage shown in FIG. 11-1. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 starts a right hitting notification in a special mode different from the normal mode in which the background is "rainbow" as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B2). Also in the hitting to the right notification executed at this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the hitting to the right notification image 16SH2A, the hitting to the right notification image 16SH2B, and the firing promotion display 16SH3.

When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 as shown in FIG. 11-4(C) while performing the right-handed notification in this manner, the effect control CPU 120 executes the control as shown in FIG. 11-4(D). Then, the fanfare production at the start of the big hit is started.

In addition, after starting the fanfare effect, the effect control CPU 120 executes the right hitting notification in the normal mode. In the hitting right notification executed at this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays, for example, a hitting right notification image 16SH2B prompting the player to shoot the game ball to the right of the game area.

That is, when the right hitting notification of the normal mode is executed during the gate passage waiting period after the big hit symbol is derived and displayed until the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the effect control CPU 120 starts the fanfare effect. Even after that, the right hitting notification in the normal mode is continued and executed. On the other hand, when the right hitting notification of the special mode is executed in the gate passage waiting period from when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed until the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the game ball passes. Based on having passed through the gate 41, the special mode hitting right notification is ended, and the normal mode hitting right notification is executed.

By the way, when an effect with an extremely low execution rate or an effect with an extremely high degree of reliability is executed, a photograph of the effect being executed may be posted to a magazine or SNS (Social Networking Service). . If the posted photo catches the eyes of many people, it will lead to an advertising effect for the game machine and the game store where the game machine is installed.

For example, when medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the control lever by the player, and the symbols are stopped according to the operation of the stop button by the player. In the case of a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player when the combination of stop symbols becomes a combination of specific symbols, the player can operate the control lever, the stop button, etc. By not performing, the game can be prevented from progressing. Therefore, in the slot machine, for example, when a suggestive effect that suggests that the current set value is high is executed, the player does not allow the game to proceed according to his/her own intention, so that the state of the effect being executed is photographed. be able to.

On the other hand, in the case of a pachinko game machine, the game progresses with the lapse of time during execution of the variable display or in the jackpot game state, so it is impossible to prevent the game from progressing according to the intention of the player. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine, even if a suggestive effect suggesting that the current set value is high, for example, it is difficult to photograph the state in which the effect is being executed.

In relation to such a background, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment, after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, during the gate passage waiting period until the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the gate passage waiting time Suggestion production can be executed.

Here, as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, on condition that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 after the display result in the special game becomes "big hit", It is controlled to a jackpot game state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. In other words, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, even if the display result in the special game is "big hit", unless the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, it is not controlled to the big win game state. . That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game by not firing the game balls according to the intention of the player. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed, a special mode right-handed notification is executed as a gate-passing waiting-time suggestive effect suggesting that the current set value is high, for example. In this case, the player does not proceed with the game according to his/her own intention, so that it is possible to photograph the effect being executed.

(Modification 1 of characteristic portion 16SH)
In the above-described embodiment, a configuration was described in which the gate passage waiting time suggestive effect can be executed during the gate passage waiting period from when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed until the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 . In such a configuration, it may be possible to execute a setting suggesting effect suggesting the current set value even during variable display or during a big hit. In that case, as shown in FIG. 11-5, the execution ratio of the setting suggesting effect may differ depending on whether it is during the variable display, the waiting time for passing the gate, or during the jackpot. In the example shown in FIG. 11-5, the execution ratio of the gate-passing wait suggesting effect is higher than the execution ratio of the super reach development suggesting effect that can be executed during the super reach development during the variable display. In addition, the execution ratio of the suggestion performance at the time of waiting for passage of the gate that can be executed at the time of over winning during the big win is higher than the execution ratio of the suggestion performance at the time of waiting for passage of the gate. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-5, the reliability of the setting suggesting effect may differ depending on whether it is executed during the variable display, the waiting time for passing the gate, or during the jackpot. In the example shown in FIG. 11-5, it is more reliable that the current set value is higher in the gate passage waiting suggestive effect than in the super reach development suggestive effect. In other words, the effect executing means can execute the setting suggestion effect during the variable display and in an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and the game medium passes through the specific area during the variable display and after the predetermined condition is established. The execution ratio of the setting suggestion performance is made different depending on whether it is a period until the game is completed or an advantageous state for the player, and the reliability of the setting suggestion performance is different depending on which period it is executed. may be It should be noted that the setting suggestion effect executed during the variable display is not limited to the one executed during the development of super reach, and can be executed as various advance notice effects and pre-reading notice effects. In addition, the setting suggestion effect executed during the big win is not limited to the one executed at the time of over winning, and can be executed as a special mode of various effects such as fanfare effect, ending effect, and promotion effect executed during the big win. be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to in which period the setting suggestion effect is executed.

(Modification 2 of characteristic portion 16SH)
In the above-described embodiment, a configuration has been described in which the game can be controlled to the big win game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 after the big win symbol has been derived and displayed. Instead of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, the game ball that has won the special variable winning ball device 17 can pass through, or the game ball that has won the special variable winning ball device 7 can pass through, A V area may be provided, and in the small winning game state, after the game ball has passed through the V area, it may be possible to control to the big winning game state based on another game ball passing through the passage gate 41.例文帳に追加According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on the passage of the game medium through the specific area after various predetermined conditions are established, the effect of the setting suggesting presentation is enhanced. be able to.

(Modification 3 of characteristic portion 16SH)
In the above-described embodiment, the explanation has been given of the configuration capable of executing the gate-passing waiting time suggestive effect suggesting the current set value among the set values of six stages of 1 to 6 which are the set values of the probability of winning the jackpot. Instead of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, when the setting is changed in the setting change mode in the power-on processing shown in FIGS. , an effect suggesting that the setting has been changed may be made executable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation that the setting has been changed to the high setting.

(Modification 4 of characteristic portion 16SH)
In the above-described embodiment, it may be possible to execute a variable probability promotion effect that is executed in a predetermined round during the big win and displays success or failure of promotion to the variable probability big win. And, there are two types of "non-probable variation jackpot", non-probability variation jackpot in which the probability variation promotion effect (failure) is executed during the big hit, and non-probability variation jackpot that does not execute the probability variation promotion effect itself. 2 types of probability variable big wins in which the probability variable promotion performance (success) is executed during the big win and probability variable big wins in which the probability variable promotion performance itself is not executed may be provided. In that case, when the jackpot type is ``non-probability variation (probability variation promotion performance failure)'', the same non-probability variation promotion performance (failure) is executed while stopping and displaying the same non-probability variation promotion performance (failure). On the other hand, when the jackpot type is ``probability variation (probability variation promotion success)'', the same non-probability variation promotion performance (successful) is executed during the big win. Note that the variable probability promotion effect may be executed in a specific round, may be executed over a plurality of rounds, or may be executed at the time of a fanfare effect or an ending effect. Then, when the jackpot type is "probability change (probability promotion effect success)", as a suggestion effect when waiting for the gate to pass, the suggestion effect determination table when waiting for the gate to be referred to when the display result becomes "non-probability change jackpot". By referring to it, the presence or absence and type of the gate-passing-waiting suggestive effect may be determined. According to such a configuration, although the probability variation promotion effect (success) is scheduled to be executed during the big hit, for example, in the case of "non-probability variation big hit", the execution ratio is low "Suggestion when waiting for gate passage It is possible to prevent the execution of the variable probability promotion performance (success) during the big win from being revealed in advance by executing the suggestive performance at the time of waiting for passage of the gate of the performance C'.

(Modification 5 of characteristic portion 16SH)
In the above-described embodiment, as a suggestive effect when waiting for passage through the gate, after the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, a special mode right-handed notification is started, and when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a special mode right-handed notification is performed. I explained the configuration to end. Instead of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, as a setting suggestive effect, a special form of right-handed notification may be started when a big hit symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, for example, during execution of the fanfare effect, even after the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the right-hand hitting notification of the special mode may be continued. According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

(Modification 6 of characteristic portion 16SH)
In the above-described embodiment, as the gate-passing-waiting suggestive effect, the same effect is executed during the gate-passing waiting period from after the big-win pattern is derived and displayed until the game ball passes through the passing gate 41. explained. Instead of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, as a suggestive effect when waiting for passage through the gate, the effect of changing the form of the right-handed notification in response to the establishment of a specific condition during the period of waiting for passage through the gate. may be executed. In this case, the gate passage waiting time suggestive effect after the change may have a higher reliability than the gate passage waiting time suggestive effect before the change. For example, as the gate-passing-waiting suggestion effect, an effect may be executed in which the state of the right-handed notification changes under a specific condition that a specific time has passed. Further, for example, as the gate-passing wait suggesting effect, an effect in which the state of the right-handed notification changes may be executed under a specific condition that the player's motion to the motion detection means is detected. According to such a configuration, it is possible to attract more attention to the gate-passage-waiting suggestive effect.

(Modification 7 of Characteristic Portion 16SH)
In the above-described embodiment, as the gate-passing waiting time suggesting effect, the present setting value is suggested by the aspect of the right-handed informing performed during one gate-passing waiting period. Instead of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, as a suggestive effect when waiting for gate passage, it is possible to execute a right-handed notification in a different special mode during a plurality of gate passage waiting periods, and a plurality of times You may make it suggest the present setting value by the combination of the aspect of hitting to the right information. In other words, the effect executing means is capable of executing setting suggesting effects of different special modes for each period from when the predetermined condition is established until the game medium passes through the specific area, and the setting suggesting effect is executed a plurality of times. You may suggest about a setting by the combination of the aspect. According to such a configuration, even when the player is continuously controlled to an advantageous state with a low degree of advantage, a good suggestion regarding the setting is made by combining the modes of the setting suggestion effect a plurality of times. If so, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 16SH)
In relation to the characteristic portion 16SH described above, there has been proposed a gaming machine capable of executing a setting suggestion effect for suggesting a setting in a gaming machine capable of performing a plurality of types of settings with different degrees of advantage for the player. (For example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). In addition, in a gaming machine such as that described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is required to enhance the effect of the setting suggestion effect.

Therefore, as a game machine of the means 1 related to the characteristic part 16SH for enhancing the effect of the setting suggestion effect, the game machine is controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the game medium passing through the specific area after the predetermined condition is established. (For example, a pachinko machine 1 or the like that can be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 after the jackpot symbols are derived and displayed), and is advantageous to the player. can be set to one of a plurality of different set values (for example, in the setting change mode in the power-on processing shown in FIGS. 9-6 and 9-8, the winning probability of CPU 103, etc., which can be set to any set value among six different stages of set values); (120, etc.) for effect control capable of executing a suggestive effect when waiting for gate passage, and the effect executing means performs the setting suggestion during a period from the establishment of the predetermined condition until the game medium passes through the specific area. Effect can be executed (for example, during the gate passage waiting period after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed until the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the gate passage waiting time suggestive effect can be executed, etc.) It may be a game machine characterized by

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect of the setting suggestion rendering.

As the game machine of the means 2 related to the characteristic part 16SH, a discharge that informs that the game medium should be discharged toward the specific area in a period from after the predetermined condition is established until the game medium passes through the specific area. Notification can be executed (for example, notification that a game ball should be shot toward the passage gate 41 during the gate passage waiting period from after the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed until the game ball passes through the passage gate 41) It may be a game machine of means 1 characterized by being able to execute right hitting notification etc.).

According to such a configuration, the player who does not know that the game medium must pass through the specific area in order to be controlled in an advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied is appropriately notified of this fact. be able to.

As the game machine of the means 3 related to the characteristic part 16SH, the effect execution means executes the launch notification in one of a plurality of special modes different from the normal mode as the setting suggestion effect. , suggesting the setting (for example, as a suggestion effect when waiting for passage through the gate, the background color is one of "green", "red", and "rainbow color" different from "white"). It may be a game machine of means 2 characterized by suggesting the current set value by executing the right hitting notification.

According to such a configuration, even a player who knows that the game medium must pass through the specific area in order to be controlled in an advantageous state when the predetermined condition is established can pay attention to the launch notification. can be improved.

As a game machine of the means 4 related to the characteristic part 16SH, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel (for example, the first special game and the second special game can be executed in parallel), and the variable display of the decoration identification information can be executed corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information. Decoration variable display execution means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control capable of executing variable display of decorative patterns corresponding to one of the first special game and the second special game, etc.) The effect executing means controls the advantageous state based on the variable display in which the variable display of the decoration identification information is executed, and the advantageous state based on the variable display in which the variable display of the decoration identification information is not executed. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect at a different rate when it is controlled to the state (for example, when it is controlled to the big hit game state based on the special game in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed, It is possible to execute the suggestive effect when waiting for gate passage at a different rate from the case where it is controlled to the big hit game state based on the special game in which the variable display of the decoration pattern is not executed, etc.). The gaming machine of any one of means 1 to 3 may be used.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the setting suggesting effect at a suitable frequency depending on which variable display is controlled to be in an advantageous state.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 related to the characteristic part 16SH, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, to be able to control to a jackpot game state of a plurality of types of jackpot types, etc.), Depending on the type of advantageous state, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a different rate (for example, depending on the jackpot type of the jackpot game state, the gate passage waiting time suggestion effect can be executed at a different rate). The game machine according to any one of means 1 to 4 characterized by:

According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect at a suitable frequency according to the type of advantageous state.

As the gaming machine of the means 6 related to the characteristic part 16SH, the degree of advantage to the player differs depending on the type of the advantageous state (for example, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state differs depending on the jackpot type), and the effect execution means Depending on the degree of advantage in the advantageous state, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at different rates (for example, depending on the number of rounds in the jackpot game state, the gate passage waiting time suggestion effect can be executed at different rates). ). The game machine of the means 5 characterized by the above may be used.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect at a suitable frequency according to the degree of advantage of the advantageous state.

As the gaming machine of the means 7 related to the characteristic part 16SH, the game state after the end of the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the above-mentioned advantageous state (for example, the game state after the big win game state ends differs depending on the type of the big win), The effect execution means can execute the setting suggestion effect at different rates according to the game state after the end of the advantageous state (for example, at different rates according to the game state after the end of the big win game state It may be a game machine of means 5 or 6 characterized by being able to execute a suggestive effect when waiting for gate passage, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect at a suitable frequency according to the game state after the end of the advantageous state.

As a game machine of the means 8 related to the characteristic part 16SH, it is possible to execute a variable display based on the establishment of the start condition (for example, the game ball passing through the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A is the first After the first start condition is satisfied by being detected by the start port switch 22A, for example, the first start condition is satisfied due to the end of the previous first special game or big hit game state. The second starting condition is that the first special game can be executed, the game ball passing through the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting hole switch 22B, etc. is established, for example, the second special game can be executed based on the establishment of the second start condition due to the end of the previous second special game or the jackpot game state, etc.), The start condition is not satisfied during the period from when the predetermined condition is satisfied until the game medium passes through the specific area (for example, at step 052IWS50A in the first special symbol normal process shown in FIGS. 10-17, the role product control When the value of the process flag indicates the gate passage waiting process (step 052IWS50A; N), the first start condition is not satisfied and the first special game is not executed, or the At step 052IWS50B in the second special symbol normal process, when the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the gate passage waiting process (step 052IWS50B; N), the second start condition is not satisfied and the second It may be a game machine according to any one of means 1 to 7 characterized by not executing a special game.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in attention to the setting suggestion effect.

(Explanation related to association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the characteristic portion 16SH may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to another characteristic portion. Features that are combined in this way or individual features that are not combined may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration related to other features.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 23SH)
Next, the game machine related to the characteristic portion 23SH will be described.

The pachinko game machine 1 includes a main machine that is provided as a new machine and a reuse machine that is provided at a lower price than the main machine after changing the specifications by utilizing the parts of the main machine. The specs differ between the main machine and the reused machine, but in order to keep the price down, the reused machine is required to use the production control board of the main machine as it is.

Here, consider a case where the types of selectable setting values are different between the main machine and the reuse machine. For example, let's say that you can select 6 levels of setting values from '1' to '6' for the main machine, and 3 levels of setting values from '1', '2', and '6' for the reused machine. think.

In the above-described embodiment, the set value is set to "XX" of the command E1XX (H) (X = any hexadecimal number) as the effect control command (setting command) that specifies the current set value that is set. An example was described. For example, the CPU 103 of the main substrate 11 transmits the command E100 (H) as the setting command when the setting value is set to "1", and when the setting value is set to "2", the setting Command E101 (H) is sent as a command, and when the setting value is set to "3", command E102 (H) is sent as a setting command, and when the setting value is set to "4" , the command E103(H) is sent as the setting command, and when the setting value is set to "5", the command E104(H) is sent as the setting command, and when the setting value is set to "6" , a command E105(H) is transmitted as a setting command. Then, the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 recognizes the value obtained by adding "1" to the value (0 to 5) specified by the setting command as the set value (1 to 6), and the set value "1". ~ "6" is executed.

If the machine with such specifications is used as the main machine and the production control board is used as it is to make it a reused machine, the setting command sent from the CPU 103 also changes the current setting value to "1" or "2". , and 6, the effect control CPU 120 must be able to recognize which one of the three settings.

As in the above-described embodiment, for example, when the CPU 103 of the reused machine is set to the setting value "1", the command E100(H) is transmitted as the setting command to set the setting value to "2". If it is set, the command E101 (H) is transmitted as the setting command, and if the setting value is set to "6", if the command E105 (H) is transmitted as the setting command, the effect control CPU 120 recognizes values obtained by adding "1" to the values (0, 1, 5) specified by the setting command as setting values (1, 2, 6), and sets the setting values "1", "2", "6 ” can be executed.

By the way, the "Regulations Concerning Approval and Model Examination, etc. of Gaming Machines" stipulate the capacity and area size of the ROM and RAM of gaming machines. is limited to 1024 bytes. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1, as the CPU 103, an 8-bit microprocessor written in an assembly language called "Z80" is used.

Against this background, programs executed by the CPU 103 are required to have a small capacity. However, when trying to identify discontinuous values like the three-step set values of "1", "2", and "6", the program capacity for properly identifying the discontinuous values increases. put away.

Therefore, the CPU 103 of the reuse machine processes the setting values in three stages of "1", "2", and "6" as continuous values. Command E100 (H) is sent as a command, and when the setting value is set to "2", command E101 (H) is sent as the setting command, and when the setting value is set to "6" , command E102 (H) is transmitted as a setting command, and when the effect control CPU 120 receives the command E102 (H), if it is the main machine, it recognizes that the set value is "3", In the case of a reusable machine, if the set value is recognized as "6", the current set value can be used regardless of the types of selectable set values without putting pressure on the capacity of the main board 11. It can be made to recognize to CPU120 for production|presentation control.

However, if the processing for recognizing the set value in the effect control CPU 120 is made different according to the types of selectable set values, there is a possibility that a new problem may arise. For example, if the type of setting values that can be selected in a reused machine is changed in the development stage, the program related to the processing for recognizing the setting values in the production control CPU must be changed in accordance with the design change. If the program is not changed appropriately, there is a possibility that the setting values specified by the setting commands cannot be recognized correctly. Therefore, it is not necessarily preferable to vary the processing for recognizing the set value in the effect control CPU 120 according to the types of selectable set values.

The game machine according to the characteristic part 23SH does not cause such a problem, does not press the capacity of the main board 11, and transmits the current set value to the effect control CPU 120 regardless of the type of selectable set value. It is a game machine that can be recognized.

The gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 23SH is a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of types of set values that differ in the degree of advantage for the player. In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 in which the probability of winning a jackpot can be set to one of a plurality of different set values will be described as an example.

The gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 23SH includes game control means for controlling the progress of the game and transmitting commands in accordance with the progress of the game. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment includes a CPU 103 of the main board 11 that controls the progress of the game and transmits an effect control command according to the progress of the game.

The gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 23SH includes effect control means for controlling execution of effects based on commands transmitted from the game control means. The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment includes an effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 that controls the execution of the effect based on the effect control command transmitted from the CPU 103 .

The game control means related to the characteristic portion 23SH controls the progress of the game based on continuous values corresponding to the multiple types of setting values. The CPU 103 of this embodiment controls the progress of the game based on continuous values corresponding to a plurality of selectable setting values.

The game control means related to the characteristic portion 23SH transmits a first command capable of specifying the number of types of setting values, and a second command capable of specifying values corresponding to the set setting values. The CPU 103 of this embodiment transmits a selectable setting command capable of specifying the number of types of selectable setting values and a setting command capable of specifying a value corresponding to the set setting value.

The effect control means related to the characterizing portion 23SH identifies the set value based on the first command and the second command. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment specifies the setting value that is set based on the selectable setting command and the setting command.

The effect control means related to the characteristic portion 23SH can control the execution of the effect based on discontinuous values corresponding to a plurality of types of setting values. The production control CPU 120 of this embodiment can control execution of production based on discontinuous values corresponding to a plurality of types of setting values.

The gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 23SH includes display means provided on the same board as the game control means. The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment includes a display monitor 21TM029 provided on the same main board 11 as the CPU 103. FIG.

The game control means related to the characteristic portion 23SH can display values corresponding to a plurality of types of set values and different from continuous values on the display means. The CPU 103 of this embodiment can display on the display monitor 21TM029 a value that corresponds to a plurality of types of setting values and that is different from continuous values and that is easily recognizable by the game arcade clerk.

The game control means related to the characteristic part 23SH transmits the first command together with the power-on command when the power supply to the gaming machine is started or restarted. The CPU 103 of this embodiment transmits a selectable setting command together with an initialization command when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started or restarted.

If the effect control means related to the characteristic part 23SH cannot specify the set value, the set value is regarded as the setting value with the lowest advantage to the player. When the CPU 120 for performance control in this embodiment cannot specify the set value, it considers the set value to be the set value "1" with the lowest jackpot winning probability.

The effect control means related to the characteristic portion 23SH can execute a suggestive effect suggesting the set value. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a special mode of advance notice effect suggesting the set value.

When the number of selectable setting values is small, the effect control means related to the characteristic portion 23SH identifies which setting value is set more than when the number of selectable setting values is large. A suggestive effect of a difficult aspect is executed. When the number of selectable setting values is small, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment lowers the execution ratio of the special mode notice effect than when the number of selectable setting values is large. This makes it difficult to identify which set value is set.

The effect control means related to the characteristic portion 23SH can back up information about the set values. The production control CPU 120 of this embodiment stores the information of the received production control command including the selectable setting command and the setting command in the reception command log area, and the current setting value recognized as the set setting value information in the setting value log area.

The effect control means related to the characteristic portion 23SH varies the information to be backed up according to the application. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment treats the information stored in the received command log area as a backup target for some purposes, and treats the information stored in the setting value log area as a backup target for other uses. deal.

(Set value display processing)
FIG. 12-1 is a flow chart showing an example of setting value display processing for displaying current setting values, which is executed in step S21TM4550 in the power-on processing shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8. Here, the "power-on process" is a process executed by the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, as described above.

In the set value display process shown in FIG. 12-1, the CPU 103 first reads the values for processing stored in the set value storage area (step 23SHS1). Here, the "processing value" is a value corresponding to the current setting value selected by the operation of the store clerk in the setting change mode.

Then, the CPU 103 determines a setting value corresponding to the processing value read from the setting value storage area as a display setting value to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step 23SHS2). In the process of step 23SHS2, for example, by referring to a display setting value determination table stored in advance in the ROM 101, the display setting values to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 may be determined. Here, the “display monitor 21TM02” is a display device provided on the main board 11 so as to be visible from the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, as described above.

(Set value determination table for display)
FIG. 12-2 shows a configuration example of the setting value determination table for display. As shown in FIG. 12B, in the display setting value determination table, for example, one of a plurality of types of setting values may be assigned according to the processing value read from the setting value storage area.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-2(A), when it is possible to select six levels of setting values from "1" to "6", the setting value storage area in the setting value determination table for display is is assigned to one of the display set values of "1" to "6" according to which of "0" to "5" the processing value read from is.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-2(B), when three levels of setting values of "1", "2", and "6" can be set, the setting value storage area in the setting value determination table for display is is assigned to one of the display set values of "1", "2" and "6" according to which of "0" to "2" the processing value read from is.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-2(C), when two levels of setting values, "1" and "6", can be set, in the setting value determination table for display, the process read from the setting value storage area Depending on whether the upper value is "0" or "1", it is assigned to a display set value of "1" or "6".

Returning to the description of FIG. 12-1, after executing the processing of step 23SHS2, the CPU 103 displays the determined set value for display as the current set value selected by the game arcade clerk's operation in the setting change mode. It is displayed on the monitor 21TM029 (step 23SHS3), and the set value display processing is terminated.

In this way, the display monitor 21TM029 displays, as the current setting value, not the processing value corresponding to the current setting value, but the value that is easy for the store clerk to recognize.

As described above, in this embodiment, the display monitor 21TM029 provided on the same main substrate 11 as the CPU 103 is provided, and the CPU 103 uses a selectable set value which is different from the processing value corresponding to the set value. is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 which is easy for the store clerk to recognize. can.

(Set value update process)
FIG. 12-3 is an example of setting value update processing for updating processing values corresponding to current setting values, which is executed in step S21TM4620 in the power-on processing shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8. It is a flow chart showing. The "set value update process" is a process that is executed when the setting changeover switch 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode. Here, the "setting changeover switch 21TM052" is a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit, as described above.

In the setting value update process shown in FIG. 12-3, the CPU 103 first reads the processing value stored in the setting value storage area (step 23SHS1), and sets the processing value read from the setting value storage area to 1. Add (step 23 SHS12).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value for processing after the addition is equal to or less than the upper limit (step 23SHS13). Here, the "upper limit" is predetermined according to the number of selectable setting values. For example, when six levels of setting values from "1" to "6" can be selected, the processing value "5" corresponding to the setting value "6" is the upper limit value. Also, for example, when three levels of setting values of "1", "2", and "6" can be set, the processing value "2" corresponding to the setting value "6" is the upper limit value. Also, for example, if two levels of setting values, "1" and "6", can be set, the processing value "1" corresponding to the setting value "6" becomes the upper limit.

At step 23SHS13, if the value for processing after addition is equal to or less than the upper limit value (step 23SHS13; Yes), the value in the set value storage area is updated to the value for processing after addition (step 23SHS14), and set End the value update process.

On the other hand, in step 23SHS13, if the value after addition is greater than the upper limit value (step 23SHS13; No), the value in the set value storage area is initialized (step 23SHS15), and the set value update process ends. In the process of step 23 SHS15, the value in the setting value storage area is initialized to the processing value "0" corresponding to the setting value with the lowest winning probability of the big win among a plurality of types of selectable setting values.

In this manner, when the setting changeover switch 21TM052 is operated, 1 is added to the processing value stored in the setting value storage area. If the post-addition processing value is equal to or less than the upper limit value, the set value corresponding to the post-addition processing value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the set value display processing shown in FIG. become. On the other hand, if the processed value after the addition is larger than the upper limit value, the setting value with the lowest jackpot winning probability is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the setting value display processing shown in FIG. 12-1.

(Setting command transmission processing)
FIG. 12-4 is a flowchart showing an example of setting command transmission processing for transmitting a setting command, which is executed in step 21TM4760 in the power-on processing shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8.

In the setting command transmission process shown in FIG. 12-4, the CPU 103 first transmits the selectable setting command to the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 (step 23SHS21), and then transmits the setting command (step 23SHS22), the setting command transmission process is terminated.

(selectable setting command)
12-5 and 12-6 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of selectable setting commands and setting commands, which are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 12-5, command 9BXX(H) (X=arbitrary hexadecimal number) is a selectable setting command that specifies the types of selectable setting values. The first byte "9B" of command 9BXX(H) indicates that this command is a selectable setting command. Also, the second byte "XX" of the command 9BXX(H) indicates the type of selectable set value.

FIG. 12-6(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the second byte "XX" of the selectable setting command. Although the contents of the first byte are not shown, the most significant bit of each byte is used as an identifier indicating whether the byte containing the most significant bit is the first or second byte of the command. In this embodiment, when the most significant bit is "1", it indicates the first byte of the command, and when the most significant bit is "0", it indicates the second byte of the command. showing.

The second most significant bit of the second byte is unused and is "0".

The lower 6 bits including the least significant bit of the second byte indicate whether or not the type of setting value can be selected, and the least significant bit indicates whether or not the setting value "1" can be selected. , the second least significant bit indicates whether the setting value "2" can be selected, the third least significant bit indicates whether the setting value "3" can be selected, and the lowest bit indicates whether the setting value "3" can be selected. The fourth bit from the lowest indicates whether or not the setting value "4" can be selected, the fifth bit from the lowest indicates whether or not the setting value "5" can be selected, and the The sixth bit indicates whether or not the set value "6" can be selected. In this embodiment, a bit of "1" indicates that the setting value corresponding to that bit can be selected, and a bit of "0" indicates that the setting value corresponding to that bit cannot be selected. It shows that it is possible.

For example, if six levels of setting values from "1" to "6" can be selected, the contents of the second byte of the selectable setting command will be "00111111", and command 9B3F(H) will be sent as the selectable setting command. be done. Further, for example, when three levels of setting values of "1", "2", and "6" can be set, the content of the second byte of the selectable setting command is "00100011", and command 9B23 (H) is Sent as a selectable setting command. Further, for example, when two levels of setting values, "1" and "6", can be set, the content of the second byte of the selectable setting command is "00100001", and the command 9B21 (H) is the selectable setting command. sent as Further, for example, if two levels of setting values, "1" and "2", can be set, the content of the second byte of the selectable setting command is "00000011", and the command 9B03 (H) is the selectable setting command. sent as

In this way, the selectable setting commands are changed from 9B03(H) corresponding to two levels of setting values, "1" and "2", to "1" to " It can take any value from 9B3F(H) corresponding to the set values in six stages of "6".

The effect control CPU 120 can specify a plurality of selectable setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by receiving such a selectable setting command. Therefore, when the combination of a plurality of selectable setting values is different between the main machine and the reuse machine, even if the common production control CPU 120 is used for the main machine and the reuse machine, the production control CPU 120 can be used for the main machine. It is possible to specify a combination of a plurality of selectable setting values depending on whether the machine is .

(setting command)
Next, in the example shown in FIG. 12-5, command 9EXX(H) (X=arbitrary hexadecimal number) is a setting command that specifies a processing value corresponding to the setting value that has been set. The first byte "9E" of command 9BXX(H) indicates that this command is a setting command. Also, the second byte "XX" of the command 9BXX(H) indicates a processing value corresponding to the set value. In the setting command, for example, as shown in FIG. 12-6B, different EXT data are set according to the combination of multiple selectable setting values.

For example, when six levels of setting values from "1" to "6" can be selected, as shown in FIG. Six types of commands 9E00(H) to 9E05(H) are prepared as corresponding setting commands in order from . Command 9E00(H) is a first setting command that specifies that the processing value corresponding to the set setting value is "0". Command 9E01(H) is a second setting command that specifies that the processing value corresponding to the set setting value is "1". Command 9E02(H) is a third setting command that specifies that the processing value corresponding to the set setting value is "2". Command 9E03(H) is a fourth setting command that specifies that the processing value corresponding to the set setting value is "3". Command 9E04(H) is a fifth setting command that specifies that the processing value corresponding to the set setting value is "4". Command 9E05(H) is a sixth setting command that specifies that the processing value corresponding to the set setting value is "5".

Also, for example, if three levels of setting values of "1", "2", and "6" can be set, as shown in FIG. Three types of commands 9E00(H) to 9E02(H) are prepared as setting commands corresponding to setting values in descending order of probability of winning. Command 9E00(H) is a first setting command that specifies that the processing value corresponding to the set setting value is "0". Command 9E01(H) is a second setting command that specifies that the processing value corresponding to the set setting value is "1". Command 9E02(H) is a third setting command that specifies that the processing value corresponding to the set setting value is "2".

In addition, for example, when setting values of two stages of "1" and "6" can be set, as shown in FIG. Two types of command 9E00(H) and command 9E01(H) are prepared as corresponding setting commands in order from the setting value. Command 9E00(H) is a first setting command that specifies that the processing value corresponding to the set setting value is "0". Command 9E01(H) is a second setting command that specifies that the processing value corresponding to the set setting value is "1".

As described above, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 calculates a processing value corresponding to each of the plurality of selectable setting values regardless of whether the plurality of selectable setting values are consecutive values. are processed as continuous values, the capacity of the main substrate 11 can be prevented from being squeezed.

The effect control CPU 120 can specify the processing value corresponding to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 by receiving such a setting command. Therefore, when the combination of a plurality of selectable setting values is different between the main machine and the reuse machine, even if the common production control CPU 120 is used for the main machine and the reuse machine, the production control CPU 120 can be used for the main machine. It is possible to specify processing values corresponding to set values in the case of , and in the case of a reused machine.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the setting value that is set based on the selectable setting command and the setting command in the command analysis process of step S75 in the effect control main process of FIG.

As described above, CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that initialization processing has been performed at power-on in step S21TM1460 of FIG. 9-8. That is, the CPU 103 transmits the selectable setting command and the setting command at step S21TM4760 in the power-on processing shown in FIGS. , an initialization command is sent in step 21TM1460.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started or restarted, the CPU 103 transmits the selectable setting command together with the initialization command. , the current set value can be recognized by the effect control means.

(Command analysis processing)
FIG. 12-7 is a flow chart showing an example of the command analysis process executed at step S75 in the effect control main process of FIG. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 12-7, the effect control CPU 120 first receives data from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by checking the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is a command (step 23SHS31). At this time, if there is no received command (step 23SHS31; No), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the command analysis process.

If there is a received command at step 23SHS31 (step 23SHS31; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer in the received command log area provided in the backup RAM (not shown) of the effect control board 12. The received command received is stored (step 23 SHS32). In the process of step 23SHS32, when storing the received command, the effect control CPU 120 also stores information capable of specifying the date and time when the received command was received. Here, the information stored in the received command log area is referred to, for example, when a problem occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 for analysis to search for the cause of the problem.

After executing the processing of step 23SHS32, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is a selectable setting command by, for example, confirming the received command (step 23SHS33).

When the received command is a selectable setting command at step 23SHS33 (step 23SHS33; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 initializes the set value information storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 23SHS34). Here, the set value information storage area is an area for storing information capable of specifying the types of a plurality of selectable set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the set set values.

(Set value information storage area)
FIG. 12-8 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the setting value information storage area. The setting value information storage area is provided with a plurality of areas in which "setting values" and "setting value flags" are stored in association with each other. In this embodiment, the set value information storage area is provided with seven areas, ie, the first area to the seventh area. The first area is an area used when the processing value corresponding to the set setting value is "0". The second area is an area used when the processing value corresponding to the set setting value is "1". The third area is an area used when the processing value corresponding to the set setting value is "2". The fourth area is an area used when the processing value corresponding to the set setting value is "3". The fifth area is an area used when the processing value corresponding to the set setting value is "4". The sixth area is an area used when the processing value corresponding to the set setting value is "5". The seventh area is an area used when the processing value corresponding to the set setting value is a value other than "1" to "6", and is an area that should not be used originally. be.

Here, the number of areas provided in the setting value information storage area is determined based on the number of selectable setting values that is the largest among the main machine and the reuse machine, and is one or more more than that number. It is sufficient if an area is provided. For example, if the main machine and the reuse machine have the largest number of selectable setting values in six stages, seven or more areas are provided in the setting value information storage area. Further, for example, if the main machine and the reused machines have the largest number of devices that can select three levels of setting values, four or more areas may be provided in the setting value information storage area. Also, for example, if both the main machine and the reuse machine can select two levels of setting values, the setting value information storage area may be provided with three or more areas.

The "setting value" stores the types of setting values that can be selected. The "set value flag" is a flag that indicates whether or not a set value of the type stored in the corresponding "set value" is set. If the setting value of the type stored in the corresponding "setting value" is set, the value of the "setting value flag" is updated to "1" and the type of setting stored in the corresponding "setting value" is set. If the set value is not set, the value of the "set value flag" is updated to "0".

In the processing of step 23SHS34, the effect control CPU 120 initializes the "set values" of all areas to the set value "1", which is the type with the lowest jackpot winning probability. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 clears the "set value flag" of all areas and updates them to "0".

After executing the processing of step 23SHS34, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the selectable setting command and identifies the types of selectable setting values (step 23SHS35). As described above, in the selectable setting command, the second byte of the command specifies the types of selectable setting values. In the process of step 23SHS35, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the type of selectable set value by confirming the second byte of the selectable setting command.

After executing the process of step 23SHS35, the effect control CPU 120 stores the information on the types of selectable set values specified in step 23SHS35 in the set value information storage area (step 23SHS36), and the process of step 23SHS31. back to In the process of step 23 SHS36, as the "set value" information, the types of specified set values are stored in each area of the set value information storage area in descending order of the probability of winning the jackpot. For example, when the settable setting command 9B23 (H) is received and the types of selectable setting values specified in step 23SHS35 are "1", "2", and "6", the effect control CPU 120 As shown in FIG. 12-8(B), "1" is stored in the first area of the setting value information storage area, "2" is stored in the second area, and "2" is stored in the third area as "setting value" information. Store "6" in the area.

By executing such a process, the effect control CPU 120 sets the processing values corresponding to the selectable setting values to not continuous values such as "0", "1", and "2". , "1", "2", and "6".

Thus, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can process the processing values respectively corresponding to the selectable setting values as discontinuous values. The value can be reflected in the performance as a set value.

If the received command is not a selectable setting command at step 23SHS33 (step 23SHS33; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is a setting command (step 23SHS37).

If the received command is a setting command at step 23SHS37 (step 23SHS37; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the setting command and identifies the processing value corresponding to the set value (step 23SHS38). As described above, the setting command specifies a processing value corresponding to the setting value set in the second byte of the command. In the process of step 23SHS38, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the processing value corresponding to the set value by confirming the second byte of the setting command.

After executing the process of step 23SHS38, the effect control CPU 120 stores the processing value corresponding to the setting value specified in step 23SHS38 in the setting value information storage area (step 23SHS39). In the processing of step 23SHS39, the "set value flag" of the area corresponding to the specified processing value among the first to sixth areas of the set value information storage area is updated to "1". For example, when the setting command 9E01 (H) is received and the processing value specified in step 23SHS38 is "1", the effect control CPU 120 performs processing as shown in FIG. 12-8 (C). The value of the "set value flag" in the second area corresponding to the above value "1" is updated to "1".

Here, if the setting command cannot be received due to the influence of noise or the like, or if a setting command specifying a processing value that does not correspond to any of the selectable setting values is received, the effect control CPU 120 The processing value specified in the setting command cannot be specified correctly. In that case, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the "setting flag" of the seventh area corresponding to the value other than "1" to "6" on the processing corresponding to the set setting value to "1". update to

After executing the process of step 23SHS39, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the setting value that has been set (step 23SHS40). In the process of step 23 SHS40, of the information stored in the setting value information storage area, the setting value of the type stored in the "setting value" of the area where the value of the "setting value flag" is "1" is Identified as a setting value that has been set. For example, when the information shown in FIG. 12-8(C) is stored in the setting value information storage area, it is stored in the "setting value" of the second area where the value of the "setting value flag" is "1". The set value "2" is specified as the set value.

The effect control CPU 120 can specify the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 by executing such processing. Therefore, when the combination of a plurality of selectable setting values is different between the main machine and the reuse machine, even if the common production control CPU 120 is used for the main machine and the reuse machine, the production control CPU 120 can be used for the main machine. It is possible to identify the setting values that have been set for each of the cases in which the machine is .

Thus, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 uses a selectable setting command that can specify the type of selectable setting value and a setting command that can specify a processing value corresponding to the set setting value. , and the effect control CPU 120 identifies the set value based on the selectable setting command and the setting command, so that the selectable setting value can be obtained without putting pressure on the capacity of the main substrate 11. It is possible to make the effect control CPU 120 recognize the current set value regardless of the type.

Here, the "set value" of the seventh area corresponding to the value other than "1" to "6" on the processing corresponding to the set set value is set to a value other than "1" by the selectable setting command. It is never updated to a value and always stores "1". Then, as described above, if the setting command is not received, or if a setting command specifying a processing value that does not correspond to any of the selectable setting values is received, the effect control CPU 120 is set. The value of the "setting flag" in the seventh area corresponding to the value other than "1" to "6" in the processing corresponding to the setting value set in the current setting is updated to "1". Therefore, when the setting command cannot be received, or when a setting command specifying a processing value that does not correspond to any of the selectable setting values is received, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the "set value flag" is "1", and the setting value "1" stored in the "setting value" of the seventh area is specified as the set setting value.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 cannot specify the set value, the set value is the set value "1", which has the lowest advantage to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the processing from being performed assuming that a setting value with a higher degree of advantage than the set value is set.

Also, for example, the main machine can be set with 6 levels of setting values from "1" to "6", and the reused machine can be set with 3 levels of setting values from "1", "2", and "6". In this case, as described above, seven or more areas are provided in the setting value information storage area. Therefore, in the reuse machine, the fourth to seventh areas are originally areas that should not be used. Even in such a case, in the reuse machine, the "setting values" of the 4th to 7th areas are not updated to any value other than "1" by the selectable setting command, and "1" is always stored. be done. Then, for example, if the value specified by the setting command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and it is possible to select a setting value in six steps from "1" to "6", the effective setting command 9E03 (H ) to set command 9E05(H). In that case, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the "setting flag" in one of the fourth to sixth areas corresponding to the received setting command to "1". Therefore, if the value specified by the setting command is changed due to the influence of noise, etc., and if it is possible to select a setting value in six stages from "1" to "6", when a valid setting command is received, The effect control CPU 120 sets the set value "1" stored in the "set value" of any one of the fourth area to the sixth area where the "set value flag" value is "1". Identified as a setting value that has been set.

After executing the process of step 23SHS40, the effect control CPU 120 stores the set value specified in step 23SHS40 in the set value log area provided in the backup RAM (not shown) of the effect control board 12 (step 23SHS41). , step 23 returns to the processing of SHS31. In the process of step 23SHS41, the effect control CPU 120 stores information that can specify the date and time when the setting value is specified when storing the setting value. Here, the information stored in the setting value log area is referred to, for example, in the maintenance mode, so that the game arcade clerk checks the setting change history.

(maintenance mode)
The maintenance mode is a mode in which, for example, the date and time setting of the real-time clock, various error occurrence histories, and setting change histories can be checked. In this embodiment, based on the fact that the push button 31B is pressed while confirming the settings at the time of turning on the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the maintenance mode is controlled, and the effect control CPU 120 displays the maintenance mode menu. Start displaying the screen.

FIG. 12-9 is a diagram showing a specific example of a display screen when a setting change/confirmation history selection operation is performed during the maintenance mode. 12-9(A), the maintenance mode menu screen shown in FIG. 12-9(B) is displayed by pressing the push button 31B. It is assumed that the option 23SH1 of "setting change/confirmation history" is selected while the screen is being displayed.

When the option 23SH1 of "setting change/confirmation history" is selected, the display of the setting change/confirmation history screen is switched on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 12-9(C). As shown in FIG. 12-9(C), on the setting change/confirmation history screen, the date and time, whether it is a setting change or a setting confirmation, and the setting value after change or the setting value that has been confirmed are associated with each other. are displayed, and are displayed in order so that the most recent log information is at the top.

Thus, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 stores the information of the received effect control command including the selectable setting command and the setting command in the received command log area, and recognizes it as the set value. The information of the current setting value obtained is stored in the setting value log area. For some purposes, the information stored in the received command log area is the target of backup, and for other purposes, the information stored in the setting value log area is backed up. Since it is treated as a backup target, the information about the setting value can be used appropriately according to the application.

Returning to the description of FIG. 12-7, when the received command is not a setting command at step 23SHS37 (step 23SHS37; No), the effect control CPU 120 performs settings according to other received commands (step 23SHS42), and step 23SHS31 processing is returned to.

(Setting suggestion production)
Also in this embodiment, similarly to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to suggest a setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the setting value to the player by changing the mode of the predetermined notice effect according to the designated setting value.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether the mode of the foretelling effect is a special mode in which setting values are suggested or a normal mode in which setting values are not suggested, in executing a predetermined foretelling effect. For example, the production control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the advance notice mode that is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for production, and prepares a notice mode determination table that is stored in advance in the ROM 121. The advance notice mode may be determined by referring to it.

FIG. 12-10(A) shows a configuration example of the advance notice mode determination table. As shown in FIG. 12-10(A), in the advance notice mode determination table, for example, the advance notice mode "Normal It suffices if it is assigned to one of the decision results of mode (no suggestion of setting) or special mode (with suggestion of setting).

In the advance notice mode determination table, as shown in FIG. 12-10(A), the larger the number of types of selectable setting values, the lower the determination ratio of the "normal mode (no setting suggestion)", and the lower the determination ratio of the "special mode". (Suggestion of setting)” is set so that the decision ratio is high.

According to this setting, when the number of selectable setting values is small, the execution ratio of the special mode notice effect is lower than when the number of selectable setting values is large, so the special mode notice effect is performed. Even if it is executed, it is difficult to identify which setting value is set.

Thus, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a special mode of advance notice effect suggesting the set value, and when the number of selectable set values is small, the selectable By making the execution ratio of the notice effect of the special mode lower than when the number of setting values is large, it is difficult to identify which setting value is set, so selectable setting Depending on the number of values, a suitable suggestion effect can be executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines a special mode pattern to be used as the effect control pattern of the notice effect in executing the special mode notice effect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for special mode pattern determination that is updated by the random number circuit 124 or a random counter for effect, etc., and determines a special mode pattern that is stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. A special mode pattern may be determined by referring to a table or the like.

FIG. 12-10(B) shows a configuration example of a special mode pattern determination table. As shown in FIG. 12-10B, in the special mode pattern determination table, for example, the special mode pattern "special It suffices if it is assigned to the determination result of either Aspect A” or “Special Aspect B”.

In the special mode pattern determination table, as shown in FIG. 12-10(B), the higher the probability of winning the jackpot is, the lower the determination ratio of "special mode A" is, and the more "special mode B" is determined. set to be higher.

According to this setting, the higher the winning probability of the jackpot is, the easier it is to execute the "special mode B" notice effect. It is possible to heighten expectations for the fact that the winning probability of the big win is set to a set value higher than that when the advance notice performance of "A" is executed.

(Modification 1 of characteristic portion 23SH)
In the above-described embodiment, a configuration has been described in which the CPU 103 transmits a selectable setting command as a dedicated command that enables specification of the types of selectable setting values. Instead of such a configuration, the second byte of the initialization command can be used to specify the types of selectable setting values. You may make it transmit a change command. In other words, the game control means may transmit a power-on command as the first command. With such a configuration as well, it is possible to allow the performance control means to recognize the current set values regardless of the types of selectable set values without increasing the capacity of the game control means.

(Modification 2 of characteristic portion 23SH)
In the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is configured to regard the set value as the set value "1" with the lowest jackpot winning probability when the set value cannot be specified. explained. Instead of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, the effect control CPU 120 may notify an error when the set value cannot be specified. In other words, the effect control means may notify an error when the set value cannot be identified. According to such a configuration, when the set value cannot be specified due to fraudulent activity or the like, the game parlor clerk can quickly respond.

(Modification 3 of Characteristic Portion 23SH)
In the above-described embodiment, when the number of selectable set values is small, the effect control CPU 120 lowers the execution ratio of the special mode notice effect than when the number of selectable set values is large. The configuration that makes it difficult to identify which set value is set has been described. Instead of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, when the number of selectable setting values is small, the effect control CPU 120 is set more than when the number of selectable setting values is large. It may be made difficult to identify which set value is set by reducing the difference in the determination ratio of the special mode pattern according to the set value. With such a configuration as well, it is possible to execute a suitable suggestion effect according to the number of selectable set values.

(Modification 4 of characteristic portion 23SH)
In the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 has described a configuration capable of executing a special mode of advance notice effect suggesting the set value. Instead of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, the effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a special mode effect, which is not an advance notice effect, suggesting a set value. With such a configuration as well, it is possible to execute a suitable suggestion effect according to the number of selectable set values.

(Modification 5 of characteristic portion 23SH)
In the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 has explained the configuration that indicates the set value that has been set. Instead of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, the effect control CPU 120 may indicate whether or not the set value is high. In that case, the effect control CPU 120 uses a method such as that in the above-described embodiment or Modification 3, when the number of selectable setting values is small, the number of selectable setting values is higher than when the number of selectable setting values is large. It is only necessary to make it difficult to specify whether or not. With such a configuration as well, it is possible to execute a suitable suggestion effect according to the number of selectable set values.

(Modification 6 of characteristic portion 23SH)
In the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 has explained the configuration that indicates the set value that has been set. Instead of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, the effect control CPU 120 may indicate whether the set value is odd or even. In that case, the effect control CPU 120 uses a method such as that in the above-described embodiment or modification 3, when the number of selectable setting values is small, the setting value is odd or even. With such a configuration as well, it is possible to execute a suitable suggestion effect according to the number of selectable set values.

(Modification 7 of characteristic portion 23SH)
In the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 has explained the configuration that indicates the set value that has been set. Instead of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, the effect control CPU 120 may suggest whether or not the set value has been changed. In that case, the effect control CPU 120 uses a method such as that in the above-described embodiment or modification 3, when the number of selectable setting values is small, the setting value It is only necessary to make it difficult to identify whether or not there has been a change in the With such a configuration as well, it is possible to execute a suitable suggestion effect according to the number of selectable set values.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 23SH)
In relation to the characteristic portion 23SH described above, it is possible to set one of a plurality of types of setting values with different degrees of advantage to the player, control the progress of the game, and transmit commands according to the progress of the game. and a performance control means for controlling execution of performance based on a command transmitted from the game control means, wherein the performance control means is capable of executing a suggestive performance suggesting a set value. has been proposed (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). And, in a plurality of types of game machines having different types of selectable setting values, it is required to be able to use a common effect control means. For that purpose, it is necessary to have a command system that allows the effect control means to specify the current set value regardless of the types of selectable set values. However, due to such a command system, the process for specifying the current set value by the game control means becomes complicated, and there is a possibility that the capacity of the game control means will be squeezed. .

Therefore, without pressurizing the capacity of the game control means, as a game machine of means 1 related to the characteristic part 23SH for making the effect control means recognize the current set value regardless of the type of selectable set value, the player A gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of types of set values that differ in the degree of advantage against (for example, a pachinko machine 1 that can be set to one of a plurality of types of set values that have different odds of winning a jackpot), A game control means for controlling the progress of the game and transmitting commands according to the progress of the game (for example, the CPU 103 of the main board 11 for controlling the progress of the game and transmitting the effect control command according to the progress of the game, etc.) , based on the command transmitted from the game control means, production control means for controlling the execution of production (for example, production control board 12 for controlling the execution of production based on the production control command transmitted from the CPU 103) effect control CPU 120, etc.), and the game control means controls the progress of the game based on continuous values corresponding to a plurality of types of set values (for example, the CPU 103 controls a plurality of types of selectable controlling the progress of a game based on consecutive values corresponding to the set values), a first command capable of specifying the number of types of the set values, and values corresponding to the set set values; (For example, the CPU 103 transmits a selectable setting command capable of specifying the number of types of selectable setting values and a value corresponding to the set setting value. setting command, and the like), the effect control means specifies the set value that is set based on the first command and the second command (for example, the effect control CPU 120 selects The game machine may be characterized by specifying the set value based on the possible setting command and the setting command, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the effect control means recognize the current set value regardless of the type of selectable set value without pressurizing the capacity of the game control means.

As the game machine of the means 2 related to the characteristic portion 23SH, the effect control means can control the execution of the effect based on discontinuous values corresponding to a plurality of types of set values (for example, the effect control CPU 120 The gaming machine of means 1 may be characterized by being able to control the execution of the performance based on values that correspond to a plurality of types of set values and that are not continuous.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to reflect a suitable value as a set value in the performance.

As a game machine of the means 3 related to the characteristic part 23SH, display means provided on the same substrate as the game control means (for example, display monitor 21TM029 etc. provided on the same main substrate 11 as the CPU 103), and the game control The means can display a value corresponding to the plurality of types of setting values and different from the continuous values on the display means (the CPU 103 can display a value corresponding to the plurality of types of setting values and different from the continuous values). The gaming machine of means 1 or 2 may be characterized by being able to display a value that is easy for the store clerk to recognize on the display monitor 21TM029.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a suitable value as a set value on the display means provided on the same board as the game control means.

As the game machine of means 4 related to the characteristic part 23SH, the game control means transmits the first command together with the power-on command when the power supply to the game machine is started or restarted (for example, the CPU 103 may When the power supply to the game machine 1 is started or restarted, the game machine of any one of means 1 to 3 may be characterized by transmitting a selectable setting command together with an initialization command. .

According to such a configuration, the present setting value can be recognized by the effect control means without using the power-on command.

As the game machine of the means 5 related to the characteristic part 23SH, when the effect control means cannot specify the set value that is set, the set value that is set is the set value that gives the lowest advantage to the player. (For example, if the effect control CPU 120 cannot identify the set value that has been set, the set value that has been set is considered to be the set value "1" with the lowest jackpot winning probability. etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent processing from being performed assuming that a set value with a higher degree of advantage than the set value is set.

As a game machine of the means 6 related to the characteristic part 23SH, the effect control means can execute a suggestive effect that suggests the set value that has been set (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can change the set value When the number of selectable setting values is small, the setting values that are set are more likely than when the number of selectable setting values is large. (For example, when the number of selectable setting values is small, the CPU 120 for effect control performs a special Any one of the means 1 to 5 characterized by making it difficult to identify which set value is set by lowering the execution ratio of the advance notice effect of the mode. It may be a game machine.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a suitable suggestion effect according to the number of selectable setting values.

As the game machine of the means 7 related to the characteristic part 23SH, the effect control means can back up information on the set value (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can receive information including a selectable setting command and a setting command. Store the information of the effect control command received in the received command log area, and store the information of the current setting value recognized as the set value in the setting value log area, etc.). (For example, the effect control CPU 120 treats the information stored in the received command log area as a backup target for some purposes, and the information stored in the setting value log area for other purposes. The game machine of any one of means 1 to 6 characterized by handling as a backup target, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably utilize the information regarding the set value according to the application.

(Explanation related to association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the characteristic portion 23SH may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to another characteristic portion. Features that are combined in this way or individual features that are not combined may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration related to other features.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if it is modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention.

Further, all or part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of the claims.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and can be set to one of a plurality of types of set values that differ in the degree of advantage for the player. (for example, a pachinko game machine 1 capable of setting one of a plurality of types of setting values with different odds of winning a jackpot), controls the progress of the game, and transmits commands according to the progress of the game. game control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the main board 11 that controls the progress of the game and transmits the effect control command according to the progress of the game), and based on the command transmitted from the game control means, the effect of Effect control means for controlling execution (for example, based on the effect control command transmitted from CPU 103, effect control CPU 120 etc. of effect control board 12 for controlling execution of effect), the game control means Control the progress of the game based on continuous values corresponding to multiple types of setting values (for example, the CPU 103 controls the progress of the game based on continuous values corresponding to multiple types of selectable setting values). etc.), and transmits a first command capable of specifying the number of types of setting values, and a second command capable of specifying values corresponding to the set setting values (for example, the CPU 103 , a selectable setting command capable of specifying the number of types of selectable setting values, and a setting command capable of specifying a value corresponding to the set value being set, etc.), the effect control means , Based on the first command and the second command, specify the setting value that is set (for example, the effect control CPU 120, based on the selectable setting command and the setting command, the setting that is set value, etc.), it is possible to control the execution of production based on discontinuous values corresponding to a plurality of types of setting values (for example, the production control CPU 120 corresponds to a plurality of types of setting values and It is possible to control the execution of effects based on discontinuous values, etc.), and a suggestive effect that suggests that the control is performed in the advantageous state (for example, a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance notice effect, etc. ), and a preparation effect (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect, a timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed. The suggestive effect includes a first suggestive effect (for example, a pending display notice effect), a second suggestive effect (for example, a timer effect) different from the first suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect (for example, a timer effect). A first suggestive effect and a third suggestive effect (for example, a second-chance forewarning effect) different from the second suggestive effect are included, and the preparatory effect is a first preparatory effect that foretells that the first suggestive effect will be executed. (for example, pending display notice preparation effect) and a second preparation effect (for example, timer preparation effect) for notifying that the second suggestion effect will be executed, and the third suggestion effect and the first preparation effect The effect and the second preparation effect can be executed in parallel during the same period (see FIGS. 17-11 (A1) and (A2)), and either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is executed. The gaming machine is more likely to execute the third suggestive effect when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is being executed than when it is being executed (for example, see FIGS. 17-10). is mentioned.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the effect control means recognize the current set value regardless of the type of selectable set value without pressurizing the capacity of the game control means. Moreover, a suitable value can be reflected in the effect as a set value. In addition, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

It should be noted that setting values may be suggested depending on the type of presentation mode such as suggestion presentation or preparation presentation. For example, by selecting the effect mode of the suggestive effect and the preparation effect from a plurality of types by lottery etc., and by varying the selection ratio of each effect mode depending on the set value, the set value The suggestive effect and the preparatory effect in a particular type of effect mode may be more likely to be performed as it is more advantageous to the player. By doing so, when the suggestive effect or the preparatory effect in the specific type of effect mode is executed, the interest can be preferably maintained and the set value is advantageous for the player. Since the expectations for the game are also increased, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.
Further, the setting value may be suggested by a plurality of elements (for example, two elements, namely, the type of effect mode of the suggestive effect and the type of effect mode of the preparation effect). In this way, when setting values that are advantageous to the player are suggested for a plurality of factors, the player can be more confident that the setting values are advantageous to the player. Even if no setting value that is advantageous to the player is suggested, the player can continue to expect that the setting value is advantageous to the player if another factor suggests an advantageous setting value. , can improve the game interest.

Furthermore, the present setting value can be recognized by the effect control means regardless of the type of selectable setting value without pressing the capacity of the game control means, and the game can preferably maintain the interest. As an example of the form of the machine, it is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a suggestive effect (for example, a hold display notice effect) that suggests that it will be controlled to an advantageous state. , timer effect, chance first notice effect, etc.); preparation effects, etc.), and the suggestive effects include a first suggestive effect (e.g., pending display notice effect) and a second suggestive effect (e.g., timer and a third suggestive effect (for example, a chance foretelling effect) different from the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect, and the preparatory effect foretells that the first suggestive effect will be executed. Including a first preparation effect (for example, pending display notice preparation effect) and a second preparation effect (for example, timer preparation effect etc.) for notifying that the second suggestion effect will be executed, a third suggestion effect, a first The preparation effect and the second preparation effect can be executed in parallel during the same period (see FIGS. 17-11 (A1) and (A2)), and either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is executed. There is a gaming machine in which the third suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is being executed (see, for example, FIGS. 17-10) than when the player is present. An example of the form of these gaming machines will be described below as another form.

(Basic description as a premise of the characterizing part of the present embodiment)
First, with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15, among the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1, which are the premises of the feature section described later, points that differ from the above-described FIGS. 2, 4, and 5 will be described. . Other than these differences, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1, which is the premise of the feature part, is basically the same as the configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 described above with reference to FIGS. It is the same.

FIG. 13 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko game machine. Instead of connecting the frame LED 9 to the performance control board 12 via the LED control board 14, the lamp control The main difference from FIG. 2 is that a game effect lamp 909 is connected via a substrate 9014 . In addition, the game effect lamp 909 is provided at the position where the frame LED 9 is provided in the peripheral portion of the game area in FIG. 1, and the game effect lamp 909 includes an LED.

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 9014, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 909 . Also, a lamp signal (a signal designating the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 9014 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The lamp control board 9014 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 909, drives the game effect lamp 909 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 909 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 9014, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process similar to that of FIG. 3 described above receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 14 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S9021). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S9022). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the odds have changed, etc.) are output (step S9023).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S9024). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S9025). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, normal symbol process is executed (step S9026). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S9027). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S9027, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S9025 shown in FIG. 14 as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process processing, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning judgment processing (step S90101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning set to be transmitted in this way is, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, by executing the command control process of step S9027 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting winning determination process in S90101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S90110 to S90120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In each process (steps S90110 to S90120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S90111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S90112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S90113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small win" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S90114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S90115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot open post-processing of step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution count, and a jackpot gaming state when the upper limit execution count is reached. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening pretreatment of step S90118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S90119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S90120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.
(Description of Characteristic Portion 153SG)

Next, the game machine in the characteristic part 153SG of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 16-1 to 16-34.

First, FIG. 16-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 16-1 and 16-3, the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 153SG001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a game board (gauge It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (frame) 153SG003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. In addition, in the game machine frame 153SG003, a glass door frame 153SG003a having a glass window is positioned around the left side between a door open position where the front surface of the game machine frame 153SG003 is opened and a door closed position where the front surface is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 153SG003a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 153SG003a is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 153SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it. The door frame 153SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 153SG002L is a game area in which a game ball hit relatively weakly (left-handed) by operating the ball operating handle 30 flows down. This is the game area in which a game ball that is hit harder (right-handed) than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 153SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

In addition, the left game area 153SG002L is provided with a general winning hole 10, and the right game area 153SG002R includes a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general game area 153SG002R from upstream to downstream of the right game area 153SG002R. A winning hole 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. In other words, the game ball flowing down the left game area 153SG002L can win the first start winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 153SG002R can be variable. It is possible to win the second start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10 and the large winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and to pass through the passage gate 41. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 16-1, between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7, a plurality of obstacle nails 153SGK1 are arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 153SG002L cannot win the second starting winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right gaming area 153SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It's becoming

In addition, a first reserved memory display area 153SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 153SG005U are set on the left and right of the lower portion of the display area of the image display device 5 . In the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U, a reserved memory display for identifiably displaying the reserved memory number (special figure reserved memory number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 16-2 and 16-3, the main board 11 in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment is housed in a board case 153SG201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this state. In addition, the main board 11 has a lock switch 153SG051 for switching to a setting value change state in which the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), etc., which will be described later in the setting value change state. A setting changeover switch 153SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing setting values, and an open sensor 153SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 153SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the setting value change state in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment is a state in which the game hall clerk or the like can check the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (setting value confirmation state). ) is also

A setting-switching main body portion provided with operation portions that can be operated by a player, such as the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting-switching switch 153SG052, is accommodated in the substrate case 153SG201 together with the main substrate 11, and the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting-switching switch 153SG052 are housed in the substrate case 153SG201. are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case 153SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 153SG201.

Since the substrate case 153SG201 having the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting changeover switch 153SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the game machine frame 153SG003 is closed. Operation is possible by opening the gaming machine frame 153SG003 using the key. Further, since the lock switch 153SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a game arcade clerk or the like, it can be operated only by the clerk who possesses the setting key. In addition, the lock switch 153SG051 is also a switch capable of switching between ON and OFF, which will be described later, by means of a setting key. In the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used for both.

A display monitor 153SG029 capable of displaying set values and base values, which will be described later, is arranged on the substrate case 153SG201. The display monitor 153SG029 is connected to the main substrate 11 and arranged above the substrate case 153SG201. That is, the display monitor 153SG029 is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case 153SG201 when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 153SG003 is not opened, the front when the main board 11 is visually recognized means the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 153SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 16-1 and 16-2, at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the second 1st special symbol display device 153SG004A capable of executing variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 153SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st pending display capable of displaying the number of first pending memories device 153SG025A, second reservation display 153SG025B capable of displaying the second reservation memory number, normal design display 153SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal design, normal design reservation display 153SG025C capable of displaying the number of normal design reservation storage, A round display 153SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during the jackpot game, and in a game state in which game balls such as a high base state (time saving state) or jackpot game state are launched toward the right game area 153SG002R. A game information display unit 153SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 153SG132 that lights up, a variable probability lamp 153SG133 that lights when in the variable probability state, and a short time lamp 153SG134 that lights in the high base state (shorter time state) are collectively arranged.

Each of the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B is composed of an 8-segment LED. In addition, in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

When the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 153SG004A uses two types of big hit symbols (combination of LEDs that light up) for each big win type as the variable display result. Derivation display is possible. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbol, when the variable display result is a big hit, the second special symbol display device 153SG004B variably displays two kinds of big win symbols (a combination of lit LEDs) for each big win type. Results and derivations can be displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different between the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B, but the first special symbol display device 153SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed in the second special symbol display device 153SG004B may overlap.

The first suspension display 153SG025A and the second suspension display 153SG025B each have four segments of LEDs arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. With these first pending display 153SG025A and second pending display 153SG025B, if the number of pending memories is 1, only the LED at the left end lights up, and as the number of pending memories increases, the second from the left, The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Each time the variable display is executed, the reserve memory is reduced (consumed), so that the LED in the reserve display device corresponding to the variable display is shifted in a predetermined shift direction (feature of the present embodiment). In the part 153SG, the lights are extinguished toward the left direction).

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory is preferentially executed. It looks like For this reason, for example, when there is one first special figure pending memory and two second special figure pending memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first pending indicator 153SG025A is lit and the second pending If the two LEDs on the left of the display 153SG25B are lit), after the second special figure pending memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory, the first special figure pending A memory-based variable display is performed.

Also, the round indicator 153SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). Incidentally, as the jackpot types in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A that is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B that is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C that is a 15-round jackpot. Which of the segments constituting the round indicator 153SG131 lights up differs depending on the types of these jackpots.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation of the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 909. and LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs.

It should be noted that the effect control board 12 in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 153SG321 and a second movable body 153SG322 that can move between the origin position and the effect position during variable display, etc. An origin detection sensor 153SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 153SG321 is positioned at the origin position of the first movable body 153SG321, and the second movable body 153SG322 is positioned at the origin position of the second movable body 153SG322. An origin detection sensor 153SG332 capable of detecting that is connected.

FIG. 16-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 153SG in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 16-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 16-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 153SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 16-4(B), the determination result (predetermined result ), and different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 16-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specifying command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor win".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that designates stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state , time-saving state) is the second game state designation command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command for designating the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) occurrence has been determined on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for a large winning opening that notifies that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the performance image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning mouth and the notification command after opening the big winning mouth, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win game state or the small win game state (for example, "1" to "15"). be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing the special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 153SG004B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to display the number of special figure reserved storage so that it can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number, in order to display the number of special figure pending storage so as to be identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol specifying command indicating whether or not the variable display result will be a "big win" and the judgment result of the big win type (probability variation, non-probability variation, etc.) as a result of determination at the time of winning. In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating whether the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is a command.

The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (that power has been restored, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started after clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that performs control operations by executing a program for game control, and update of numerical data indicating random numbers independently from the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them in the variable data write operation, Variation data reading operation to read out, CPU103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105, CPU103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105 and a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

FIG. 16-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 16-5, in the characteristic portion 153SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for the big hit type determination, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for judgment, the random number MR4 for judging the results of the normal map display, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 16-5. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

FIG. 16-6 shows variation patterns in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for cases such as when the display result is a "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "minor hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach performance such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, . A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 16-6, for the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment is executed, the super reach fluctuation pattern super reach α, super reach β is set shorter than Also, for the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach production of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach β is executed Toku-zu fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach α is executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach so that the degree of expectation for a big hit becomes high, so the normal reach variation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into types of fluctuation patterns, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc. Rather than first determining and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these variations After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value for determining the pattern type, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16-6, a form in which the content of variation (content of presentation) is determined in advance for each variation pattern is exemplified. This is not a limitation, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the content of variation (content of presentation) may differ according to the set value. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, if the set value is 1, the normal reach variation pattern will be lost, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect will be performed. If the set value is 3 as a variation pattern that results in non-reach loss by executing twice, a variation pattern that results in super reach loss by executing pseudo-continuous effect three times, and so on may be used.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and the variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 16-7 (A), a second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. In addition to the big hit type determination table (for the first special design) shown in -8 (A), the big hit type determination table (for the second special design) shown in FIG. 16-8 (B), the big hit variation pattern determination table, the small hit A fluctuation pattern determination table, a deviation fluctuation pattern determination table, a normal diagram display result determination table (not shown), a normal diagram fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. In other words, the set value is such that 6, which is the largest value, is the most unfavorable value for the game hall side, and 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 are values that are advantageous to the game hall side as the values become smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Become.

FIGS. 16-7(A) and 16-7(B) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, as the display result determination table, separate display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this. A common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 16-7 (A), when the set value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 16-7 (B), when the set value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 16-7 (A), when the set value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 16-7 (B), when the set value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 16-7 (A), when the set value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 16-7 (B), when the set value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 16-7 (A), when the set value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the gaming state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 16-7 (B), when the set value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 16-7 (A), when the set value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 16-7 (B), when the set value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 16-7 (A), when the set value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 16-7 (B), when the set value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when the normal state or time saving state (low probability state), " It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the determined probability (in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the setting value is 1, 1/280 when the setting value is 2, 1/260 when the setting value is 3, setting 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6), the special figure display result is set as "big win" and controlled to a big win game state. Then, the probability of being determined increases (in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1/180 when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, and 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the probability variable state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state or time-saving state. is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the judgment value is increased.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16-7, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state varies depending on each setting value (for example, setting If the value is 1, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability of the jackpot in the variable state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state. The magnification is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time-saving state at each set value is all set to be constant (for example, 5 times). good too.

In addition, in each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to the small win game state is the same value. A judgment value is assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16-7 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure. Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result determination table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16-7 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/100.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" regardless of the setting value is the same probability. , The present invention is not limited to this, and may vary the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to a small hit game state as a "small hit" according to the set value. Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to a small hit gaming state as a "small hit" according to the variation special figure is exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variable special figure may be the same probability.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to the "big hit" or "small hit" in each display result determination table, the first special figure display result in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state In the determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common value range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as the reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is a variable probability state, when the setting value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range A number within the range plus the non-common number range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the same as the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. Of the judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, Numerical values within the range plus the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpots." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the setting value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are determined based on the hit determination value of 1020. The determination value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 is set as the numerical range of the big hit determination value, and regardless of the game state and the set value, the continuous numerical range of 1 based on the hit determination value of 32767 (common The variable display result is determined with the determination value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result determination tables, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is identical). In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as described above, in each game state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "big win" and the control to the big win game state is determined is the highest. Judgment values are assigned so that the higher the value of the set value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be controlled to the big hit game state as "big hit" (jackpot probability: set value 6 > set value 5>setting value 4>setting value 3>setting value 2>setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the big hit (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 16-7 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Also, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 153SG004A or the second special symbol display device 153SG004B It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 153SG004A or the second special symbol display device 153SG004B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, a total of six set values 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

Figures 16-8 (A) and 16-8 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101 is. Of these, FIG. 16-8 (A) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 16-8 (B) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot C based on a random number (MR2) for hit type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern. This table is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot type in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 16-9. In the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends and the jackpot A (also referred to as a non-probability variable jackpot) that shifts to a low-probability high base state, and the jackpot game A big hit B and a big hit C (also referred to as a variable probability big hit) are set in which high-probability control and time-saving control are executed after the end and shift to a high-probability-high base state.

The jackpot game state by the "jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. B" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the jackpot game state of the "jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated.

The time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by "jackpot A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times Before the game is executed, the game ends by entering a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, the high-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the big win B or big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is the big win B or the big win C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state ends, so that the big win game state is continuous without going through the normal state. This is the so-called continuous state that occurs in

In addition, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two jackpot types. You may provide less than a kind or four kinds or more.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16-8 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A. 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16-8 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit A. 100 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. That is, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, while the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the winning opening in which the game ball has won is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening , regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the jackpot type is determined at a common ratio.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for jackpot type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is You may determine using MR1 which is a random number value for special figure display result determination.

In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined result. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hits used when it is decided in advance that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and the variable display result will be a "small hit". A big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be "loss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, each variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIGS. 16-10 (A) and 16-10 (B), as the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the jackpot variation pattern determination table (jackpot A ) and a big-hit variation pattern judgment table (for big-hit B, big-hit C) used when the big-hit types are for big-hit B and big-hit C are prepared in advance. A) and the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B, jackpot C) include the variation pattern for the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the variation pattern for the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot. A predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to each variation pattern of the variation patterns (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 16-10 (A), in the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A), 1 to 400 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are normal reach big hit variation patterns (PB1 -1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). assigned.

As shown in FIG. 16-10 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), 1 to 200 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are normal reach jackpot variations. It is assigned to the pattern (PB1-1), 201 to 550 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1- 3).

In addition, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random value out of the range that the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination can take for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1) is the determination value. assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16-10 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, 0 to 997 out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are small hit variation patterns ( PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more small hit variation patterns are provided. may be provided.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss used when the number of pending memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the time saving control is not performed, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is implemented are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table for loss A, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super A predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a judgment value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the reach β deviation.

As shown in FIG. 16-11 (A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for 1 or less total pending storage in low base), 1 to 450 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α out of It is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of super reach β deviation.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss B, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 2 to 4 (PA1-2), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take for the fluctuation pattern of reach α deviation (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). It is

As shown in FIG. 16-11 (B), in the variation pattern determination table B for loss (for 2 to 4 total pending memories in low base), 1 to Up to 500 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), 501 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 is super reach α. , and 901 to 997 are assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-3) of Super Reach β.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss C, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 5 to 8 (PA1-3), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take for the fluctuation pattern of reach α deviation (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). It is

As shown in FIG. 16-11 (C), in the variation pattern determination table C for loss (for 5 or more total pending memories in low base), 1 to 550 in the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α out of It is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of super reach β deviation.

In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach deviation corresponding to the time saving control (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α variation pattern deviation (PA2-2), a predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) that is out of super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 16-11 (D), in the deviation pattern determination table D (for high base medium), 1 to 550 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are non-reach deviation fluctuations It is assigned to the pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α deviation deviation pattern (PA2-2) , and 901 to 997 are assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-3) of super reach β.

Thus, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is set higher than the ratio of deciding the super reach fluctuation pattern. Also, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for deviation, 701 to 900 of the judgment values are super reach α deviation fluctuation patterns, and 901 to 997 are super reach β deviations, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. Assigned to each variation pattern, that is, if the variable display result is a loss, the variation pattern of super reach is determined by a common determination ratio, so the variable display by the variation pattern of super reach is not executed. It is possible to prevent the effect from decreasing.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the super reach α loss variation pattern and the determination ratio of the super reach β loss variation pattern as the loss variation pattern are completely the same between the set values. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β are between each set value may be slightly different (for example, about 1%).

In addition, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is lost, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach is the same, but the present invention is limited to this. However, if the variable display result is out of range, the determination ratio of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, and any variation between non-reach and normal reach Only the determining proportions of the patterns may be identical.

In addition, the variation pattern (PA1-2) of non-reach deviation is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach deviation without shortening, and the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 16-6). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, a non-reach variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, making it easier to digest the retained memories, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By starting winning when there is no reserve memory, it becomes difficult to generate useless starting prizes that are not reserved, and when the number of reserved memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long. Determining the pattern (PA1-1) lengthens the variable display time, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game due to non-execution of the variable display.

Further, in the characteristic unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Although the mode for determining the pattern is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of pending memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the first A variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for losing according to the reserved memory number of special symbols, or the reserved memory number of the second special symbol when variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect for each determined variation pattern and which ready-to-win effect to execute are associated one-to-one. , The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the production control CPU 120 executes the reach production based on the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach production is executed It may be determined by lottery.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 16-1 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

Next, the display of the display monitor 153SG029 in the characterizing portion 153SG of this embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 16-12(A), the display monitor 153SG029 has a first display section 153SG029A, a second display section 153SG029B, a third display section 153SG029C, and a fourth display section 153SG029D. Each of the first display portion 153SG029A to the fifth display portion 153SG29E is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. These first display section 153SG029A to fifth display section 153SG29E are capable of lighting and blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

In addition, the display control of the display monitor 153SG029 in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment is executed using the non-test area in the entire area of the ROM 101 and RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko game machine 1. .

On the display monitor 153SG029, as shown in FIGS. 16-12 (B) and 16-12 (C), the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states Base L which is (real time value during measurement), Base 1 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) every 1st out 6000 balls in all game states, and Base 1 in all game states Base 2, which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low-probability-low base state) for every 2nd out-out every 6000 balls, and the normal state (low-probability-low base state) for every 3rd out-out in all game states Base 3, which is the base value calculated in , can be displayed. Base L, Base 1, Base 2, and Base 3 are displayed in percentages on display monitor 153SG029.

When actually displaying the base L on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 153SG029A and "L. ” is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from “00” to “99”) are displayed in the third display portion 153SG029C and the fourth display portion 153SG029D. When displaying the base 1 on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 153SG029A and "1." is displayed on the second display section 153SG029B in order to display "b1." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 153SG029C and the fourth display portion 153SG029D. When displaying the base 2 on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 153SG029A and "2." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 153SG029C and the fourth display portion 153SG029D. Further, when displaying the base 3 on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 153SG029A and "3." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 153SG029C and the fourth display portion 153SG029D.

In the display monitor 153SG029 of the present embodiment, control for sequentially displaying these base L, base 1, base 2, and base 3 is executed under the control of the main substrate 11 (CPU 103). For example, the main substrate 11 performs control to switch the display of the display monitor 153SG029 in the order of base L→base 1→base 2→base 3 at intervals of 5 seconds. The base values displayed on the display monitor 153SG029 are displayed in different colors according to the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. Specifically, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in white, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in white. When it is "2", each base value is displayed in blue on the display monitor 153SG029, and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "3", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in yellow. When the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in green, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in green. 5", each base value is displayed in red on the display monitor 153SG029, and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "6", each base value in the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in purple. indicate. Therefore, the game parlor clerk or the like can identify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 only by confirming the display color of the display monitor 153SG029, without the CPU 103 executing the setting value change processing described later. ing.

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. A data holding area 153SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 153SG190 shown in FIG. 16-13 (A) includes a production control flag setting unit 153SG191, a production control timer setting unit 153SG192, a production control counter setting unit 153SG193, and a production control buffer setting unit 153SG194. I have it.

The effect control flag setting unit 153SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 153SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 153SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 153SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 153SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 153SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 153SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 153SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 153SG194A, the storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure in the variable display. In addition, in the startup winning command buffer 153SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure being displayed in a variable manner. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A are these starting entrance winning designation command, symbol designation command, variation category designation command, A storage area (entry) is reserved for storing the number of pending memories notification command in association with the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are changed later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the decorative design variation stop process executed when ending.

Furthermore, in the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display in the later-described pre-reading notice setting process (FIGS. 16 to 18) is secured for each storage area (entry).

The pending display flag stores "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal pending memory display when the execution of the pending display announcement effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process to be described later. By doing so, the suspension memory display of the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first suspension memory display area 153SG005D and the second suspension memory display area 153SG005U, and when the execution of the suspension display notice effect is determined is "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star ( ☆)) or special mode (for example, blue or red camera) by setting "3" (blue camera) or "4" (red camera) corresponding to the display pattern of the pending memory display, is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U. The possibility of a ready-to-win situation and the high possibility of execution of a setting suggestion performance suggesting the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 are announced.

The effect control CPU 120 stores a command from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the reception command buffer 153SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , pattern designation command, variation category designation command, and reserved storage number notification command.

16-13(B), the command stored in the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. 16-13(B) is an entry (buffer Entry number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to start -1”) and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the variable display to start are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 16-13 (B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands shifted and stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is being variably displayed at that time.

Next, the game control main processing in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 16-14 are flowcharts showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. FIG. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (153SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (153SGSa002). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (153SGSa003; N) or if the RAM 102 is not normal (153SGSa004; N), proceed to 153SGSa017, if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (153SGSa003; Y, 153SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6, that is, whether the RAM 102 stores a normal set value (153SGSa005).

If the set value stored in RAM 102 is not one of 1 to 6 (153SGSa005; N), proceed to 153SGSa017, and if the set value stored in RAM 102 is one of 1 to 6 (153SGSa005; Y) is whether or not a set value changing flag indicating that a set value change process (to be described later) was being executed before the power interruption (power interruption occurred during execution of the set value change process) is set. (153SGSa006). If the set value changing flag is set (153SGSa006; Y), proceed to 153SGSa017. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (153SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is started while the clear switch is being operated. (153SGSa008).

If the clear switch is ON (153SGSa008; Y), set the RAM clear flag and proceed to 153SGSa011 (153SGSa010). move on.

At 153SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa011). If the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor 153SG090 is ON (153SGSa012). When the open sensor 153SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a state where the lock switch 153SG051 is ON and the game machine frame 153SG003 is opened (153SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. (153SGSa013a).

If the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa013a; Y), set value change processing (153SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed to proceed to 153SGSa013d, RAM clear flag is not set (153SGSa013a; N), the setting value confirmation processing (153SGSa013c) for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 153SGSa013d.

In the set value change process (153SGSa013b), the CPU 103 first displays the currently set set value on the display monitor 153SG029. Next, every time the setting switch 153SG052 is operated, the setting values are updated and displayed on the display monitor 153SG029. Then, when the lock switch 153SG051 is turned off, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 153SG029 is updated and stored in the RAM 102, and the setting value newly updated and stored in the RAM 102 is specified by specifying the setting value. A command is output to the effect control CPU 120 .

Also, in the set value confirmation process (153SGSa013c), the CPU 103 displays the currently set set values on the display monitor 153SG029. Then, when the lock switch 153SG051 is turned off, the display of the set values on the display monitor 153SG029 is ended.

If the lock switch 153SG051 is OFF at 153SGSa011 (153SGSa011; N) or if the open sensor is OFF (153SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 153SGSa013d without executing the processes of 153SGSa013a to 153SGSa013c.

At 153SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared when the pachinko game machine 1 is started this time (RAM clear processing (153SGSa009) is executed) or not ( 153SGSa013d). If the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (153SGSa013e) is executed, and then the process proceeds to 153SGSa014. If the RAM clear flag is not set (153SGSa013d; N), the RAM clear process (153SGSa013e) without executing, go to 153SGSa014.

In the RAM clearing process (153SGSa013e), the CPU 103 executes a process of setting "00H" to all addresses except the address where the setting value is stored and the address where the RAM clear flag is stored (set). . That is, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in 153SGSa001 to 153SGSa013e and 153SGSa017 to 153SGSa021 described later, when there is no abnormality in the RAM 102, the address where the set value is stored and the RAM clear flag are stored. It is designed to clear the contents of all addresses except addresses that are

At 153SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines again whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa014; Y), proceed to 153SGSa022; (153SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed-up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be Then, the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored to the state before the power failure (activated by hot start), and transmits a restoration command including a hot start notification command to the performance control board 12, and proceeds to 153SGSa028. (153SGSa016).

Further, at 153SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated (153SGSa017). If the clear switch is ON (153SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa018) and whether the open sensor 153SG090 is ON (153SGSa019).

When the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa018; Y) and the open sensor 153SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or normal setting values are not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started according to a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 153SG003 is opened, the lock switch 153SG051 is turned ON, and the clear switch is operated, the pachinko game is played. When the machine 1 is started), the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (153SGSa020), and if the setting value changing flag is set, the setting value changing flag is cleared (153SGSa021). Then, the processes 153SGSa009 to 153SGSa016 described above are executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (153SGSa017; N), if the lock switch 153SG051 is OFF (153SGSa018; N), and if the open sensor 153SG090 is OFF (153SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 153SGSa031.

In addition, at 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated by cold start (153SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko game machine 1 is set (153SGSa023), and the cold start notification is started by starting flashing of all the segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029. (153SGSa024).

After executing 153SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by 1 (153SGSa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (153SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer has not timed out (153SGSa026; N), the processing of 153SGSa025 and 153SGSa026 is repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer has timed out (153SGSa026; Y), all segments in the display monitor 153SG029 stops blinking (153SGSa027) and proceeds to 153SGSa028.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, an example is illustrated in which all segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029 are flashed over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at the time of calling and starting the pachinko game machine 1, only a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029 may be blinked. Alternatively, at least some of all the segments forming the display monitor 153SG029 may be illuminated.

Then, in 153SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (153SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). The built-in CTC register is set (153SGSa029), and the interrupt is enabled (153SGSa030). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

In addition, at 153SGSa031, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), or the recovery from the power failure during the setting change described later. Then, an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value is transmitted (153SGSa031). Furthermore, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (153SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by 1 (153SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (153SGSa034). If the error notification execution waiting timer has not timed out (153SGSa034; N), the processing of 153SGSa033 and 153SGSa034 is repeatedly executed, and if the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (153SGSa034; Y), a set value abnormal error 153SG029A, second display 153SG029B, third display 153SG029C, and fourth display 153SG029D constituting the display monitor 153SG029 as notification (error notification) of the recovery from the power failure during the occurrence of or setting change. is displayed (153SGSa035).

In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B (153SGSa036), and the game is played through the terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a field management computer, and the process proceeds to 153SGSa032 (153SGSa037). Thereafter, the CPU 103 repeats the processing of 153SGSa032 to 153SGSa037 until power failure occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off by the operation of a game hall clerk, etc.), thereby displaying a display monitor 153SG029. , the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B execute error occurrence notification.

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, when an abnormal set value is set or when the power failure during the change of the set value is recovered, the display monitor 153SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B notify the occurrence of an error, the staff at the game parlor can check the occurrence of the error and the setting value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize recovery from power failure during change. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and recovery from a power failure during the change of the set value can be recognized even in the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It's becoming

Incidentally, in the game control main processing of the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although the form of executing the RAM clear processing (153SGSa009) after clearing the flag is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear processing , when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 153SGSa008 (153SGSa008; Y), or when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 153SGSa014 (153SGSa014 ;Y).

FIG. 16-15 is a flow chart showing the start winning determination process (S101) executed by the CPU 103 in the special symbol process process shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (153SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (153SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (153SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the first reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the first reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), it is sufficient to specify the number of first special figure reservation memory. 153SGS102 when the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value (153SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting mouth buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "1" (153SGS103 ).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at 153SGS101 (153SGS101; N), and when the number of first special figure reservation storage has reached the upper limit at 153SGS102 (153SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by , it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is ON (153SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (153SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (153SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), it is sufficient if it can specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At 153SGS105, when the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (153SGS105; N), for example, the stored value of the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "2" (153SGS106 ).

After executing either of the processes of 153SGS103 and 153SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (153SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (153SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section (not shown), may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the processing of 153SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit (not shown). Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for use and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (153SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (153SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit (not shown), while when the start buffer value is "2" , Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in a second special figure reservation storage unit (not shown).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the result of the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the result of the variable display is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variation display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 153SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results of the special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of 153SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (153SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

Following the process of 153SGS111, the winning random number determination process is executed (153SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (153SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

After executing the process of 153SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start buffer value is "1" (153SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (Y at 153SGS114), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (153SGS115), and then the process proceeds to 153SGS104. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (N at 153SGS114), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (S116), then the start winning process is executed. finish. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 16-16(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in 153SGS 112 of FIG. 16-15 as the winning random number determination process. In the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbols and the decorative symbols is started, the special symbol normal processing (S110 in FIG. 15) changes the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) to " It is determined whether or not to control to the big hit game state as "big hit", whether to control to the small hit game state as the special figure display result as "small hit", and the like. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (S111 in FIG. 15), determination of variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number determination process of 153SGS112. By, determination of whether or not it is determined to derive and display the big hit pattern as a special figure display result, determination of whether or not to derive and display the small winning pattern as a special figure display result, variable display mode of the decorative pattern determines whether or not is in a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, at the start of the variable display, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit. Prior to this, it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit", and in which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on this determination result Then, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes a pending display forewarning effect, as will be described later.

16-16 (A) in the random number determination process shown in FIG. The current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is specified (153SGS121). When the variable probability flag is on, the CPU 103 specifies that it is in a variable probability state, and when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, it specifies that it is in a time saving state, and both the probability changing flag and the time saving flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to specify that it is in a normal state.

Following the processing of 153SGS121, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 16-7 is selected and set (153SGS122). At this time, if the starting buffer value is 1, the CPU 103 sets the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 16-7 (A), and if the starting buffer value is 2, FIG. The second special figure display result determination table shown in (B) may be set.

After that, with reference to the jackpot numerical range (jackpot determination range) according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in the set display result determination table, the special figure extracted at 153 SGS 109 in FIGS. 16-15 It is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is within the jackpot determination range (153SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the display result judgment table selected by the processing of 153SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 compares the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is only necessary to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by performing point-by-point comparison. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variation display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined at 153SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that there is no jackpot at the time of variable display (153SGS123; N), it is further set to the pachinko game machine 1 in the set display result determination table. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted by 153SGS109 of FIG. It is determined whether or not it is within the small hit determination range (153SGS124). In the small hit judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the display result judgment table selected by the processing of 153SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and each judgment value It is only necessary to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value included in the small hit determination range, the CPU 103 generates the random number MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the small hit determination range It is sufficient if it can be determined whether or not the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination range by comparing with. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination range, it can be determined that the variation display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "small hit".

When it is determined that it is not within the small hit determination range at 153SGS124, that is, when it is determined that it does not become a small hit at the time of variable display (153SGS124; N), the variable display result is "miss". (153SGS125), and determines whether or not the time-saving flag is set, that is, whether the current game state is the time-saving state (153SGS126). If the time saving flag is not set (153SGS126; N), select and set the variation pattern determination table A for loss (153SGS127), and if the time saving flag is set (153SGS126; Y), the variation pattern for loss The judgment table D is selected and set (153SGSS128).

Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is one or less, as shown in FIG. 16-11(A). In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is, as shown in FIG. be.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, in addition to these variation pattern determination table A for loss and variation pattern determination table D for loss, the deviation that is used when the total number of pending memories is 2 to 4 A variation pattern determination table B for use and a variation pattern determination table C for loss used when the total number of pending memories is 5 to 8 are prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. Of the fluctuation pattern judgment tables A to C, in the fluctuation pattern judgment table A for loss, a value from 0 to 450 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of non-reach within the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take. In the fluctuation pattern determination tables B and C for loss, a value exceeding 0 to 450 is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern within the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for losing, values from 701 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation patterns of super reach within the range of possible random number values MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment.

Therefore, by determining the variation pattern (variation category) using the variation pattern determination table A for loss in 153SGS132, which will be described later, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always performed even if the number of retained memories changes after the determination. Since it becomes a variation pattern of non-reach or super reach, it is determined using the variation pattern determination table A for loss in the determination at the time of starting winning.

As shown in FIG. 16-16 (A), when it is determined that it is within the jackpot determination range at 153SGS123, that is, when it is determined to be a jackpot at the time of variable display (153SGS123; Y), jackpot type determination The type of jackpot is determined based on the random number MR2 for (153SGS130). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

In addition, the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the big hit type determined in 153SGS130 is executed (153SG131), and the big hit variation pattern determination table is selected as a table for determining one of the plurality of big hit variation patterns. set (153SG132).

In addition, when it is determined that it is within the small hit determination range at 153SGS124, that is, when it is determined that it will be a small hit at the time of variable display (153SGS124; Y), a symbol designation command according to the small hit type is transmitted. Execute the setting (153SG129).

After executing any of the processes of 153SGS127, 153SGS128, 153SGS129, and 153SGS132, the fluctuation pattern determination table set in the processes of 153SGS127, 153SGS128, 153SGS129, and 153SGS132 and numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern and is used to determine the variation category according to the range of determination values including the random number MR3 (153SGS133). In the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. A variable category that becomes a variable display mode, a variable category that becomes a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit) "Other" It is only necessary to provide a variation category and determine whether or not such a variation category is determined based on the random value MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of 153SGS132 to the effect control board 12 (153SGS134), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

FIG. 16-17 is a part of the flow chart of the effect control process (S76) in the characteristic part 153SG of this embodiment. In the effect control process processing in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, after the execution of the pre-reading notice setting processing (S161) shown in FIG. Any one of S170 to S177 shown in FIG. 7 after executing the pending display update process for updating the display mode and the number of display of the pending storage display according to the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. 16-13 (B) process is executed.

FIG. 16-18 is a flow chart showing the pre-reading notice setting process (S161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 16-17. In the pre-reading notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the contents of the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. (153SGS242). If there is no entry for which the pending display flag is not set, the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. It is determined whether or not there is an entry that has been set (153SGS243).

If there is an entry whose pending display flag value is already set to any one of 1 to 4, that is, if the pending display notice effect has already been executed, the entry (153SGS242 has the pending display flag "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the pending display notice effect is set to the pending display flag of the entry determined as not being executed (that is, it is decided to display the pending memory display corresponding to the entry with "○"). to end the advance notice setting process (153SGS251). As will be described later, the case where there is an entry whose value of the pending display flag is already set to any one of 1 to 4 means that the pending display notice effect has already been executed. That is, in the process of 153SGS243, when the suspension display forewarning effect has already been executed, execution of a new suspension display forewarning effect is restricted.

In 153SGS243, if there is no entry set to any of the values 1 to 4 of the pending display flag, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the entry (the entry determined that the pending display flag is not set in 153SGS242 ) indicates a big hit (153SGS244). When the pattern designation command of the entry indicates a big hit, the jackpot type is specified from the pattern designation command of the entry (153SGS245), and extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the production control counter setting unit 153SG193, for example. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pending display notice effect and the jackpot type specified in 153SGS245, by referring to a jackpot time pending display notice effect determination table (not shown), whether or not the hold display notice effect is executed and the hold display. A display pattern in the case of executing the advance notice effect is determined (153SGS246).

In 153SG246, for example, execution/non-execution of the pending display forewarning effect and the display pattern (forecast type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 16-19(A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16-19 (A), depending on the jackpot type specified in the processing of 153SGS245, the presence or absence of the pending display notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are varied.

In the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, four types of display patterns (preview types) of the pending display pre-notice effect are provided: the display pattern α, the display pattern β, the display pattern γ, and the display pattern δ. Among these, when the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending memory display is displayed as a white square (◇) in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U. When the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the pending memory display is displayed in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U with a white star (☆). When the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern γ, the pending memory display is displayed in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U with the blue camera, and the pending display is performed. When the display pattern of the notice effect is determined to be the display pattern δ, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U with the red camera. Further, when non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined, the pending memory display is displayed in a white circle (○) in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U.

Here, as shown in FIG. 16-19 (A), when the jackpot type is jackpot A (non-probable variable jackpot), non-execution of pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 55%. , the execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern α is determined, the execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 10%. is determined, and execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C (probability variable jackpot), non-execution of pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and pending display notice effect with display pattern α is determined at a rate of 20%. Execution is determined, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 55%, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 10%, and execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 10% Execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined.

Returning to 153SGS244, when the symbol designation command of the entry is a loss or a small hit, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the variation category from the variation category designation command of the entry (153SGS248), for example, the random number circuit 124 and effect control. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pending display notice effect extracted from the random counter of the counter setting unit 153SG193 and the big hit type specified in 153SGS249, a small hit/losing hold display notice effect determination table (not shown) is referred to. By doing so, it is determined whether or not to execute the pending display announcement effect and the display pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16-19(B), when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is non-reach, the non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%, Execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the pending display forecast effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 0%. Execution of the pending display notice effect is determined, and execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the variable display result is a loss or a small hit and the variation category is other (normal reach is a loss or a small hit), the non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 75%, and 20%. Execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 5%, and a pending display notice in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 0%. Execution of the effect is determined, and execution of the pending display forewarning effect with the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is super reach, non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pending display notice effect with the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 25%. Execution is determined, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 5%, and execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 5%. Execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 16-19(A) and 16-19(B), in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, when the pending display notice effect is executed, when the pending display notice effect is not executed In addition to being controlled to the jackpot game state at a higher rate than, when the pending display notice effect is executed in the display pattern β, than when the pending display notice effect is executed in the display pattern α It is set so that the type of jackpot is also jackpot B or jackpot C (probability variable jackpot) at a high rate. With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the jackpot type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. is the probability variable big hit, and the player's expectation for the probability variable big win can be increased.

Since the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ are display patterns that suggest the execution of the setting suggestion effect described later, the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) for being controlled to the big win gaming state than the display pattern α and the display pattern β. is not set to be high, and the degree of expectation (probability-variable degree of expectation for big win) for the type of big win to be big win B or big win C is the same.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, the variation patterns that can be determined when the variable display result is a big hit are the variation patterns of normal reach and super reach, and as shown in FIGS. The case where the display pattern δ is determined is the case where the variable display result is a big hit or the variable display result is a loss and the variation category is super reach. In other words, the pending memory display of the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ (blue and red camera aspects) also suggests that it is a super reach variable display capable of executing a setting suggestion effect, which will be described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16-19 (B), if the variation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, if it is determined that the special figure variation time is shorter than the super reach , the pending memory display is never displayed in the form of a blue or red camera.

Returning to FIGS. 16-18, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the pending display notice effect is determined after executing the process of 153SGS246 or 153SGS249 (153SGS250). When execution of the pending display notice effect is determined, a value (one of 1 to 4) corresponding to the display pattern determined by the processing of 153SGS246 or 153SGS249 is set in the pending display flag of the entry to read ahead. The advance notice setting process is terminated (153SGS247). If it is decided not to execute the pending display notice effect, the pending display flag of the entry is set to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the pending display notice effect, and the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated ( 153SGS251).

16-20 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is set (153SGS271). When the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS271; Y), the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning time reception command buffer (not shown) Various command data and various flags stored in association (that is, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first special symbol being displayed in a variable manner, the first to fourth first special symbol reserved storage corresponding command data and various flags) are shifted upward by one buffer number (153SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 153SGS271 (153SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (153SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags (that is, variable display Various command data and various flags corresponding to the second special symbol, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first to fourth second special symbol reserved storage) are shifted upward by one buffer number. (153 SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing 153SGS272 or 153SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (153SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (153SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 153SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that three symbols are even-numbered symbols as the stop symbols. A combination of matching decorative patterns (big hit pattern) is determined. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", " 333", "555", "999", etc.). Further, when the received variable display result specifying command is the fourth variable display result specifying command corresponding to the jackpot C, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) in which three patterns are aligned with "7" is determined as the stop pattern. do. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, the stop pattern is a chance eye (3 ("334", "556", "778", etc.) are determined. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decoration symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach (153SGS277). If the variation pattern of the variable display is not the variation pattern of super reach, proceed to 153SGS285, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach, suggesting effect during the rear variable display during the reach effect of the variable display. and which effect is to be executed as the suggestive effect during variable rear display is executed (153SGS278). In other words, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in 153SGS277 to 153SG278, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display (big hit suggestive effect and setting suggestive effect) is the variation of the super reach variation pattern with a long special figure variation time. It can be executed only in the display, and it is not executed in the variable display of the normal reach or non-reach fluctuation pattern with a short special figure fluctuation time.

In addition, in the super reach variable display in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16-28, the variable display result becomes a big hit as a suggestive effect during the front variable display from the start timing of the variable display. It is possible to execute a timer effect suggesting a character effect suggested by the character displayed on the image display device 5 or that the result of the variable display will be a big hit, and suggesting a period until the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is started. , during the ready-to-win performance, which is the second half of the variable display, a jackpot suggesting performance suggesting that the result of the variable display will result in a big hit as a suggesting performance during the rear variable display, or a setting suggesting a set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. Suggestion production can be executed. In other words, the process of 153SGS278 is the process of determining whether or not to execute the suggestive effect during the rear variable display and which of the big win suggestive effect and the set suggestive effect to be executed during the ready-to-win effect as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. .

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during rear variable display (either the big hit suggestive effect or the set suggestive effect) has been determined in the process of 153SGS278 (153SGS279). If it is determined in the processing of 153SGS278 that the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is not to be executed, the process proceeds to 153SGS285. A front part variable display suggestive effect determination process for determining which of character effect and timer effect is to be executed as the suggestive effect during variable display is executed (153SGS280). That is, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, execution of the suggestive effect during the variable front display is not determined unless execution of the effect during the rear variable display is determined. In the variable display of reach and normal reach, timer effects and character effects are not executed as suggestive effects during front variable display.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the character effect has been determined as the suggestive effect during front variable display (153SGS281). When it is decided to execute the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the period until the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is set to the timer for waiting for the start of the suggestive effect during the variable rear display (as shown in FIG. 16-28 (A)). After 5 seconds from the start of the ready-to-win effect), proceed to 153SG285 (153SGS282), and if it is decided to execute the timer effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, wait for the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. The period until the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display on the timer (as shown in FIG. 16-28 (B), the value corresponding to the effect pattern of the timer effect (specifically, the effect pattern of the timer effect is 25 5 seconds after the start of the ready-to-win effect when the pattern TS-1 is the period, and 10 seconds after the start of the ready-to-win effect when the pattern of the timer effect is the pattern TS-2 which is the effect period of 30 seconds) ) and proceed to 153SGS285 (153SGS283).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern in 153SGS285. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (153SGS286).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (153SGS287). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . In addition, it outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 9014 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characterizing portion 153SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (153SGS288). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (153SGS289). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (153SGS290).

FIG. 16-21 is a flow chart showing the suggestive effect determination process during rear variable display (153SGS278) in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 16-20. 16-21, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. (153SGS301). In this process, when the first variable display start command reception flag is set, the value of the pending display flag of the entry "1-0" of the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A is specified, and the second variable display start command reception flag is set. If the display start command reception flag is set, the entry "2-0" in the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A may be specified.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the suggestive effect during the rear variable display and the effect to be executed as the suggestive effect during the variable rear display based on the value of the reserved display flag specified in 153SG301 (153SG302).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16-22(A), when the value of the pending display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "0", that is, the pending display notice effect is executed for the variable display. If not, the ratio of 90% determines non-execution of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display, the ratio of 10% determines the execution of the big hit suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the variable rear display, and the ratio of 0% determines the performance of the rear. Execution of setting suggesting effect is determined as suggesting effect during variable display. Also, if the value of the pending display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "1" or "2", that is, the pending memory display is displayed in a white square or star as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. If it is, the non-execution of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 50%, the execution of the jackpot suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 50%, and the performance of the suggested performance during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 0%. Execution of setting suggesting effect is determined as suggesting effect during rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the value of the reserved display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "3", that is, if the reserved memory display is displayed by the blue camera as the reserved display notice effect for the variable display, 30 % determines non-execution of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display, determines the execution of the jackpot suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the variable rear display at the ratio of 35%, and determines the execution of the suggestive performance during the variable rear display at the ratio of 35%. Determines execution of the setting suggestion effect. Then, if the value of the reserved display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "4", that is, if the reserved memory display is displayed by the red camera as the reserved display notice effect for the variable display, 0 % determines non-execution of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display, 30% determines the execution of the jackpot suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the variable rear display, and 70% determines the performance as the suggestive performance during the variable rear display. Determines execution of the setting suggestion effect.

That is, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, when the pending display forewarning effect is executed for the variable display, it is more likely than when the pending display forecast effect is not executed for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined at a high rate. Furthermore, when the pending memory display is displayed by a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "3" or "4"), Higher than when the pending memory display is displayed in a white square or star as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "1" or "2") It is set so that the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined by a ratio, and the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that execution of the setting suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than in the case.

Also, attention is paid to the case where the pending memory display is displayed with a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "3" or "4"). Then, if the pending memory display is displayed on the red camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display, the pending memory display is displayed on the blue camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined at a higher rate than when it was displayed as a camera, and the pending memory display is a blue camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the set suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when it is displayed in .

From the above, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, when the pending memory display is displayed in a square or a star shape as the pending display notice effect for the variable display, as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display While it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the big hit suggestive effect is executed, the pending memory display is displayed by a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. In this case, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the setting suggesting effect is executed as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the pending memory display is displayed on the red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display, the pending memory display is displayed on the blue camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. Since the ratio of execution of the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display is higher than in the case where it is displayed as a rear variable display, it is more important to play the game as to whether the setting suggesting effect is executed as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display. It is designed to attract people's attention.

Returning to FIG. 16-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during rear variable display has been determined in the process of 153SGS302 (153SGS303). If it is determined in the process of 153SGS302 that the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is not to be executed, the process of determining the suggestive effect during the variable rear display is terminated. , 153SGS302, it is determined whether or not execution of a jackpot suggestive effect is determined as a suggestive effect during rear variable display (153SGS304).

In the processing of 153SGS302, when the execution of the big win suggesting performance is determined as the rear variable display suggesting performance, the performance pattern of the big hit suggesting performance is determined and stored based on the variable display result, and the rear variable display suggesting performance determination processing is performed. End (153SGS305).

As shown in FIG. 16-22(B), a total of three effect patterns from pattern AS-1 to pattern AS-3 are provided as effect patterns that can be determined in the process of 153SGS305. Of these production patterns, pattern AS-1 is a production pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to a big win (big hit expectation) is the lowest, and pattern AS-2 is: This is a production pattern (expectation for big win: medium) that suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to the big win is higher than that of the pattern AS-1, and the pattern AS-3 has the highest ratio of the variable display result to the big win. It is a production pattern that suggests high (big hit expectation: high).

Then, in the processing of 153SGS305 described above, as shown in FIG. 16-23, when the variable display result is a big hit, the production control CPU 120 sets the production pattern of the big hit suggestion production at a rate of 10% to the pattern AS-1. , pattern AS-2 is determined at a rate of 30%, and pattern AS-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

On the other hand, in the process of 153SGS302, when it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the RAM 122 and refers to the setting value specified command received from the CPU 103 (Pachinko game machine 1 (153SGS306). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stores the effect pattern of the setting suggestive effect based on the specified set value, and ends the suggestive effect determination processing during rear variable display (153SGS307).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 16-22(B), a total of five patterns from pattern SS-1 to pattern SS-5 are provided as determinable effect patterns in 153SG307. Among these patterns SS-1 to SS-5, pattern SS-1 suggests the possibility that the set value is an odd number (for example, 1, 3, 5), and pattern SS-2 suggests the possibility that the set value is an even number ( For example, 2, 4, 6), pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility that the setting value is an odd-numbered intermediate setting or higher (for example, 3 or 5), pattern SS-4 indicates that the setting value may be an even intermediate setting or higher (eg, 4 or 6), and pattern SS-5 suggests that the setting value may be the highest setting (eg, 6).

Patterns SS-1 and SS-2 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any one of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that the set value is either 5 or 6 (high setting). It is assumed that the degree of expectation of being either is low, and for pattern SS-3 and pattern SS-4, when the set value is either 5 or 6, it is determined at a high rate, so that the set value 5, It is said that expectations for being 6 are high.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 153SG, the setting values 1 to 4 are set to be low, and the setting values 5 and 6 are to be high. Alternatively, setting values 1 and 2 may be set low, setting values 3 and 4 may be medium settings, and setting values 5 and 6 may be high settings, and the performance pattern execution ratio may be set.

In the processing of 153SGS307 described above, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern to pattern SS- at a rate of 60%, as shown in FIG. 16-24. 1, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-3 at a rate of 9%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 6%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 0% Decide on SS-5. Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the production pattern at a rate of 25%, the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, and 6 The pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of 9%, the pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 9%, and the pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 50%, determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%. SS-3 is determined at a rate of 10%, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 10%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 50%, and 10 SS-3 is determined at a rate of 10%, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 30%, and determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 30%. SS-3 is determined at a rate of 10%, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 30%, determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and 15 %, the pattern SS-3 is determined, the pattern SS-4 is determined at the rate of 30%, and the pattern SS-5 is determined at the rate of 5%.

As described above, in the present characteristic portion 153SG, the setting value suggestion effect is executed in pattern SS-1 or pattern SS-2, thereby suggesting that the setting value is any one of 1 to 4. It is suggested that the set value is 5 or 6 by executing the effect in pattern SS-3 or pattern SS-4. Then, when the setting suggesting effect is executed in the pattern SS-5, the setting value of 6 is determined.

FIG. 16-25 is a flow chart showing a suggestive effect determination process during front variable display (153SGS280) executed by effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 16-20. 16-25, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result of the variable display (153SGS311). In addition, it is determined whether or not execution of the setting suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during rear variable display (153SGS312).

If the execution of the jackpot suggestion performance is determined as the rear variable display suggestion performance, whether or not to execute the front variable display suggestion performance and the front variable display suggestion based on the execution of the jackpot suggestion performance and the result of the variable display The effect to be executed as the effect is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (153SGS313). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16-26(A), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 40%, and at a rate of 30%. determines execution of a character performance as a suggestive performance during front variable display, and determines execution of a timer performance as a suggestive performance during front variable display at a rate of 30%. Also, if the result of the variable display is a failure, 70% of the decisions are made to not execute the suggestive effect during the variable front display, and 25% of the decisions are made to execute the character effect as the suggestive effect during the variable front display. Execution of the timer effect is determined at a rate of 5% as the suggestive effect during the variable display of the front part.

In other words, in the case where the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss. Execution of suggestive performance is determined, and when the result of variable display is a big win, execution of character performance and execution of timer performance are determined at the same rate as suggestive performance during front variable display, while variable display result. In the case of a failure, execution of the character performance is determined at a higher rate than execution of the timer performance as a suggestive performance during the front variable display. is set.

In addition, when execution of the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display is determined, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggesting effect and the suggesting effect during the front variable display based on the result of the variable display. The effect to be executed as the presence/absence and suggestive effect during front variable display is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (153SGS314). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16-26(B), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 30%, and at a rate of 0%. determines execution of a character performance as a suggestive performance during front variable display, and determines execution of a timer performance as a suggestive performance during front variable display at a rate of 70%. In addition, when the result of the variable display is a failure, 80% of the decisions are made to not execute the suggestive effect during the variable front display, and 0% of the decisions are made to execute the character effect as the suggestive effect during the variable front display. Execution of the timer effect is determined at a rate of 20% as the suggestive effect during the variable display of the front part.

In other words, when the execution of the set suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, if the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is being performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss. It is set so that the execution of the suggestive effect is determined and the execution of the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display is not determined regardless of whether the result of the variable display is a big win or a loss. That is, the degree of expectation for a big hit in the timer effect is set higher than the degree of expectation for a big win in the character effect.

For this reason, when the variable display result is a big hit, execution of the timer effect is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss, so it is suggested during the front variable display. When the timer effect is executed as the effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the variable display result is a big win.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16-25, after executing 153SGS313 or 153SGS314, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during front variable display is determined (153SGS315). If it is decided not to execute the suggestive effect during the variable display of the front part, the process of deciding the suggestive effect during the variable display of the front part is terminated, and if it is decided to execute the suggestive effect during the variable display of the front part, the forward part is further processed. It is determined whether or not execution of a character presentation has been decided as a suggestive presentation during variable display (153SGS316).

When it is determined to execute a character presentation as a suggestive presentation during front variable display, the presentation pattern of the character presentation is determined and stored based on the variable display result, and the suggestive presentation determination processing during front variable display is completed. (153 SGS317).

Incidentally, as the effect pattern of the character effect that can be determined in the processing of 153SGS317, as shown in FIG. . Among these production patterns, the pattern CS-1 is a production pattern (big hit expectation: low) suggesting that the variable display result by displaying the character A (not shown) on the image display device 5 has the lowest probability of a big win. Pattern CS-2 is an effect pattern suggesting that the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit by displaying a character B (not shown) on the image display device 5 is higher than pattern CS-1 (expectation for big win: medium ).

Therefore, in the processing of 153SGS317, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. , and 80% of the time, pattern CS-2 is determined. On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, the effect pattern of the character effect is determined to be the pattern CS-1 at a rate of 80% and the pattern CS-2 at a rate of 20%.

Further, when execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the timer effect based on the effect determined to be executed as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. is determined and stored, and the suggestive effect determination process during variable part display is terminated (153SGS318).

As the effect pattern of the timer effect that can be determined in the processing of 153SGS318, as shown in FIG. Of these effect patterns, pattern TS-1 suggests that the percentage of variable display results that result in a big hit in image display device 5 is higher than pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 of character effects (expectation for big win: high). ) together with the pattern TS-2 indicates the period until the start of execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, together with the image of the character X, for 25 seconds. is higher than the pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 of the character production (big hit expectation: high), and the period until the execution of the rear variable display suggestive production is started with the image of the character Y for 25 seconds. (See FIGS. 16-27(C), 16-29(D) and 16-29(E)).

Therefore, in the processing of 153SGS318, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. The pattern is determined to be pattern TS-1 80% of the time, and pattern TS-2 20% of the time. In addition, when the suggestive effect during rear variable display whose execution has been determined is the set suggestive effect, the effect control CPU 120 determines the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80%, and the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 20%. Decide on 2.

That is, when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the timer effect is executed in pattern TS-2 rather than in pattern TS-1 (that is, timer In the case where the performance period of the performance is long and the character B is displayed on the image display device 5 rather than the character A, the ratio of executing the set suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is set higher. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect period of the timer effect and the character displayed on the image display device 5 . Also, when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, the player can expect the setting suggesting effect to be executed more than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to improve the game interest.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. The expectation of a big hit is set higher than when the character production is executed as a suggestion, and the suggestion production is set as a suggestion production during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character production is executed as a suggestion production during the front variable display. A production is to be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 16-20 to 16-28, when it is determined to execute the front variable display suggestive effect during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 determines in the variable display effect process (S172). Process data corresponding to the effect pattern of the suggestive effect during front variable display may be set, and the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer in the subsequent effect process during variable display (S172). Further, when it is determined to execute the suggestive effect during the rear variable display during the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the timer for waiting for the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display by 1 each time the effect processing during the variable display is executed. Then, based on the value of the waiting timer for starting the suggestive performance during the rear variable display becoming 0, the process data corresponding to the performance pattern of the determined suggestive performance during the variable rear display is set. Then, the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data according to the process timer in the effect process during variable display (S172).

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 16-28 (A) and 16-28 (B), the jackpot suggesting effect and setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display in the present characteristic part 153SG are during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect. It is executed for 7 seconds, which is a longer period than the special figure fluctuation time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 16-6). Therefore, even if the player takes his/her eyes off the image display device 5 for a moment, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the big win suggesting effect and the setting suggesting effect.

Next, an effect mode during variable display in the characteristic portion 153SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 16-29 to 16-31. First, as shown in FIGS. 16-29 (A) and 16-29 (B), a new starting prize is generated during the variable display, and based on the starting prize, a reserved memory display is displayed as a pre-reading notice effect. When the pattern is determined to be the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ, a new reserved memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera in the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U. .

Then, as shown in FIGS. 16-29(C) to 16-29(E), as a new variable display, when the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display which is the mode of the camera is started, the front part A timer effect is started as a suggestive effect during variable display. At this time, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is pattern TS-1, as shown in FIG. Renewal display of a timer for 25 seconds, which is a period up to the suggestive effect during variable display, is started. Further, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is pattern TS-2, as shown in FIG. An update display of a timer for 30 seconds, which is a period up to the suggestion effect during display, is started.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 16-30(F) to 16-30(H), when the variable display progresses with the timer update display until the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, the super ready-to-win effect is started. Then, when the timer reaches 0 seconds (timer performance ends) during execution of the super ready-to-win performance, a big hit suggesting performance or setting suggesting performance is started as a suggesting performance during rear variable display.

Specifically, when execution of a jackpot suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during rear variable display, if the determined effect pattern is pattern AS-1, as shown in FIG. 16-30 (I) In the image display device 5, a message such as "chance!" indicating that the expectation of a big hit is low is displayed, and if the determined effect pattern is pattern AS-2, it is shown in FIG. 16-30 (J). is displayed on the image display device 5 to the effect that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than that of the pattern AS-1, and if the determined production pattern is the pattern AS-3, as shown in FIG. As indicated by -30(K), a message indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than that of pattern AS-2, such as "Extremely Hot!", is displayed on the image display device 5. FIG.

On the other hand, when execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during rear variable display, as shown in FIGS. In the case of patterns SS-1 to SS-4, setting value suggestion images 131SG005H, 131SG005I, 131SG005J, and 131SG005K of different characters are displayed on the image display device 5, respectively, so that they are set in the pachinko machine 1. settings are suggested. Furthermore, when the effect pattern of the setting value suggesting effect is the pattern SS-5, the setting value suggesting image 131SGS005L, which is a collection of all the characters displayed on the image display device 5 in the patterns SS-1 to SS-4, is displayed on the image display device. 5.

As described above, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, when the reserved memory display is displayed as a pre-reading notice in the form of a blue or red camera, when the pre-reading notice is not executed or the reserved memory display The setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when is displayed as a white square or star. Therefore, the player anticipates that the setting suggestion effect will be executed in advance at the stage when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, and uses the mobile terminal such as a smartphone possessed by the player to suggest setting. It is now possible to make preparations for filming the production. In other words, the pending memory display in the mode of the blue or red camera in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment is also an effect prompting the player to prepare for photographing the setting suggestion effect.

As described above, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a character effect and a timer effect with a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than the character effect as a suggestive effect during variable front display that suggests the degree of expectation for a big win. As shown in -26 (D), when the timer effect is executed during the variable display, the suggested effect is set as the suggested effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed during the variable display. executed. That is, when the timer effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when the character effect is executed, so that the player pays more attention to whether or not the variable display result becomes a big win. The setting suggesting performance is executed in a state where the player is paying attention to prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggesting performance.

In addition, as the suggestive effect during the front variable display during the variable display, in addition to the character effect, it is possible to execute a timer effect that suggests the period until the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. The player can easily recognize the execution start timing of the setting suggesting effect by the execution.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, as the timer effect, a numerical value is displayed for the period until the start of execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display (see FIGS. 16-29 (D) and 16-29 (E)). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a timer effect, for example, by performing an increase/decrease display of a gauge, meter, etc., the rear variable display is suggested. The period until the start of execution of the effect may not be clearly notified (only an approximate period may be indicated).

Furthermore, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission of the game effect lamp 909, and the display means other than the image display device 5 Any one of the displays in , or a combination of a plurality of aspects may be executed.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 16-30(H) and 16-31(L), the timer displayed on the image display device 5 as a timer effect is set to 0. Based on this, there is a case where a big hit suggesting effect is executed in addition to the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display. In other words, even when the timer performance is executed, the big hit suggestion performance may be executed instead of the setting suggestion performance, so that the unexpectedness can be produced and the game interest can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, based on the fact that the timer displayed on the image display device 5 has become 0 as the timer effect, the setting suggesting effect and the big hit suggesting effect are performed as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display. Although only one of them can be executed as an example, the present invention is not limited to this. , both the setting suggesting performance and the big hit suggesting performance may be executed as the suggesting performance during the rear variable display.

Furthermore, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is always executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the suggesting effect during the rear variable display is not executed even if the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 16-27(B) and 16-27(C), as the effect patterns of the timer effect, a pattern TS-1 whose effect period is 25 seconds and a pattern TS-1 whose effect period is 30 seconds TS-2 is provided, and when the timer performance is executed with the pattern TS-2, the setting suggesting performance is executed at a higher rate than when the timer performance is executed with the pattern TS-1. In other words, when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, it is suggested that the setting suggesting effect is executed over a longer period of time than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 16-28, the suggestion effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect is executed during the ready-to-win effect period, which is the latter half of the super reach variable display, so that the setting suggestion effect by the player is executed. can be further prevented from being overlooked.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, a configuration in which the setting suggestion effect is executed during the reach effect period, which is the latter half of the super reach variable display, is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a case may be provided in which the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first half of the super reach variable display.

Further, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. In the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 3 or 4), which is the mode of the camera in which the pending display notice effect that can be displayed in the mode or the like can be executed, and the display mode is a blue or red camera mode, It is possible to determine the execution of the setting suggestion effect at a higher rate than the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 1 or 2) whose display mode is a white square or star. For this reason, in the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 3 or 4), which is the mode of the camera in which the display mode is blue or red, the player can decide whether the variable display result will be a big hit or not. Since the setting-suggestion performance is executed when the player is paying attention, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting-suggestion performance.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 16-29 and 16-31, when the pending display notice effect is executed, it corresponds to the pending memory display which is the target of the pending display notice effect. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect in the variable display (variable display immediately after the pending display notice effect is ended). Therefore, since the setting suggesting effect is executed when the player is paying attention to the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display which is the object of the pending display notice effect, the player is less likely to miss the setting suggesting effect. more can be prevented.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, a form in which a pending display notice effect can be executed as a pre-reading notice was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a holding display notice is used as a pre-reading notice. An effect other than the effect may be made executable, and it may be suggested that the setting suggestion effect is executed as the effect mode of the effect.

Furthermore, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, the setting suggesting effect can be executed in the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the variable display immediately after the pending display previous notice effect is terminated) that is the target of the pending display previous notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the execution period of the pending display notice effect The setting suggestion effect may be executed from the previous timing).

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 16-19, the ratio of displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as the pre-reading notice effect is changed to the white square or star shape as the pre-reading notice effect. Since the display ratio is set lower than the display ratio, the reserved memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode, so that the reserved memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape. It is possible to attract the attention of the operator and further prevent the operator from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the ratio of displaying the reserved memory display as the pre-reading notice effect in the form of a blue or red camera is set to the pre-reading notice effect in which the reserved memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pre-reading preview effect. The ratio may be set higher than the ratio of displaying the pending memory display as a white square or star as a pre-reading advance notice effect, or the pending memory display as a blue or red camera color as a pre-reading notice effect. The ratio of displaying in the mode and the ratio of displaying the reserved memory display as a white square or star as the pre-reading advance notice effect may be the same.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, by displaying the pending memory display in the mode of a blue or red camera as the pending display notice effect, the player is prepared to shoot the setting suggestion effect. Since the player can prepare a form terminal such as a smart phone before starting the setting suggesting effect, the success rate of photographing the setting suggesting effect by the player can be increased.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, by displaying the pending memory display in the mode of a blue or red camera as the pending display notice effect, the player is prepared to shoot the setting suggesting effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect, the speaker 8L, 8R Alternatively, the player may be separately prompted to prepare for photographing the setting suggesting effect by outputting a sound or displaying a message image on the image display device 5 .

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the display pattern γ for displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue camera and the display pattern δ for displaying the pending memory display in the form of a red camera are used to perform the pending display forewarning effect. It is executable, and as shown in FIG. 16-22 (A), when the pending memory display is displayed in the blue camera mode (when the value of the pending display flag is 3) and when the pending memory display is red The ratio of execution of the setting suggesting effect is different between the case of displaying in the camera mode (the value of the pending display flag is 4). In particular, when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a red camera, setting suggestion effects are executed at a higher rate than when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera. When the display is displayed in the form of a red camera, the player is more focused on whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed than in the case where the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera. It is possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, when the pending memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode, the pending memory display is displayed until the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display starts. Although the form in which the form does not change has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the display form of the pending memory display changes from the blue camera form to the red camera form. Further, the pending memory display corresponding to the variable display being executed is continuously displayed as the active display, and the display mode of the active display is changed from the blue camera mode to the red camera mode. may By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the setting suggesting effect is executed until the variable display is finished, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16-20, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestive effect is only in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern with the long special figure variation time. It is executable, and it is not executed in the variable display of the normal reach or non-reach fluctuation pattern with a short special figure fluctuation time, so the execution of the setting suggestion effect during the short variable display period is suppressed, and the game is played. It is possible to prevent the user from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 16-6 and 16-28, the execution period of the setting suggestion effect is set to 7 seconds longer than the special figure variation time of the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach, so the variable of super reach It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect during the display (during execution of the ready-to-win effect).

Also, as shown in FIGS. 16-19, when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display is super reach capable of executing the setting suggestion effect. Since it is suggested that it is a variable display, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the setting suggestion performance is executed by displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. can be improved.

Also, as shown in Figure 16-19, if the variation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, if it is determined that the special figure variation time is shorter than the super reach, the pending display Since the pending memory display is not displayed in the blue or red camera mode as the advance notice effect, the player's attention is not focused on the pending memory display being displayed in the blue or red camera mode. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent the setting suggesting effect from being executed and the interest to be lowered due to the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display being the variable display of non-reach, normal reach, or the like.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 16-20 to 16-28, during the variable display of super reach, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect during the front variable display including the timer effect, but it is more special than the variable display of super reach. Since the timer production is not executed during variable display of non-reach and normal reach with short fluctuation time, the suggestion production during rear variable display including setting suggestion production is not executed Timer production during variable display of non-reach and normal reach It is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconsistency in the performance due to the execution of

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the spirit of the present invention. include.

For example, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. The expectation of a big hit is set higher than when the character production is executed, and the suggestion production is set as the suggestion production during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character production is executed as the suggestion production during the front variable display. is set to be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. is set lower than the ratio for determining the execution of the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, and when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the variable front display, the variable front part It may be set so that the set suggesting effect is executed as the suggesting effect during rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the suggesting effect during display.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as a pre-reading notice, the reserved memory display is displayed as a white square, a star, or a blue and a red camera mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 16-33(B), when the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U, the image display device 5 displays the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D. When the predetermined effect image 153SG005E overlaps the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U, at least the reserved memory display in the mode of the blue or red camera is preferentially displayed over the effect image 153SG005E (the blue or red camera (displayed so as not to be hidden by the effect image 153SG005E). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the reserved memory display of the blue or red camera mode due to the effect image 153SG005E blocking the reserved memory display of the blue or red camera mode. be able to.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the above embodiment, a configuration was exemplified in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed for 7 seconds only during the variable display of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 16-34(A) and 16-34(B), as a modified example 153SG-3, it is possible to execute a setting suggesting effect for 7 seconds during variable display of normal reach and non-shortening non-reach. good too. Furthermore, during the variable display of the shortened non-reach, a period dedicated to the variable display of the shortened non-reach (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-34 (C), it is a special variable time of the variable display of the shortened non-reach 3 seconds (shorter than 3.75 seconds to 5.75 seconds) may be executed.

Further, in the characteristic part 153SG of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 153SG-4, the pending memory display is a blue camera mode The decision ratio of at least one effect pattern in the setting suggesting effect may be different between the case of displaying in the case of displaying in the form of the red camera and the case of displaying in the mode of the red camera. By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to which of the mode of the blue camera or the mode of the red camera the suspension storage display is displayed as the suspension display advance notice performance, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the above-described embodiment, two timings (25 seconds and 30 seconds after the start of variable display) are provided as the start timing of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display during the variable display of super reach. Although the setting suggestive effect is more likely to be executed as the rear variable display suggestive effect by executing the rear variable display suggestive effect from the timing, the present invention is not limited to this, and the modified example 153SG- As 5, when the setting suggestion effect start timing is 30 seconds after the start of the variable display, the setting suggestion effect is patterned at a higher rate than when the setting suggestion effect start timing is 25 seconds after the variable display start. SS-3 to pattern SS-5, etc., may be executed with effect patterns suggesting high set values. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, the setting suggesting effect is executed according to the effect executed as the suggesting effect during the front variable display and the display mode of the pending memory display displayed as the pending display forewarning effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect that is executed as a suggestive effect during the front variable display and the effect that is displayed as a pending display notice effect It may be suggested whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed by only one of the display mode of the pending memory display. Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode is illustrated in which the set suggestive effect can be executed as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display during the variable display in which the timer effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display is executed. , The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result of the variable display that executes the timer effect is a big hit, a setting suggestion effect is performed during the big win game (advantageous state in the present invention) based on the variable display. may be executed.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, when the suspension display forewarning effect has already been executed, the execution of the new suspension display forewarning effect is restricted, but the present invention is limited to this. However, if the pending display forewarning effect has already been executed, only the execution of the new pending display foretelling effect in a part of the display patterns may be restricted. For example, when the pending display notice effect is already executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ (when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera), a new pending display notice effect is executed. It restricts only what is executed in the display pattern α and the display pattern β (that the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming difficult to understand due to the simultaneous execution of a plurality of pending display forewarning effects with different suggested contents. Furthermore, when the pending display forewarning effect is already executed by the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ, the execution of the new pending display forewarning effect by the display pattern α or the display pattern β is restricted. , the player can be made to pay more attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed. Also, if the pending display notice effect has already been executed in display pattern α or display pattern β (when the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star), a new pending display notice effect By limiting only what is executed in the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ (that the pending memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode), it is possible to determine whether the variable display result will be a big hit or not. It is possible to make the player pay more attention.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a form in which the pending display notice effect can be executed as the prefetch effect in the present invention is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prefetch effect Alternatively, an effect other than the pending display notice effect may be executable if the effect is executable from the timing before the target variable display is started.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a form in which a character effect and a timer effect can be executed as an indication effect during the front variable display indicating that the variable display result will be a big hit was exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and the effect other than the character effect and the timer effect may be executed as the suggestive effect during the front part variable display as long as it is a effect suggesting that the result of the variable display will be a big hit.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 092IW)
Next, the characteristic portion 092IW will be described. In this characteristic part 092IW, a big hit suggesting performance suggesting that the variable display result of the variable display will result in a big hit, and a preparation performance notifying that the big win suggesting performance will be executed before the big win suggesting performance is executed. It is possible. In addition, the jackpot suggestion effect that is predicted to be executed by the preparation effect is the prediction effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (the variable display that is pending execution), and the jackpot reliability in the variable display that is being executed. It may be either a foretelling effect that forewarns the degree. In this characterizing section 092IW, as the jackpot suggesting effects, it is possible to execute a pending display forewarning effect, a timer effect, and a chance eye forewarning effect. In addition, as a preparatory effect for notifying that the big hit suggesting effect will be executed before the big hit suggesting effect is executed, a pending display for notifying that the pending display notifying effect will be executed before the pending display notifying effect is executed. A notice preparation effect and a timer preparation effect for notifying that the timer effect will be executed before the timer effect is executed can be executed.

FIG. 17-1 is a part of the flow chart of the effect control process (step S76) in this feature part 092IW. In the effect control process processing in this characteristic part 092IW, the pre-reading notice effect is executed after execution of the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) in which determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed for executing the pre-reading notice effect shown in FIG. A pre-reading notice execution process (step 092IWS162) for execution is executed, and then one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 shown in FIG. 7 is executed.

FIG. 17-2 is a flow chart showing the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 17-1.

In the pre-reading notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a new command for one set of starting winnings has been received (step 092IWS001). Specifically, it is checked whether or not one set of start winning designation command, pattern designation command, variation category designation command, and pending memory number notification command is newly stored in the reception command buffer at the time of start winning. In this example, in the command analysis process (step S75), when the command at the time of starting winning is received, the received command at the time of starting winning is stored in the received command buffer at the time of starting winning provided in RAM122. In this example, since the upper limits of the number of first reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories are 4, the reception command buffer at the time of start winning has four stores corresponding to the first reserved memories and the second reserved memories. area is provided. If the command for one set of start winning has not been newly received, the process is terminated as it is.

When one set of starting winning command is newly received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the pre-reading advance notice effect is being executed (step 092IWS001). If the pre-reading advance notice effect is being executed, the process is terminated as it is (that is, no new pre-reading notice effect is executed).

If the pre-reading advance notice effect is not being executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the number of pending memories is 2 or more (step 092IWS002). If the number of pending memories is not 2 or more, the process is terminated as it is (that is, no new pre-reading announcement effect is executed). It should be noted that whether or not the number of reserved memories is two or more can be determined, for example, by confirming the number of reserved memories notification command received from the game control microcomputer 100 .

When the pending storage number is 2 or more, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pending display notice effect and the effect mode in the case of execution (step 092IWS003).

The pending display notice performance is a performance suggesting that the display result of the corresponding variable display will be a big win by changing the display mode of the pending memory display (and the active display) to a display mode different from the normal mode. In addition, in this characteristic part 092IW, a pattern of changing the display mode at the time of being displayed as the pending memory display is shown as the pending display notice effect, but it is not limited to such a configuration, and is displayed as the pending memory display. It may include a pattern that is displayed in a normal mode when it is active and changes the display mode when it is displayed as an active display. That is, it may be possible to execute the pending display announcement effect that changes the display mode of the pending memory display or the active display at an arbitrary timing from the start winning point to the end of the target variable display. Similarly, the suspension display advance notice preparation effect for notifying that the suspension display notice effect will be executed may be configured to be executable at an arbitrary timing from the start winning point to the end of the target variable display. Also, the display mode of the pending memory display or the active display may be configured to change multiple times. In the case of such a configuration, it may be possible to execute the suspension display announcement preparation effect corresponding to each suspension display announcement effect.

FIG. 17-3(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pending display notice effect determination table. In step 092 IWS003, a random number for determining the effect is extracted, and the pending display notice effect determination table is referred to, and the newly received commands (symbol designation command and variable category command) at the time of starting winning are "non-reach out", Based on whether it corresponds to "super reach loss", "jackpot other than jackpot A", or "jackpot A", regarding the pending display notice effect, "no execution, pending memory display: normal mode (white)", "execution Select one of the following: Yes Reserved memory display: 1st production mode (blue), Execution with reserved memory display: 2nd production mode (green), and Execution with reserved memory display: 3rd production mode (red) do.

In the pending display notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 17-3(A), a determination value corresponding to a random number for effect determination is assigned for each winning determination result. Percentages of judgment values obtained are shown. In other words, for each prize-winning judgment result, the pending display notice effect is "without execution pending memory display: normal mode (white)", "executed pending memory display: first effect mode (blue)", "executed pending memory Display: 2nd production mode (green)" and "execution pending memory display: 3rd production mode (red)" are determined. In this example, in addition to the pending display notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 17-3 (A), the pending display notice preparation effect determination table shown in FIG. Regarding the timer effect determination table, the timer preparation effect determination table shown in FIG. 17-4(B), and the chance eye preview effect determination table shown in FIG. The ratio of whether it is determined to

Features of the pending display notice effect determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 17-3(A), in the pending display notice effect determination table, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "jackpot", compared to the case of "loss", the pending display notice effect "no execution" The determination value is assigned so that the rate of determination of "executed" is higher than that of ". In addition, in the pending display notice effect determination table, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "big win", compared to the case of "loss", "with execution pending memory display: first effect mode (blue)" ``Executed, reserved memory display: 2nd production mode (green)'' and ``with execution, reserved memory display: 2nd production mode (green)'' are decided to be ``with execution, reserved memory display: 3rd production mode (red)''. Judgment values are assigned so that the percentage of With such a configuration, when the pending display notice effect is executed, the second effect mode (green) is preferred to the first effect mode (blue), and the third effect mode (red) is preferred to the second effect mode (green). When executed with That is, the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of third rendering mode (red)>second rendering mode (green)>first rendering mode (blue)>no execution.

If it is determined not to execute the pending display notice effect in step S092IWS003 (N of step S092IWS004), the process proceeds to step S092IWS008, and if it is determined to be executed (Y of step S092IWS004), the effect control CPU 120 suspends A pending display notice effect flag indicating that it is decided to execute the display notice effect is set (step S092IWS005).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the pending display notice preparation effect (step S092IWS006). The pending display advance notice preparation effect is one of the preparation effects, and foretells that the pending display advance notice effect will be executed before the pending display advance notice effect is executed.

FIG. 17-3(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pending display advance notice preparation effect determination table. At step 092IWS006, a random number for determining the effect is extracted, and the pending display advance notice preparation effect determination table is referred to. It is determined to be either “with execution, first rendering mode (small effect)” or “with execution, second rendering mode (large effect)”.

Features of the pending display advance notice preparation effect determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 17-3(B), in the pending display notice preparation effect determination table, the higher the expectation of the effect mode of the pending display notice effect of the big hit, the more the pending display notice preparation effect is “executed”. Judgment values are assigned so that the rate of determination of "with execution" is higher than that of "without execution". In addition, in the pending display notice preparation effect determination table, the higher the expectation of the effect mode of the pending display notice effect of the big hit, the higher the “executed first effect mode (small effect)”. The determination value is assigned so that the ratio of determination to "2 effect mode (large effect)" is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that a big hit is achieved when the pending display advance notice preparation performance is executed, and furthermore, when it is executed in the second performance mode (large effect) rather than the first performance mode (small effect). will be In other words, the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of second presentation mode (large effect)>first presentation mode (small effect)>no execution.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the reserved storage number is 3 or more (step 092IWS007). If the reserved storage number is not equal to or greater than 3, the process ends. It should be noted that whether or not the number of pending memories is 3 or more can be determined, for example, by confirming the pending memory number notification command received from the game control microcomputer 100 .

When the number of pending memories is 3 or more, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the timer effect and the effect mode in the case of execution (step 092IWS008).

The timer effect suggests a period from the start timing of the target variable display to the start of execution of a specific effect (for example, a suggestive effect during the rear variable display in the characteristic portion 153SG), as well as suggesting that the result of the variable display will be a big hit. It is a performance.

In this characterizing portion 092IW, the timer effect is executed during the target variable display. It is realized by setting a production control pattern and executing various production controls based on the production control pattern in the production process during variable display (S172).

In addition, not limited to the configuration of this characteristic part 092IW, for example, it is not decided whether or not to execute the timer effect at the time of starting winning, and whether or not to execute the timer preparation effect described later and the effect mode in the case of executing it are determined. It may be determined whether or not to execute the timer effect when the target variable display is started. Further, in this case, whether or not to execute the timer effect and the effect mode in the case of execution may be determined at different ratios according to whether or not the timer preparation effect is to be executed and the effect mode.

Further, for example, the timer effect may be started during the variable display that is executed before the target variable display, or at the timing after a predetermined period has passed since the target variable display is started. You may start. That is, the timer effect may be started at an arbitrary timing from the timing of starting winning to the end of the target variable display. Similarly, for the timer preparation effect that foretells that the timer effect will be executed, any timing from the timing of the start winning to the end of the target variable display (however, until the timing when the execution period of the timer effect can be secured) You may start with

FIG. 17-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a timer effect determination table. In step 092 IWS008, a random number for determining the effect is extracted, and the timer effect determination table is referred to, and the newly received commands (symbol designation command and variable category command) at the time of starting winning are "non-super reach", "super Based on whether it corresponds to either of "reach failure" and "super reach jackpot", the timer effect is set to "no execution", "execution first effect mode (25 seconds)" and "execution second effect mode (30 seconds)". second)”.

Features of the timer effect determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 17-4(A), in the timer effect determination table, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "big win", compared to the case of "lose", the timer effect is more "not executed" than "no execution". Judgment values are assigned so as to increase the percentage of judgments of "executed". In addition, in the timer effect determination table, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "big hit", compared to the case of "losing", the "second effect with execution mode (25 seconds)" is higher than the "first effect mode with execution (25 seconds)". Judgment values are assigned so that the percentage determined in "mode (30 seconds)" is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that a big win is achieved when the timer performance is executed and further when the second performance mode (30 seconds) is executed rather than the first performance mode (25 seconds). Become. That is, the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of second presentation mode (30 seconds)>first presentation mode (25 seconds)>no execution.

If it is determined not to execute the timer effect in step S092IWS008 (N of step S092IWS009), the process proceeds to step S092IWS012, and if it is determined to be executed (Y of step S092IWS009), the effect control CPU 120 executes the timer effect. A timer effect flag indicating that it has been decided to execute is set (step S092IWS010).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the timer preparation effect (step S092IWS011). The timer preparation effect is one of the preparation effects, and foretells that the timer effect will be executed before the timer effect is executed.

FIG. 17-4(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a timer preparation effect determination table. In step 092IWS006, a random number for determining the effect is extracted, the timer preparation effect determination table is referred to, and based on the effect mode of the timer effect, the timer preparation effect is set to "no execution", "executed first effect mode ( (small effect)" or "executed, second rendering mode (large effect)".

Features of the timer preparation effect determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 17-4(B), in the timer preparation effect determination table, as the effect mode of the timer effect has a higher expectation for a big hit, the timer preparation effect is more "executed" than "no execution". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio of the judgments of "Yes" is high. Further, in the timer preparation effect determination table, as the effect mode of the timer effect has a higher expectation for a big hit, the "second effect mode with execution (character A)" is more likely than the "first effect mode with execution (character A)". Judgment values are assigned so that the percentage determined to be "Character B)" is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that a big hit is achieved when the timer preparation performance is executed and further when the second performance mode (character B) is executed rather than the first performance mode (character A). become. That is, the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of second effect mode (character B)>first effect mode (character A)>no execution.

This characterizing portion 092IW is configured such that the effect mode of the executable jackpot suggestive effect is different depending on which effect mode of the preparation effect is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17-3(B), when the suspension display advance notice preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed, the suspension display is performed in one of the first to third effect modes. When the advance notice effect is executed and the pending display advance notice preparation effect of the second effect mode is executed, the pending display advance notice effect is executed in one of the second to third effect modes. Further, as shown in FIG. 17-4(B), when the timer preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed, the timer effect is executed in one of the first to second effect modes, When the timer effect of the second effect mode is executed, the timer effect is executed by the second effect mode. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be varied depending on the production mode of the preparation production, and each production form of the preparation production (that is, each expectation level) is executed in combination with other preparation production and big hit suggestion production. It is possible to suitably adjust the degree of expectation at the time.

Also, in this characterizing portion 092IW, the big hit suggestion effect is configured to be executable without executing the corresponding preparation effect. Specifically, when it is determined to execute a pending display notice effect or a timer effect, it may be determined not to execute the pending display notice preparation effect or timer preparation effect (Fig. 17-3 (B), Fig. 17- 4(B)). And it is configured such that the easiness of execution differs depending on whether or not an uncorresponding preparation effect has been executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17-3, when the result of determination at the time of winning is a big hit, it is likely to be decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect. Also, as shown in FIG. 17-4, it is likely to be determined that the timer effect is also executed. However, it may be decided not to execute the timer preparation effect. Then, when the pending display advance notice preparation effect not corresponding to the timer effect is executed, the timer effect is more likely to be executed than when the pending display advance notice preparation effect is not executed. With such a configuration, interest can be preferably maintained.

In this characteristic part 092IW, when the preparatory effect is executed, the corresponding big hit suggestive effect is always executed. A normal preparation effect to be executed and a fake preparation effect to which the corresponding jackpot suggesting effect is not executed after the effect may be executable. In this case, when the fake suspension display advance notice preparation effect is executed, compared to when the fake suspension display advance notice preparation effect is not executed, the timer effect (may or may not be accompanied by the timer preparation effect) may be absent) may be executed at a higher rate. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player when the pending display advance notice preparation effect is false, and it is possible to preferably maintain the interest.

Further, in this characteristic portion 092IW, the proportion of which performance mode of the jackpot suggestive effect is executed differs depending on whether or not the preparation effect is executed. Specifically, when the performance mode of the pending display notice effect and the timer preparation effect is determined to be the second effect mode, compared with the case where the first effect mode is determined, the pending display notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect are performed. The percentage of decisions to execute is high (see FIGS. 17-3(B) and 17-4(B)). With such a configuration, interest can be preferably maintained.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the chance eye announcement effect (step 092IWS012).

The chance eye notice effect is obtained by deriving and displaying a chance eye symbol (in this example, a combination of decoration symbols "123") as a display result of the variable display executed before the target variable display. This is an effect suggesting that the variable display result of the variable display (or any of the variable displays that are not specified and that are held and stored) will be a big hit.

FIG. 17-5(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a chance eye announcement effect determination table. At step 092 IWS012, a random number for determination of effect is extracted, and the chance eye notice effect determination table is referred to, and the newly received command (symbol designation command and variable category command) at the time of start winning is "non-super reach", Either ``no execution'' or ``with execution'' is determined for the chance notice performance based on which one of ``loss of super reach'', ``jackpot other than jackpot A'', and ``jackpot A'' corresponds.

The feature of the chance eye announcement effect determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 17-5(A), in the chance prediction effect determination table, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "big hit", compared to the case of "loss", the chance prediction effect is "not executed". The determination value is assigned so that the rate of determination of "executed" is higher than that of ". With such a configuration, it is suggested that there will be a big hit when the chance's foretelling effect is executed.

This characteristic part 092IW is configured to be able to execute a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, and a chance eye notice effect as the jackpot suggestion effect, and FIG. 17-3 (A), FIG. As shown in 17-5(A), the chance notice effect is executed when the win judgment result is executed at a lower rate than the reserved display notice effect and the timer effect, and the result is a loss. Therefore, there is little difference in the execution ratio between when the winning judgment result is a big hit and when it is not. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win is lower in the chance-eye forewarning effect than in the pending display forewarning effect and the timer effect.

When it is decided not to execute the chance eye notice effect in step S092IWS012 (N of step S092IWS013), the process proceeds to step S092IWS015, and when it is decided to execute (Y of step S092IWS013), the effect control CPU 120 A chance eye notice effect flag indicating that it is decided to execute the eye notice effect is set (step S092IWS014).

Next, when the pending display notice effect flag is set (Y in step S092IWS015), the effect control CPU 120 displays a new pending storage display according to the determination of the pending display notice preparation effect (step S092IWS016). .

In step S092IWS016, for example, when it is determined to execute the suspension display advance notice preparation effect of the first effect mode, the image display device 5 displays a new suspension memory display in the normal mode, and also displays the suspension memory display. A small effect image (see, for example, the small effect image 092IW004b in FIG. 17-11 (B1)) is displayed near the . Further, when it is decided to execute the pending display advance notice preparation effect of the second effect mode, in the image display device 5, a new pending memory display is displayed in the normal mode, and an effect is displayed in the vicinity of the pending memory display. A large image (see, for example, the large effect image 092IW004b in FIG. 17-11 (A1)) is displayed.

Next, when the timer effect flag is not set (N of step S092IWS017), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is, and when the timer effect flag is set (Y of step S092IWS017), It is checked whether or not the pending display advance notice preparation effect is the first effect mode (step S092IWS018). Then, when the pending display advance notice preparation effect is the first effect mode (Y in step S092IWS018), effect control CPU 120 executes a timer preparation effect (step S092IWS019). After that, the process ends.

In step S092IWS019 (and step S092IWS022 to be described later), for example, when it is determined that the timer preparation effect of the first effect mode is to be executed, character A for notifying that the timer effect will be executed is displayed on the image display device 5. An image (see, for example, image 092IW005 of character A in FIG. 17-10(E)) is displayed. Further, when it is decided to execute the timer preparation effect of the second effect mode, the image display device 5 displays a character B image for notifying that the timer effect will be executed.

When the pending display notice effect flag is not set in step S092IWS015 (N of step S092IWS015), effect control CPU 120 displays a new pending storage display in a normal mode (step S092IWS020).

Next, when the timer effect flag is not set (N of step S092IWS021), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is, and when the timer effect flag is set (Y of step S092IWS021), A timer preparation effect is executed (step S092IWS022). After that, the process ends.

FIG. 17-6 is a flow chart showing a pre-reading notice execution process (step 092IWS161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 17-1.

In the pre-reading notice execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the pending display notice effect flag is set (step 092IWS102) when it is time to shift the reserved storage (Y in step 092IWS101). .

When the pending display notice effect flag is set (Y in step 092IWS102), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the pending display notice preparation effect is being executed (step 092IWS103).

When the pending display notice preparation effect is being executed (Y in step 092IWS103), the effect control CPU 120 ends the pending display notice preparation effect and executes the pending display notice preparation effect (step 092IWS104).

Next, when the timer effect flag is set (Y of step 092IWS105), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the timer preparation effect is being executed (step 092IWS106).

When the timer preparation effect is not being executed (N of step 092IWS103), the effect control CPU 120 executes the timer preparation effect (step 092IWS107).

Next, execution timings of the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect, and the timer effect and the timer preparation effect will be described. FIG. 17-7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the execution timing of the pending display notice effect (preparation effect) and the timer effect (preparation effect).

FIG. 17-7(A) shows an example of the case where it is decided to execute the suspension display notice effect and the suspension display notice preparation effect at the time of starting winning. In this case, the suspension display notice preparation effect is started at the timing of the start winning (for example, corresponding to the processing of steps 092IWS015 to 092IWS016 of the pre-reading notice setting processing shown in FIG. 17-2), and is suspended at the shift timing of the suspension storage. After the display announcement preparation effect is completed, the pending display announcement effect is executed (for example, corresponding to steps 092IWS101 to 092IWS104 of the pre-reading announcement execution process shown in FIG. 17-6).

FIG. 17-7(B) shows an example of a case where it is decided to execute the timer effect and the timer advance notice preparation effect at the time of starting winning. In this case, the timer preparation effect is started at the timing of the start winning (for example, corresponding to the processing of steps 092IWS021 to 092IWS022 of the pre-reading notice setting processing shown in FIG. 17-2), and at the start timing of the target variable display. When the timer preparation effect ends and the timer effect is started (for example, the effect control pattern for executing the timer effect is set in the variable display start setting process (S171), and the output control pattern is set in the variable display effect process (S172). realized by executing various production controls based on patterns).

FIG. 17-7(C) shows an example of the case where it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect (first effect mode) and the timer effect and the timer notice preparation effect at the time of starting winning. . In this case, the pending display notice preparation effect (first effect mode) is started at the timing of the start winning (for example, it corresponds to the processing of steps 092IWS015 to 092IWS016 of the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 17-2). , the timer preparation effect is started (for example, corresponding to the processing of steps 092IWS018 to 092IWS019 of the pre-reading notice setting processing shown in FIG. 17-2). Then, at the shift timing of the pending memory, the pending display notice preparation effect is completed and the pending display notice effect is executed (for example, corresponding to the processing of steps 092IWS101 to 092IWS104 of the pre-reading notice execution processing shown in FIG. 17-6). After that, the timer preparation effect ends at the start timing of the target variable display, and the timer effect starts (for example, in the variable display start setting process (S171), the effect control pattern for executing the timer effect is set, It is realized by executing various effects control based on the output control pattern in the variable display effect process (S172).

FIG. 17-7(D) shows an example of a case where it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the timer effect and the timer notice preparation effect at the time of starting winning. . In this case, the pending display notice preparation effect (first effect mode) is started at the timing of the start winning (for example, it corresponds to the processing of steps 092IWS015 to 092IWS016 of the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 17-2). , the timer preparation effect is not started (for example, it corresponds to the process of step 092IWS018 of the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 17-2). Then, when the pending display notice preparation effect is completed at the shift timing of the pending memory and the pending display notice preparation effect is executed (for example, corresponding to the processing of steps 092IWS101 to 092IWS104 of the pre-reading notice execution processing shown in FIG. 17-6). , the timer preparation effect is started (for example, corresponding to the processing of steps 092IWS105 to 092IWS107 of the pre-reading notice execution processing shown in FIG. 17-6). After that, the timer preparation effect ends at the start timing of the target variable display, and the timer effect starts (for example, in the variable display start setting process (S171), the effect control pattern for executing the timer effect is set, It is realized by executing various effects control based on the output control pattern in the variable display effect process (S172).

Next, a description will be given of the effects of the pending display advance notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect. FIG. 17-8 is an explanatory diagram showing the effects of the pending display advance notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect.

FIG. 17-8 shows an example of a case where it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the timer effect and the timer notice preparation effect at the time of starting winning, and FIG. -7(D) corresponds to the example.

As shown in FIGS. 17-8 (A) and (B), a new starting prize is generated during the variable display, and based on the starting prize, the suspension display notice effect and the suspension display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) When the execution of the timer effect and the timer advance notice preparation effect (first effect mode) is determined, a new suspended memory display is displayed in the normal mode in the first suspended memory display area 092IW001 and the second suspended memory display area 092IW002. be. At this time, the suspension display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) is started, and a lightning bolt-shaped image 092IW004a with a large effect is displayed in the vicinity of the new suspension memory display. Note that the timer advance notice preparation effect is restricted from being executed simultaneously with the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode), so it is not executed at this timing.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 17-8(C) to 17-8(D), when the variable display is completed and the pending storage is shifted and a new variable display is started, the pending display notification preparation is performed. The rendering (second rendering mode) ends expansively (for example, display control is performed such that the lightning bolt-shaped large-effect image 092IW004a acts on the reserved memory display and disappears), and the display mode of the reserved memory display changes to red. A holding display forewarning effect (third effect mode) is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 17-8(E), the timer preparation effect (first effect mode) is started, and an image 092IW005 of character A for notifying that the timer effect will be executed is displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 17-8(F) to 17-8(G), when a new variable display targeted for the timer effect is started, the timer preparation effect (first effect mode) is expansive. , and a timer effect (first effect mode) is started in which the timer is updated and displayed for 25 seconds, which is the period until the specific effect during the variable display.

This characterizing portion 092IW is configured to be able to execute a pending display notice effect and a timer effect as a jackpot suggesting effect suggesting that the variable display result of the variable display will result in a big win. In addition, a holding display notice preparation effect for notifying that the holding display notice effect will be executed before the holding display notice effect is executed, and a timer for notifying that the timer effect will be executed before the timer effect is executed. It is configured to be able to execute the preparation performance as the preparation performance.

Such a preparatory performance has a function of drawing attention to the big-win suggestive performance executed after the preparatory performance, but when a plurality of preparatory performances are simultaneously executed, the player's expectations are too high, resulting in a big win. If not, there is a risk that interest will be greatly reduced. Therefore, in this characterizing portion 092IW, simultaneous execution of a plurality of preparation effects is restricted. Specifically, the pending display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the timer preparation effect are executed in different periods and are configured not to be executed at the same time (in this example, the pending display notice preparation effect ( After the execution of the second effect mode) is completed, the timer preparation effect is executed (see FIG. 17-7(D)). With such a configuration, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, in the configuration of this characteristic portion 092IW, the execution period of the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the timer preparation effect are configured so as not to overlap at all. The execution period may be made different by making one of the end timing different.

Further, in the configuration of this characteristic part 092IW, the pending display advance notice preparation effect (first effect mode), which has a lower expectation level than the pending display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode), can be executed simultaneously with the timer preparation effect. However, not limited to such a configuration, the reservation display advance notice preparation effect (first effect mode) is not as high as the reservation display notice preparation effect (second effect mode), but the timer preparation is performed at a predetermined ratio. It may not be executed at the same time as the presentation. Also, a plurality of preparation effects may not always be executed at the same time.

Further, for example, the effect mode of the pending display advance notice preparation effect is the first effect mode with lower expectations than the second effect mode, and the effect mode of the timer preparation effect is the first effect mode with lower expectations than the second effect mode. It may be executed at the same time only in the case of the presentation mode.

Further, for example, when a plurality of preparation performances are executed simultaneously (or when a plurality of preparation performances are simultaneously executed in a second performance mode with a high degree of expectation), a big win may be determined. .

Further, in the configuration of this characteristic portion 092IW, a pattern is shown in which the display mode of the pending memory display changes once, but a pattern is provided in which the display mode of the pending memory display (and the active display) changes multiple times. When the reserved memory display (or active display) is displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode (specifically, a display mode in which there is a display mode with a higher degree of expectation), the retained memory An effect suggesting that the display mode of the display (or active display) will change (for example, if an arrow flies toward the reserved memory display (or active display) and pierces the reserved memory display (or active display), the change will occur. , the effect that does not change unless stabbed (may be a dedicated effect that is executed only when the display mode of the reserved memory (or the active display) is in a display mode other than the normal mode), etc.) may be executed more frequently. , may be prevented from being executed.

Next, a description will be given of the processing for executing the chance prediction effect. FIG. 17-9 is a flow chart showing an example of the chance prediction setting process. The chance eye advance notice setting process is executed as part of the variable display start setting process (step S171) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 17-1.

In the chance prediction setting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the chance prediction effect flag is set (step 092IWS201). If the chance prediction effect flag is set, the decision table is used to determine whether or not the chance prediction effect is to be executed (step 092, IWS 202).

FIG. 17-10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a chance prediction execution propriety determination table. As shown in FIG. 17-10, when neither the pending display notice preparation effect nor the timer preparation effect is being executed, the percentage of "executable" (that is, execution of the chance eye notice effect) is 100%. allow). In addition, when either the pending display notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect is being executed in the second effect mode, the percentage of 20% is "executable" (that is, the execution of the chance notice effect is permitted). ), and 80% of the time, it is determined that "execution is not permitted" (that is, the execution of the chance prediction effect is not permitted). In addition, when either the pending display advance notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect is executed in the first effect mode (and neither of them is executed in the second effect mode), the ratio is 100%. , it is determined that "execution is not allowed" (that is, the execution of the chance notice effect is not permitted).

If execution of the chance eye announcement effect is permitted in step 092IWS202 (Y in step 092IWS203), the chance eye symbol (in this example, a combination of decorative symbols "123") is determined as the decorative symbol stop symbol (step 092IWS204). It should be noted that, before step 092IWS204, when the stop design of the decoration design has already been determined, the stop design of the decoration design is changed to the chance eye design.

Next, a description will be given of the effects of the pending display notice preparation effect and the chance eye notice effect. FIG. 17-11 is an explanatory diagram showing the mode of presentation of the pending display notice preparation effect and the opportunity notice effect.

As shown in FIGS. 17-11 (A1) and (A2), the suspension display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) is executed, and a lightning bolt-shaped image 092IW004a with a large effect is displayed near the suspension memory display. Occasionally, there is a case where the execution of the chance prediction effect is permitted, and when the execution is permitted, the chance symbol (a combination of decorative symbols "123" in this example) is used as the decorative symbol stop symbol. Is displayed. That is, the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the chance eye notice effect are executed simultaneously.

As shown in FIGS. 17-11 (B1) and (B2), the pending display notice preparation effect (first effect mode) is executed, and a small and large lightning bolt-shaped effect image 092IW004b is displayed near the pending memory display. Since execution of the chance's foretelling performance is not permitted when the game is on, a stop pattern of a decorative pattern different from the chance's pattern (combination of decorative patterns of "123" in this example) is displayed. That is, the pending display notice preparation effect (first effect mode) and the chance eye notice effect are not executed at the same time.

In this characteristic part 092IW, it is possible to execute a chance notice effect separately from the pending display notice effect and the timer effect as the jackpot suggestion effect, and this chance notice effect is a preparation effect such as a pending display notice preparation effect and a timer preparation effect. (that is, it is executed in a period before execution of the target variable display, see FIGS. 17-11 (A1) and (A2)). In addition, as described above, the degree of expectation for a big win is lower in the chance eye notice effect than in the pending display notice effect and the timer effect. Therefore, when the preparatory performance is being executed (that is, before the big hit suggesting performance is executed and the degree of expectation is unknown), the chance prediction performance with low expectation of the big win is executed. If so, there is a possibility that the production effect of the preparation production is lowered. Moreover, there is a possibility that the suggested degree of expectation may become difficult to understand. Therefore, the present characteristic part 092IW is configured so that the second chance notice effect is more likely to be executed when the pending display notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect is not executed than when it is executed ( For example, see FIGS. 17-10). With such a configuration, interest can be preferably maintained.

Further, in this characteristic part 092IW, when the preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed and when the preparation effect of the second effect mode with higher expectation than the first effect mode is executed, the chance notice is given. It is configured such that the easiness of execution of the production is different. Specifically, the second chance notice effect is more pronounced when the pending display notice preparation effect is executed in the second effect mode (large effect) than when it is executed in the first effect mode (small effect). It is configured so that execution is easily permitted (see Fig. 17-10). With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest while securing an opportunity to execute the chance prediction effect.

As described above, in the present characteristic portion 092IW, a suggestive effect (for example, a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance eye notice effect, etc.) that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) is provided. Executable suggestive effect execution means, and preparation effect execution capable of executing a preparation effect (for example, pending display advance notice preparation effect, timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed. means, the suggesting effect includes a first suggesting effect (for example, a pending display notice effect) and a second suggesting effect (for example, a timer effect) different from the first suggesting effect, and the preparation effect includes a second A first preparation effect (for example, pending display notice preparation effect) for notifying that one suggestion effect will be executed, and a second preparation effect (for example, timer preparation effect) for notifying that the second suggestion effect will be executed. , the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect can be executed at the same time, and the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect are restricted from being executed at the same time (for example, the pending display advance notice preparation The effect (second effect mode) and the timer preparation effect are not executed at the same time (see FIG. 17-7(D)). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, in this characteristic part 092IW, a suggestive effect (for example, a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance eye notice effect, etc.) suggesting that it is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) can be executed. An execution means and a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparation effect (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect, a timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed, The suggesting effect includes a first suggesting effect (for example, a pending display notice effect), a second suggesting effect (for example, a timer effect) different from the first suggesting effect, and the first suggesting effect and the second suggesting effect. includes a different third suggesting effect (for example, a chance first notice effect), and the preparation effect includes a first preparation effect (for example, a hold display notice preparation effect) for notifying that the first suggesting effect will be executed, and a second Including a second preparation effect (for example, a timer preparation effect) that foretells execution of the second suggestion effect, and the third suggestion effect, the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect are executed in parallel during the same period. It is possible (see FIGS. 17-11 (A1) and (A2)), and when either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is being executed, either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect The third suggestive effect is more likely to be executed when neither is being executed (for example, see FIG. 17-10). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, in this characteristic part 092IW, a suggestive effect (for example, a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance eye notice effect, etc.) suggesting that it is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) can be executed. An execution means and a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparation effect (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect, a timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed, The suggestive effects include a plurality of types of first suggestive effects with different expectations (for example, pending display announcement effects with different expectations depending on the effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a timer effect) different from the first suggested effects. and the first suggesting effect includes a predetermined first suggesting effect and a special first suggesting effect with a higher degree of expectation than the predetermined first suggesting effect (for example, a first effect mode (blue) suspended display (including the notice effect and the pending display notice effect of the third effect mode (red)), and the preparation effect is the first preparation effect for notifying that the first suggestion effect will be executed (for example, the reserve display notice preparation effect). and a second preparation effect (for example, a timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the second suggestive effect will be executed, and the first preparation effect includes a first effect mode and the first effect as a effect mode. There is a second effect mode in which the special first suggestion effect is more likely to be executed than the mode (for example, there are a first effect mode (small effect) and a second effect mode (large effect), and a second effect mode (large effect). ) is executed, the holding display forewarning effect of the first effect mode (blue) is not executed, and the holding display forewarning effect of the third effect mode (red) is likely to be executed. 3 (B)), the execution ratio of the second preparation effect is different between when the first preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed and when the first preparation effect of the second effect mode is executed ( For example, the timer preparation effect is executed at the same time when the pending display notice preparation effect of the first effect mode (small effect) is being executed, but the pending display notice preparation effect of the second effect mode (large effect) is executed. are not executed at the same time (see Figure 17-7). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, in this characteristic part 092IW, a suggestive effect (for example, a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance eye notice effect, etc.) suggesting that it is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) can be executed. An execution means and a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparation effect (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect, a timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed, The suggestive effects include a plurality of types of first suggestive effects with different expectations (for example, pending display announcement effects with different expectations depending on the effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a timer effect) different from the first suggested effects. and a third suggesting effect (for example, a chance forewarning effect) different from the first suggesting effect and the second suggesting effect, and the first suggesting effect includes a predetermined first suggesting effect and the predetermined first suggesting effect. Including a special first suggestive effect with a higher expectation than the effect (for example, including a first effect mode (blue) pending display notice effect and a third effect mode (red) pending display notice effect), preparation The effects include a first preparation effect (for example, pending display notice preparation effect) for notifying that the first suggestive effect will be executed, and a second preparation effect (for example, timer The third suggestion effect, the first preparation effect, and the second preparation effect can be executed in parallel during the same period (see FIGS. 17-11 (A1) and (A2)). The first preparation effect has a first effect mode and a second effect mode in which a special first suggestive effect is more likely to be executed than the first effect mode (for example, the first effect mode (small effect)). There is a second production mode (large effect), and when the pending display notice preparation production of the second production mode (large effect) is executed, the holding display notice preparation production of the first production mode (blue) is not executed, It is easy to execute the pending display forewarning effect of the 3 effect modes (red) (see FIG. 17-3 (B)), when the first preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed, and when the first preparation effect of the second effect mode is executed The execution ratio of the third suggestive effect differs depending on when the effect is executed (for example, the second chance preview effect is more effective when the pending display preview preparation effect is executed in the second effect mode (large effect). Execution is more likely to be permitted than when it is executed in the first rendering mode (small effect) (see Fig. 17-10). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 092IW, the period during which the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect are executed are different (for example, after the execution of the pending display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) is completed, the timer preparation effect is executed (see FIG. 17-7(D)). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 092IW, the first suggestive effect includes a plurality of types of effect modes (eg, first effect mode (blue), second effect mode (green), third effect mode (red), etc.). 3 (A)), and the first preparation effect has a plurality of types of effect modes (eg, first effect mode (small effect), second effect mode (large effect), etc.). -3 (B)), and depending on which production mode the first preparation production is executed, the production mode of the first suggestive production that can be executed differs (for example, the first When the holding display advance notice preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed, the holding display notice preparation effect is executed in one of the first to third effect modes, and the holding display notice preparation effect of the second effect mode is executed. If it is done, the pending display notice effect is executed in one of the second to third effect modes). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, in this characteristic part 092IW, the suggestion effect can be executed without executing the corresponding preparation effect There is a case where the timer preparation effect is determined not to be executed (see FIGS. 17-3 (B) and 17-4 (B)), depending on whether or not an uncorresponding preparation effect is executed, the ease of execution Different (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-3, when the winning determination result is a big hit, it is likely to be decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect. Also, as shown in FIG. 17-4 In addition, it is easy to determine if the timer effect is also executed.However, it may be determined that the timer preparation effect is not executed.Then, when the pending display notice preparation effect that does not correspond to the timer effect is executed, the pending display The timer effect is more likely to be executed than when the advance notice preparation effect is not executed). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 092IW, the ratio of which suggestive effect of the effect mode is executed differs depending on whether or not the preparation effect is executed (for example, the effect mode of the pending display notice effect and the timer preparation effect). is determined to be the second effect mode, compared to the case of being determined to be the first effect mode, the ratio of deciding to execute the pending display advance notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect is high. See FIG. 17-4(B)). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

It should be noted that the configuration indicated by the characterizing portion 092IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration indicated by other characterizing portions such as the characterizing portion 153SG to form a gaming machine. For example, the timer preparation effect indicated by the characteristic part 092IW indicates that a timer effect suggesting a period until the start of execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is executed, as well as suggesting that a big hit will be achieved as indicated by the feature part 153SG. The timer performance can execute a big hit suggesting performance suggesting a big hit as a suggesting performance during the rear variable display during the ready-to-win performance or a setting suggesting performance suggesting the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加You may make it become.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Pachinko game machine 2... Game board 3... Frame for game machine 4A, 4B... Special symbol display device 5... Image display device 6A... Winning ball device 6B... Variable winning ball device 7... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R... Speaker 9 ... Frame LED
REFERENCE SIGNS LIST 10... General winning port 11... Main board 12... Performance control board 13... Sound control board 14... LED control board 15... Relay board 17... Special variable winning ball device 20... Normal symbol display 21... Gate switch 22A, 22B... Starting Mouth switch 23... First count switch 24... Second count switch 30... Ball-hitting handle 31A... Stick controller 31B... Push button 32... Movable body 41... Pass gate 100... Microcomputer for game control 101, 121... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124... random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120 ... CPU for production control
123: display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
setting means capable of setting a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player;
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting control to the advantageous state;
a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparation effect for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed;
and a production determination means capable of deciding whether or not to execute the production ,
The suggestive effect comprises a first suggestive effect, a second suggestive effect different from the first suggestive effect, and the first suggestive effect different from the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect when executed. and a third suggestive effect in which the rate of control to the advantageous state is lower than that of the second suggestive effect,
The preparation effect includes a first preparation effect for notifying that the first suggestive effect will be executed, and a second preparation effect for notifying that the second suggestive effect will be executed,
The effect determining means executes respective effects of the first suggesting effect, the second suggesting effect, the third suggesting effect, the first preparation effect, and the second preparation effect. It is possible to individually decide whether or not
Based on the determination of the effect determining means, the suggestive effect executing means and the preparation effect executing means can execute the third suggestive effect, the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect in parallel during the same period. and
The third suggestion is higher when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is executed than when either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is executed. The production is easy to execute,
The preparation effect execution means is capable of executing the first preparation effect by a first pattern and a second pattern having a lower rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first pattern when executed,
The first preparation effect and the third suggestive effect of the first pattern can be executed in parallel during the same period, while the first preparation effect and the third suggestive effect of the second pattern can be executed in parallel during the same period. and do not run
The first preparation effect and the second preparation effect differ in the length of the period during which they are executed,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the second suggestive effect corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images